Você está na página 1de 296

CUSTOMER

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


User Guide

Content

Help Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1.1

User Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

1.2

Requesting Roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1.3

Collaboration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

1.4

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Mobile App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Home. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2.1

Creating a Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2.2

Working with Tiles and Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

3.1

Introduction to Modeler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Analyzing Account Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Planning Models and Analytics Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Models Based on HANA Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Business Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Currency Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Explore Hierarchies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Model Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Model Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Explore Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Explore Formulas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.2

Creating a New Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50


Creating a Model from Scratch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Creating Models Using the Planning Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

3.3

Creating Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Editing Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Editing Dimension Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Dimension Preferences: Data Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

3.4

Clearing Model Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

3.5

Deleting a Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

3.6

Data Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57


Connecting to Google Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
About Creating a Model from a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
About Importing Data from Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
About Importing from BPC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Importing a Model from a BW System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Content

Importing Models from HANA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76


Importing a Model from SuccessFactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Creating a Model from a Live Data Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Creating a Model from a Universe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Importing Universe Data into an Existing Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Creating a Model from SAP ERP data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Importing SAP ERP Data into an Existing Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Creating a Model from an SQL Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Importing SQL Data into an Existing Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
3.7

Data Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85


Exporting a model to a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Exporting data to BPC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

3.8

Creating Points of Interest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88


Creating Point of Interest Data from an Esri Shapefile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Creating Point of Interest Data from a Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Allocations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

4.1

Allocation Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

4.2

Allocations Role and Permissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

4.3

Spreading and Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

4.4

Spreading a Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

4.5

Example: Spreading a Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

4.6

Distributing a Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

4.7

Example: Distributing a Value to Unbooked Cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

4.8

Structured Allocations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

4.9

Creating Pools for Structured Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

4.10

Mapping Pools and Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

4.11

Allocation Processes, Steps, and Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

4.12

Creating an Allocation Step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

4.13

Creating Allocation Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

4.14

Executing an Allocation Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Value Driver Trees (Beta Feature). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

5.1

Creating a Value Driver Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

5.2

Exploring Model Data for a Value Driver Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

5.3

Managing Value Driver Trees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Stories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

6.1

Story Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116


Create a New Story. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Edit a Story. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Copy a Story. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Content

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Share a Story. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118


6.2

Explore Your Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119


Accessing the Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Guided Machine Discoveries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

6.3

Canvas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Conditional Formatting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Analyzing Geographical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Uploading Custom Pictograms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Adding Dynamic Text to a Story. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Adding an RSS Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Linking to another Page, Story, or External URL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Scaling Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Creating a Linked Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Value Driver Trees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

6.4

Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Creating a Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Modifying a Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Formatting a Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Working with Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Copying and Pasting Cell Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Cell References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
The Formula Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
About Input Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
About Version Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Key Performance Indicators (KPIs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Predictive Time-Series Forecasting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Setting the Cutover Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

6.5

Story Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

6.6

Creating Linked Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

6.7

Editing Linked Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

6.8

Story and Page Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201


Applying a Story or Page Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Converting a Story Filter to a Page Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Converting a Page Filter to a Story Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Changing Story and Page Filter Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

6.9

Examining a Chart or Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

6.10

Designer Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

6.11

Formatting a Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

6.12

Formatting a Tile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

6.13

Creating and Formatting a Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Content

6.14

Previewing a Story. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

6.15

Exporting to PDF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

6.16

Collaboration for Stories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Digital Boardroom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

7.1

About the Digital Boardroom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

7.2

Preparing Stories for the Digital Boardroom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

7.3

Creating and Editing an Agenda. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

8.1

Uploading a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

8.2

Sharing a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

8.3

Assigning Permissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

8.4

Managing Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

9.1

Creating Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

9.2

Creating Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

9.3

Monitoring Events and Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

9.4

Explore Reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

9.5

Collaboration for Events and Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

9.6

Importing Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

9.7

Exporting Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

10

Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

10.1

Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Creating Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Deleting Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Importing Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Exporting Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Mapping SAML Attributes to Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

10.2

Creating Roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

10.3

Standard Application Roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

10.4

Permissions at the Activity Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

10.5

Approving Requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

10.6

Creating or Changing User Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

10.7

Data Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

10.8

Downloading and Deleting Data Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

10.9

Activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246

10.10

Downloading and Deleting Activity Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

11

Deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

11.1

Creating an Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Content

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

11.2

Creating an Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

12

Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

12.1

Import Data Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253


Installing the SAP HANA Cloud Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP BPC System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP BW System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Creating an Import Data Connection to a Universe (UNX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP ERP System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Creating an Import Data Connection to Salesforce (SFDC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Creating an Import Data Connection to SuccessFactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SQL Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

12.2

Live Data Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272


Creating a Live Data Connection to SAP HANA or SAP HCP via Apache HTTP Server. . . . . . . . . . . 274
Creating a Live Data Connection to SAP HANA or SAP HCP via SAP Web Dispatcher. . . . . . . . . . . 278

12.3

Scheduling an Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

13

System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

13.1

Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

13.2

Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

14

System Requirements and Technical Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

15

Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Content

Help Center

Have a question? Get help with SAP BusinessObjects Cloud here.

Find a Help Topic


Home [page 14]
Models [page 16]
Allocations [page 91]
Value Driver Trees (Beta Feature) [page 109]
Stories [page 115]
Digital Boardroom [page 217]
Files [page 223]
Events [page 227]
Security [page 233]
Deployment [page 249]
Connections [page 252]
System [page 284]
System Requirements and Technical Prerequisites [page 287]
Glossary [page 292]

Additional Help Resources


Table 1:
Resource

Description

Release Notes

Information on new features and other changes introduced in


past updates.

Instructional Videos

Training videos to help you get started with SAP


BusinessObjects Cloud.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Help Center

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

1.1

User Profiles

A user profile resembles a business card and consists of standard user data, such as name and phone number.
The profile also includes user preferences.

Creating a basic user profile for a new user


When creating a new user in the user management area, a system administrator must enter at least a user ID, the
first name, and the last name of the user, which automatically display in the user profile.

Editing a profile
To display your user profile, select your user picture in the upper right corner (which may be the default image if
you haven't uploaded a user picture yet), and then select Profile. Select Edit to make changes to the profile.

User Preferences
In addition to name and contact information, these other settings can be changed:
Profile picture: By default, a photo placeholder is displayed. To upload your own picture, select the
placeholder.
Language: Choose a language from the list.
Date Formatting: Choose a date format from the list.
Number Formatting: Choose a number format from the list.
Clean up notifications older than: Choose a date after which you want the system to delete notifications.
Otherwise, the system keeps the most recent 500 notifications.
Email Notification: To receive information via email about system activities, for example when a new password
is set, enable this feature.
Send Anonymous Usage Data: Specifies if you consent to send diagnostic and usage data to SAP.

Password
To change your password, select Edit in your user profile. The Change Password section will appear as an option in
your user profile.
If you are using authentication via an SAML Identity Provider (IdP), or connecting with an SAP Cloud ID, select Edit
in your user profile. The Password section will appear as an option in your user profile. Selecting Change Password
will redirect you to the password change page.

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Help Center

Note
If you use an SAML IdP, and the SAML administrator has not supplied the URL of the password change page to
SAP, you will not be able to change your password. Contact your SAML administrator.

The user profile in the application


The user profile is reused in many parts of the application, for example, to easily identify the participants in a
discussion. When you select a user in any dialog, for example when you assign a manager to a user on the User
management page, the picture from the user profile displays in addition to the display name and ID. In addition,
you can display the full user profile to get information about the user in the following areas:
In the Collaboration panel, the name and picture of every participant of a discussion displays. If you hover the
cursor over the picture, you can display the full profile and start a one-to-one discussion with that user.
In the Event area, the picture of the user who is assigned to an event or a task is displayed in the details of the
event and task. For example, the profile of the user that needs to review a task displays.
In the User area of user management, you can display the full profile by clicking on the user's ID.

Related Information
Creating or Changing User Passwords [page 243]

1.2

Requesting Roles

As a user of SAP BusinessObjects Cloud, you can request additional roles in the system.

Context
To request roles as a business user, do the following:

Procedure
1. With the user name and initial password you received from your system administrator, log into SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud.
2. From the WELCOME menu in the upper right corner, choose Request Roles.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Help Center

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

3. In the dialog, choose one of the following options:


To request standard roles that the administrator has defined, choose Default Roles and select the role you
need.
To request individual roles, choose Self Service Roles and select the role you need.
4. You can optionally add a comment, for example, to explain why you need the selected role.
5. Send your request.

1.3

Collaboration

Use social collaboration options to support and optimize group decision-making processes.

Notifications and Email


Notifications are used throughout SAP BusinessObjects Cloud to send system messages to users. A notification
may be sent, for example, when KPI thresholds are exceeded, when users are invited to join a discussion or when
event reminders become due.
To read your notifications choose
(Notifications) on the main toolbar. Notifications can also be read by users
with the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud mobile app and sent to users by email.
After you read a notification, you can delete it by selecting the X icon that appears when you hover over it. To
delete all notifications, select

(Clear All) icon.

Note
Notification settings can be set in the User Preferences section of your Profile: you can choose whether to send
emails in addition to notifications (the email address for each user is defined in the user profile) and a
housekeeping option is available to automatically delete old notifications.

Discussion Threads
All collaboration activity is grouped under discussion threads. Choose
(Collaboration) from the main toolbar
to see a list of discussions that you have been invited to. You can start a new discussion at any time by choosing
(New Discussion) and inviting specific participants. Only people who have been invited can see the discussion.
Select a discussion to open it. All contributions which have been posted are listed in chronological order. Here you
can read all previous posts and make new contributions to the discussion. Discussions are fully integrated with
the application: you can simply click on any linked item in the thread to open the content. You can attach files to
discussions, either files that are already stored in the file repository or files saved locally on your computer.

10

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Help Center

You can leave, close or delete a discussion at any point in time. You can still read closed discussions (available
from the list of closed discussions) but no new additions can be made.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Help Center

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

11

Stories and Events


Stories and Events in particular are closely integrated with the Collaboration panel:
Whenever you create a new event a discussion thread is automatically created so that you can collaborate
with the group of colleagues assigned to the event. For any actions arising from a discussion thread you can
quickly create new tasks and assign these to colleagues.
If you create a new discussion while working on a story the discussion automatically inherits the name of the
story which is open and pins that story to the discussion. You can unpin the story from the discussion by
choosing

(Unpin from Discussion).

You can comment and discuss individual cell values in tables by choosing

Discuss Cell .

Related Information
Collaboration for Stories [page 216]
Collaboration for Events and Tasks [page 230]

1.4

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Mobile App

Use the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud mobile app on your iPhone, iPad, or iPod Touch device.

Prerequisites
Requires iOS 8.4 or later.

Context
With the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud mobile app, you have access to planning and analysis tools anywhere and
anytime. This app connects to the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud solution and enables you to:
Collaborate with colleagues through the chat function.
View events and tasks.
Receive and manage notifications in the app or the iOS notification center.

12

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Help Center

Procedure
Install the app
1. Download and install the mobile app from the App store here

Start the app


2. Tap C4Analytics to launch the app.
When you start the app for the first time, you are asked if you want to be sent notifications which might
include alerts, sounds, and icon badges. To allow notifications choose OK. You can change your settings at
any time in the general settings section of your device.
First Sign In
3. Set an application password to protect your data.
To reset a forgotten application password, on the welcome screen tap Forgot Password. To change your
application password, tap

(Settings) to go to your user profile and tap Change Application Password.

Connect to SAP BusinessObjects Cloud


4. Enter the server address, your SAP BusinessObjects Cloud user name and password, your tenant name, and
then tap Log On to complete your connection setup.
Table 2:
Connection Information

Example

Server

https://<SAP HANA
SERVER>.neo.ondemand.com

User Name

myUserID

Password

myPassword

Tenant

T1

After successfully setting up your connection to your SAP BusinessObjects Cloud solution, the next time you
start the mobile app you only need to enter your application password.

Related Information
System Requirements and Technical Prerequisites [page 287]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Help Center

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

13

Home

Your Home screen is the place where you can pin stories and visualizations, as tiles. You can also add personal
notes and upcoming events there.
When you first start SAP BusinessObjects Cloud, the Home screen displays quick-launch shortcuts that can help
you get started working on your analytics tasks right away. For example, you can:
Drag an Excel file onto the Home screen to import the data.
Launch the Financial Planning Wizard to create plans on the fly.
Start the Explorer, where you can begin analyzing data and creating visualizations.
When you drag an Excel file onto the Home screen, you can choose between I'm Feeling Lucky, and Prepare Model.
Choosing I'm Feeling Lucky creates a new story and displays your data in the Explorer. Here, you see your data
and create visualizations through faceted interaction. Choosing Prepare Dataset creates a new story and displays
your data in a grid. Here, you can perform data integration and preparation.
Your Home screen is private and you cannot share it with other users or add it to discussions. This also applies to
the notes and tiles you pin there.

Tasks
Creating a Note [page 14]
Working with Tiles and Notes [page 15]

2.1

Creating a Note

You can create a note to add text alongside the stories and other items pinned to your Home screen.
1. Choose

New Note .

2. Enter a title for the note and the text.


3. Choose OK to create your note.

14

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Home

2.2

Working with Tiles and Notes

Interact with tiles and notes on your Home screen.


You can do the following after selecting a tile or note:
Table 3:
Task

More Information

Edit a note
Choose

Edit

to edit the note text and title.

Navigate to a story
If the tile is a story, choose the
Go to to open the
source story. If you edit and save the story, the changes are
reflected in the tile.
Delete a tile or note
Choose
Home screen.

Delete

to remove a tile or note from the

View a tile in Full Screen mode


Choose

(Full Screen) to expand the tile to the full size of

the Home screen. Choose

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Home

(Exit Full Screen) to return.

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

15

Models

A model is a representation of the business data of an organization or business segment. Models are required in
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud as the basis for all data output. Use Modeler to create, maintain, and to load data to
models.

Introduction
A model is based on a single account but also includes one or more dimensions that are then used in the output
tables in Stories to analyze the account data these might include, for example, a breakdown of the data by time,
products, regions, or other categories.
Data is maintained in a hierarchical structure so that high-level views of the data can be examined in more detail
using drill-down features. Data is not visible in the model but the data is imported and refreshed using the Data
Integration features of modeling. Several options are available to support this, ranging from manual data entry to
scheduled updates from external systems such as SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (BPC).
The data integration features can also be used to import a complete model from other systems, and an additional
option for creating a model on-the-fly is to use the Planning Wizard which is available on the Home screen when
the product is first launched and is also integrated in the grids and tables features of Stories.
This Modeler section starts by describing the key features of models and then goes on to give details of the tasks
involved in model design and data integration.

Overview
The following illustration of the Modeler list screen gives an overview of some of the main functional areas
numbered 17.

1. Models Existing models are listed here. You can open a model by clicking the link text or by selecting one or
more models using the checkboxes.

16

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

2. Dimensions The individual dimensions that are used in models are saved independently and listed on a
separate tab page.
3. Currency Conversion If you are using multiple currencies in your data, exchange rates are maintained in
separate tables. These are saved independently of any model and are listed on a separate tab page.
4. Points of Interest Data for geographic locations which are displayed and used in your data analysis is
maintained here in Modeler.
5. Toolbar Common operations for managing models are available from the toolbar, this includes options to
Delete a model and to Clear (remove all data) from a model.
6. Import / export data The list of data import options that are supported is available from a menu beneath the
Data import icon on the toolbar.
7. Data Resources You can set up permanent scheduled links to the model from external data sources so that
data can be refreshed on a scheduled basis.
These features and other modeler functionality are described in detail in the subsections that follow.

Tasks
Creating a Model from Scratch [page 51]
Creating Dimensions [page 53]
Business Organization [page 21]
Model Preferences [page 26]
Data Import [page 57]
Clearing Model Data [page 56]
Deleting a Model [page 56]

3.1

Introduction to Modeler

Key features of Models include the account and the dimensions which are used to analyze the account data,
hierarchies, currencies, and formulas.
In the following set of topics we give an introduction to the main features of models and show the effect of these
features on the tables, charts, documents, and stories which are generated from the model.

3.1.1 Analyzing Account Data


A model is based on a single account that may contain financial or any other business data. In the data output that
is created from the model, you can analyze the account data on the basis of the dimensions defined in the model.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

17

Example Profit and Loss Statement


The following example shows a model that is used to generate a Profit and Loss statement; it has dimensions for
time periods, geographical region, and product.
In the initial table output that is generated from the model, the account members are listed in the first column of
the grid. The dimensions defined in the model are available in the Builder panel, and you can add these to the grid
to show different views of the data.

Data in the model is organized by hierarchical parent-child relationships so that you can see high-level
accumulations and optionally drill down to more detailed levels of data. In the example Profit and Loss statement,
the members of the account are shown rolled up, but they can be expanded by clicking the arrow on each line. You
can display the complete hierarchy for any dimension in Modeler by using the Preview feature, which shows the
position of all members or lines in the dimension.

3.1.2 Planning Models and Analytics Models


SAP BusinessObjects Cloud offers two types of model: fully featured planning models or simpler more flexible
analytics models. Additionally, you can create models from HANA views.

Types of Model
The three types of model available all support different sets of features. In summary these are:
Planning-type model: preconfigured with dimensions for Time and Categories, offers support for multicurrency and security features at the level of both model and dimension.

18

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Analytics-type model: unlike the planning model this type does not support categories and does not require a
time dimension.
Analytics model based on a HANA view: a simple model with a single Account dimension but with access to
other dimensions from HANA. Security is inherited from HANA but can be managed further in SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud.

Model Features
In order to support and streamline the planning process, models in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud are prepared with
many off-the-shelf features to give you a quick start in the planning process. A planning model, for example, is
preconfigured with:
Categories for budgets, plans, and forecasts.
Default time periods that you can quickly adjust to suit your data.
Auditing features for traceability.
Security features that make it possible for you to restrict access to specific values in data grids to named
individuals.
The model type is determined in the first step of creating a model, using the Enable Planning checkbox.
Some essential differences between the planning model (1) and the analytics model (2) are shown in the following
illustration. Analytics models are not preconfigured with categories (for budget and forecast data) and, although
by default a Time dimension is available, it is not required and you can remove this from the model during the
design stage.

Related Information
Creating a Model from Scratch [page 51]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

19

Explore Dimensions [page 29]


Importing Models from HANA [page 76]

3.1.3 Models Based on HANA Views


You can create models by connecting to the underlying HANA database and importing views to create a new
analytics-type model. Functionality available for models based on HANA views is slightly different in comparison
to other models.
With analytics models based on HANA views you can use your existing data with SAP BusinessObjects Cloud.
Many of the features used in planning-type models are not relevant for this type of model (this includes for
example: hierarchies, financial data types and currencies), some of the main differences and features are
introduced here.

Managing Dimensions and Versions


In models which are linked to HANA only a single Accounts dimension is visible in the model, but all other
dimensions derived from the HANA view are still available. This may be a large number and many of these will not
be relevant in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud. To help you to manage the views a dimension management feature is
available that you can access from the Model Preferences menu, it allows you to select which dimensions will be
visible in the output generated from this model.
For models based on HANA views, version management functionality is also available. You can use this to map
any of the imported dimensions to selected SAP BusinessObjects Cloud planning categories such as Budgets,
Actuals, Forecasts.
You can define variables for all types of models, but if variables have been defined in HANA you will also be
prompted to enter the required values in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud when you open the data output.

Security
Analytics models which are based on underlying HANA database views will inherit the security restrictions applied
in HANA. These restrictions can be modified in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud by assigning specific user role
security to them. Administrators using User Role security can see the list of analytic privileges that have been
defined in HANA for each model and grant or revoke them for each role.
The Data Access option that is available for other model types to restrict input to specific named cells is not
available for this type of model.
Note that access to any models which are linked to a remote system may be secured and you may be prompted
for credentials before opening the model.

20

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Related Information
Importing Models from HANA [page 76]
Standard Application Roles [page 239]
Model Preferences [page 26]
Model Security [page 24]

3.1.4 Business Organization


The organizational structure that applies to the account can be defined as a special (organizational) dimension in
the model. For more complex and international business models currency conversion features are also available
in this dimension as well as a geolocation ID.

Organization Dimension
Each planning model may include a single organizational dimension that describes the structure of the business
and offers extra features for currencies and determining geographic locations. You can use this, for example, to
give a regional breakdown of sales activity for each product. Only one organizational dimension is allowed in each
model but additional hierarchies can be added to any model dimension, if needed, as shown in the following
example:

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

21

Currencies
If members of the organization dimension use different currencies, enter the currency code for each member in
the currency column. In this case, you must also specify the conversion table to use in the preference settings for
the model.
Currency conversion tables are defined independently of models; they are listed on a separate Modeler tab page
when you first select Modeler from the main menu.
When you work with the model output in tables in Stories you can select a currency. Monetary values are then
converted and displayed according to the currently effective rate for the currency you selected.

Geolocation (Area ID)


In the organizational hierarchy any place names in the data are automatically matched to known place names in
the database and the value is entered in the AreaID column. If a location name is not recognized automatically you
can do manual searching and matching of the imported data using the Search feature which is available on all cells
in this column (magnifying glass icon). Using this feature you can identify, for example, countries, states or sales
regions, locations are maintained in Modeler in the Points of Interest modeler tab page.
To use this feature, enable the Use Area ID checkbox on the Create New Dimension dialog.

Input Schedule (Ask for Input)


The organization dimension can also be used as the basis for Input Schedule in Stories. The responsible persons
for each region or department can be assigned to a scheduled task, this is integrated into the Collaboration
functionality with notifications and other social media features.

3.1.5 Currency Tables


Currency conversion tables are defined independently of models, you can then apply a selected table to any
model you create. When you launch Modeler, currency tables are listed on a separate Currency Conversion tab
page; standard maintenance features are available to add, copy, and delete tables as required.

Exchange Rates
A currency conversion table defines exchange rates for all currencies which are in use. The currency conversion is
calculated as a source currency multiplied by an exchange rate to determine the equivalent value in a target
currency. In Modeler the currency code is entered with the regions and countries defined on the model's
organization perspective.

22

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Each rate has a Valid From value which is the start date from which the rate becomes effective, but additionally
exchange rates can be defined for a single Category (actuals, budgets, planning etc.) and for a selected currency
Rate Type (either Closing or Average). This makes it possible to maintain several variations of a currency
exchange calculation which can be used, for example, to track differences between budgets, plans, and actuals
and to compare different types of exchange rate calculations.

Rate Types and Categories


The category and rate type are optional attributes of a currency and are blank by default. If the attributes are not
set then the exchange rate value is generic, but you can add additional lines and rates to the table with categories
and rate types applied for each exchange rate you wish to use.
To use the rate types for an account you must turn this feature on in dimension preferences for the account
member. An additional Rate Type column is then added to the account dimension.
If you are using an older model which was created before Rate Types were introduced in Modeler, you must first
migrate the model before you add the Rate Type column to the account dimension. In this case an additional
Migrate option is available on the Model Preferences menu. Select this option to start the automatic migration
procedure.

Enabling Currency Conversion


In Modeler, you must decide during the design phase if currency conversion is required. If the data output based
on the model requires currency conversion, you must specify the conversion table to use in the preference
settings for the model.
In Stories, working with the output data in a table, you can select a currency. Monetary values are then converted
and displayed according to the currently effective rate for the currency you selected.

Related Information
Model Preferences [page 26]
Attributes of an Account Dimension [page 30]

3.1.6 Explore Hierarchies


The Hierarchy column is a standard feature of all dimension types so that you can structure your data. When you
display the output data in Stories in a table, the nodes of the hierarchy can be expanded or collapsed.
The hierarchy is defined as an interconnected set of parent-child relationships for each line in the dimension. The
Hierarchy column is used to store the parent ID value.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

23

The Account dimension has only a single hierarchy but you can add additional hierarchies to all other dimension
types by selecting Add Hierarchy from the Add menu (+ symbol) on the toolbar. When you choose this option, a
new column is inserted in the grid, and you must enter the name of the new hierarchy in the column header row.
If more than one hierarchy is defined users can use the Manage Hierarchies feature or apply filter settings to
select which hierarchy to apply and to switch between hierarchies.
The Hierarchy is visualized in the Preview panel. You don't need to enter or edit the data in the data grid to make a
hierarchy, you can use drag and drop in the Preview panel to arrange the members and build the relationships
visually. If more than one hierarchy has been defined you can select which one to show in the Preview from the
drop-down list.

3.1.7 Model Security


A number of options are available to apply user role security to models and dimensions and also to apply more
detailed restrictions.
Two approaches are available for applying more detailed security and access restrictions:
Model Security (Privacy) using this option of the model preferences, the model is accessible only to the
owner and other user roles explicitly granted access by the administrator.
Dimension Security (Data Access Control) using this option of the dimension-level preferences, access to
individual values in the model output can be restricted to specific users.
Typically, you would opt for either one approach or the other, although it is also possible to combine the two
methods in the same model in which case, access would be possible only when all security conditions had been
met.

Model Security based on User Roles (Privacy Setting)


An administrator applying security restrictions in

Users

Roles

can use the following options:

Granting Permissions to access specific functional areas of the application (including models).
Granting read or write access to Selected Models and model dimensions.
Granting access to Analytic Privileges which have been imported from HANA.
Firstly, using permissions, administrators can restrict access to the Models feature or to certain types of model:
separate options are available under permissions for the three model types (Planning Models, Analytic Models,
and HANA Cloud Platform Data sources) so that each type can be secured separately.
Secondly, where Privacy has been enabled for a model, full access or limited access to the model can be granted
for each role. Limited access provides a very detailed level of read/write control for all members and categories of
the model.
Thirdly, for models based on HANA views, the analytic privileges imported from HANA can be granted or revoked
for each user role.

24

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Dimension Security Based on User IDs (Data Access)


Security at the level of individual dimensions adds two extra Read and Write columns to the data table for the
dimension where it has been activated. You can use these to control access (on the basis of individual user IDs) to
specific cells or values of the model output. You can enable this by turning on the Enable Data Access Control
switch in Dimension Preferences (see following section).
The following example illustrates how the data permissions that are defined in the Data Access dialog of the
selected model restrict what a user can do with the model.
The model P&L Planning has the following permission on its dimensions:
Account: Access control enabled
Organization: Access control enabled
Version
Time
The user who created the model has defined data access for the Account dimension as follows:
Table 4:
Member ID

Read

Write

P00001

MARTIN_BRODY

MARTIN_BRODY

P00002

MATT_HOOPER

MATT_HOOPER

The user who created the model has defined data access for the Organization dimension as follows:
Table 5:
Member ID

Read

Write

EMEA

MARTIN_BRODY

MARTIN_BRODY

Germany

France

APJ

MATT_HOOPER

MATT_HOOPER

Organization

Public Version: Account.P00001

Public Version: Account.P00002

EMEA

300

400

Germany

200

300

France

100

100

APJ

400

500

US

200

300

China

200

200

US
China

The model has the following data:


Table 6:

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

25

When Martin Brody opens his story and adds the organization to the row and the account to the column, he will
see only the following data:
Table 7:
Organization

Public Version: Account.P00001

EMEA

300

Germany

200

France

100

Related Information
Standard Application Roles [page 239]
Model Preferences [page 26]

3.1.8 Model Preferences


For every model, you can configure individual preferences. The settings you apply when the model is created
determine many permanent characteristics of the model and the data generated from it.
When designing a new model you must set the preferences that affect security, auditing, and currency
conversion. Settings for the model as a whole are available from the drop-down Preferences menu (wrench icon)
on the blue toolbar. An additional set of preferences at the level of each dimension is also available from the
functional toolbar when the dimension is displayed.

Note
Not all preferences are relevant for analytics-type models and for Models based on HANA views different
options are available as described in the following section.

Currency
The basic settings for the model include the default currency that applies to the data generated from the model. If
you need to show monetary values in different currencies, activate the Currency Conversion switch and then
select a currency conversion table. The drop-down list shows all tables that have already been created on the
modeler Currency Conversion tab.

Data Auditing
Auditing within SAP BusinessObjects Cloud is available at either of two levels: high-level auditing or transactionallevel Data Changes auditing. If Data Audit is switched on in Preferences, all changes for this model will be logged.

26

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

The audit logs are available from the Users menu (

Users

Data Changes ).

Privacy (User Role Security)


The Privacy setting determines if the model is visible to users other than the owner. Note that this setting can also
be changed later after the model has been saved.
If you activate the Privacy switch, only the owner of the model and user roles that have specifically been granted
access can see the data. Disable this switch if you want the model and data to be public.

Data Access Restrictions


You can apply data access restrictions to each individual row of every dimension in the model. When applied,
additional Read and Write columns are automatically added to the dimension and a selection dialog is available to
select users and grant editing rights to this data.
If you are going to use data access restrictions in your data output, you need to activate this feature for the
individual dimensions where the restrictions will apply, using the Dimension Preferences dialog on the functional
toolbar.
This graphic illustrates this feature, showing Model Preferences (#1), Dimension Preferences (#2), and also the
additional Read and Write columns. The setting to enable data access restrictions is available under dimension
preferences. The Data Access option of the model preferences menu shows an overview of which dimensions
have been secured in this way but the setting cannot be changed there.

Dimension Preferences
The configuration options available for dimensions depend on the dimension type which is currently selected and
these are described in detail in relevant topics of the documentation. The setting for Enable Data Access Control is
available on all dimensions.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

27

Related Information
Business Organization [page 21]
Creating a Model from Scratch [page 51]

3.1.8.1

Options for HANA Models

Some specific features are available for models that are based on a HANA view: the Dimension Settings dialog will
help you to manage the many dimensions which may be associated with a HANA view and with the Version
Management feature you can align your external data with existing planning categories.

Dimension Settings
Models linked to HANA views include all the dimensions in the HANA database that were related to the view this
may be a large number and many may not be required in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud. A dimension management
feature is available for Models linked to HANA, this is available from the model Preferences menu and allows you
to select which dimensions will be visible in the output generated from this model.
The Dimension Settings dialog lists all dimensions available. Firstly, if there is a large number of dimensions, you
can organize them by making groups so that they are easier to manage. Simply type in the same group name
against any dimensions that should be categorized together. Secondly, you can filter out any dimensions that are
not relevant by selecting the Hide checkbox. These will then not be available when you work with the data in
tabular output.

Version Management
For Models based on HANA views, version management functionality is available so that you can map any of the
imported dimensions and values to selected versions (categories: Actual, Planning, Forecast, and so on). The
mapped values are displayed in the output tables.
The following example shows the account measure in Modeler and the Version Information mapping dialog. In this
example, showing a hardware usage model, all values from the Item dimension (Memory, Disk, CPU not visible
in Modeler) have been set to category Planning. The illustration shows the following three steps:
1) Select the

(Version Management) icon on the toolbar.

2) The dimensions available from the HANA data source are not immediately visible in Modeler, but they are
shown here in the Version Information dialog in two drop-down lists. The fields for the selected dimension are
listed beneath so that you can select a category to apply to each value.
3) In the data output that is generated from the model, the version category Planning is appended in brackets to
each label (column B).

28

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

3.1.9 Explore Dimensions


The dimensions you use in your models are saved independently of any model; when you create a new model, you
can either choose an existing dimension or create a new dimension. Modeling uses several dedicated dimension
types.
This section gives an overview of the types of dimension available and explains the specific purposes they are
used for.
Apart from the built-in dimensions for Time and Category, all dimensions have three basic columns (attributes):
ID, Description, and Hierarchy. These cannot be deleted, but additional columns can be added as required. The
Hierarchy column is a free-format text attribute where you can enter the ID value of the parent member. By
maintaining parent-child relationships in this way, you can build up a data hierarchy that is used when viewing the
data to accumulate high-level values that can be analyzed at lower levels of detail.
The following types of dimension are available:
Time is a built-in dimension that defines the start and end date of the plan's timeline and the smallest time
units that will be used in the plan.
Categories is a built-in dimension that defines the data versions available in the data output: Actual, Budget,
Planning, Forecast, Rolling Forecast.
The Account dimension is the main dimension of the model. Models can have only one account dimension.
The Organization dimension type is optional in a model but offers an organizational analysis of the account
data, based, for example, on operating units, geographic entities, or cost centers. A model can have only one
organization dimension.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

29

The Generic type is a free-format dimension to which data can be added or imported as required. This could
be based, for example on products, channels, or sales representatives. A model may have any number of
generic dimensions.
The Pool dimension type is specifically for use with Allocation. See Models for Allocation.
A more detailed description of each dimension type is given in the sections that follow, beginning with the built-in
dimensions for Time and Category.

Time Dimension
The time dimension is created automatically when you create a model. It specifies the overall timeframe for the
model and also the granularity the smallest time period down to which the data will be analyzed (yearly,
quarterly, monthly, or daily values). There is no specific setting for weekly periods, but if the lowest granularity is
set to day-level then data output in Stories is automatically shown grouped in calendar weeks.

Categories
The data categories for financial planning (Actual, Budget, Planning) are predefined and, when you are designing a
model, you need only to modify the frequency settings. Forecasting is based on a range period (quarterly or
yearly). The range for the rolling forecast is defined in relation to the current date as a number of periods in the
past (Look Back) and a number of periods in the future (Look Ahead).

Related Information
Models for Allocation: Pool Dimension [page 35]

3.1.9.1

Attributes of an Account Dimension

The Account Dimension defines the set of account members and the format of the account data.
The account dimension is the main dimension of the model. In addition to the basic columns of ID, Description,
Account Type, and Hierarchy, a set of technical properties is automatically created when the dimension is first set
up. You can hide these columns, using the Technical Properties button on the (blue) toolbar, but they cannot be
deleted. List boxes are available for most of the attributes of the account dimension to help you enter data. Your
selections and entries are validated as you work so that any invalid or incompatible values are immediately visible.

Note
For models based on HANA views, a reduced set of attributes is available; hierarchies, financial data types, and
currency types are not relevant. Also, a different set of values for Aggregation types is available.

30

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Account Types
The Account dimension uses an Account Type attribute to automatically handle positive and negative values.
From an accounting perspective, account members belonging to the Profit and Loss statement and the Balance
Sheet have to be correctly stored in the database with either a positive or negative value so that the accounts
balance correctly. In the application, you can enter all values as positive numbers, and the switching of signs from
positive to negative is handled automatically on the basis of the Account Type setting.
There are four financial account types: Income (INC) and Expense (EXP) items are included in the Profit and Loss
account, and Assets (AST) and Liabilities (LEQ) are all Balance sheet items. Automatic switching is applied to the
account types INC and LEQ. Note that all formulas work on the displayed value not the value saved in the
database.
When importing data from an external system, a mapping feature is available to ensure that imported data also
fits into this schema. This is Reverse the sign of the data based on account type. When this checkbox is activated,
imported data will also be identified by account type and stored and handled correctly.

Currency Rate Types


If you are using currencies with this account and you have added specific exchange rates based on rate types to
the currency table, you can add the Rate Type column to the account grid by turning this feature on in Dimension
Preferences.
Table 8:
Attribute

Details

Account Type Select the account type for this type of data:

INC (Income uses automatic sign-switching)

EXP (Expense)

AST (Asset)

LEQ (Liabilities and Equity uses automatic sign-switching)

NFIN (Non-Financial)

The asset and liability types are aggregated over time and must be linked to an aggregation dimension in the
model (such as the built-in Time dimension).
Rate Type

This attribute is not visible by default, but you can turn it on in Dimension Preferences. The attribute is blank
by default so that a generic exchange rate from the currency table will be applied for the account member. If
you select a rate type (Average or Closing), the exchange rate in the currency table, which has also been flag
ged by this same type, will be used.

Unit & Cur


rencies

Use this attribute to set the value type and display units. Select one of the following from the list:

Currency: Use this option for all monetary values. In this case, the unit defined in Scale is shown in all data
output and the appropriate currency symbol is displayed after the numerical value.

Label: You can enter a text label (up to 30 characters in length) for this member to define your own dis
play units; this can be a unit of measure or a packaging unit such as Bottles. The label you enter is
displayed after the numeric value in the data output; for example, 25 Bottles.

%: The percentage option works in the same way, showing the percentage symbol after the value. In this
case, the Scale attribute is also automatically set to percent.

The attribute can also be left blank. In this case, the abbreviated unit from Scale is displayed (see below).

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

31

Attribute

Details

Aggregation
Type

For account members which are parent nodes the aggregation type determines how values are accumulated
from the leaf nodes. For types Average and Last, you must also select the aggregation dimension the value
relates to (Time is automatically entered as a default).

AVERAGE: This type can be selected to calculate the average of all aggregated values.

LAST: This type shows the last (most recent) value in the selected time period; it could be used, for exam

SUM: This is the default aggregation type for income and expense values; this simply adds all values to

ple, to show the number of employees on the last day of a month.


gether.

NONE: If the value types of numerical data cells are different aggregation may not be possible; this may
be the case, for example, for price information or cells containing different currencies. For these account
members set the aggregation type to NONE. In tables in Stories cells which have not been aggregated are
shown with a diagonal line drawn through them. The cell will be either empty, or, if all child values for a
node in the hierarchy are the same, this single value is shown at the node level.

LABEL: Set the aggregation type to Label for any dummy nodes on the hierarchy where you want a text
label to appear in the data grid without any calculation of values. In this case, the Description Text for the
member is displayed as a label, and a simple dash character is used where otherwise an aggregated value
would normally be displayed. You cannot set leaf nodes to type Label this is immediately flagged on
screen as an error. You can see an example text label in the Profit and Loss statement shown at the start
of this Modeling section: the text label Key Performance Indicators (with four child KPI values) has been
defined as type Label.

Note
For models based on HANA views, a different set of aggregation types is available: NONE, SUM, AVERAGE,
LAST, additionally, MIN, MAX and COUNT are available, The type COUNT requires an Aggregation Dimen
sion but MIN/MAX do not.

Aggregation

If an Aggregation Dimension is required for the member (depending on the account type or aggregation type),

Dimension

enter it here. The list box available for this attribute shows all dimensions in the model and the built-in Time
dimension.

Scale

To improve the presentation of numbers in the output and hide numbers that are not significant, you can set
this attribute to show just integers plus the specified number of decimal places. The unit value is then shown
by the appropriate word or by an abbreviation. You can select one of the following options:

Thousand (3 numerical places abbreviation k)

Million (6 numerical places abbreviation M)

Billion (9 numerical places abbreviation G. Note that G is the international standard abbreviation for bil
lion)

Percent (% 2)

This feature is related to the setting of the Unit attribute that determines if the Scale word or just the abbrevi
ated Scale letter is used (see also the example following this table):

Decimal Pla
ces

32

If Unit is set to Currency, the word selected as the Scale value is used in the output.

If Unit is undefined (blank), the abbreviated Scale letter is used.

This setting defines the number of digits displayed after the decimal point; select a value from 07.

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Attribute

Details

Formula

Calculations and predefined formula can be used for any value of the Account dimension.
Refer to the Formulas section for full details.

Calculate on

If you have defined a formula, you may need to set this attribute to determine the sequence in which the steps
of the calculation are carried out. If the formula is applied to cells with aggregated values, the default calcula
tion method is to aggregate values before calculating the formula. You can reverse this to calculate the base
details before aggregation by setting Calculate on to Details. Refer to the examples in the Formulas section to
see an example and illustration of how this impacts the result of a calculation.

Example
This example illustrates the effect of the Scale and Unit settings.
For a member where the Scale has been defined as Million, Unit is blank, and Decimal Places is set to 2, the
number 92624530 will be displayed in the data grid with an abbreviation as 92.62M.
If, on the other hand, Unit is set to Currency, the value will be the full word: 92.62Million.
If no Scale value is selected, the full number is shown formatted by appropriate separators; for example:
92,624,530.00

Related Information
Explore Formulas [page 36]
Currency Tables [page 22]
Defining Thresholds in Models [page 33]

3.1.9.2

Defining Thresholds in Models

You can define threshold values to apply conditional formatting to charts.

Context
You can apply conditional formatting by defining thresholds in a story, or you can apply the formatting to all
stories based on a model by defining thresholds in that model. For example, in your model you could define a
threshold for Revenue at $1,000,000, so that all stories based on the model would have a Revenue threshold at
$1,000,000. Note that thresholds can be defined only on account dimensions.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

33

Procedure
1. With a model open in Modeler, select the account dimension.
2. Select an account cell.
3. Select

(Set Threshold).

4. Set one or more thresholds for the account.


You can change the colors and text used for the ranges of values.
5. Select OK when you've finished defining thresholds.
The color formatting appears in stories based on your model.

Note
Thresholds that you define for a model are applied to stories based on that model, but if you apply
conditional formatting in the stories, that formatting overrides the thresholds you define for the model.

Related Information
Attributes of an Account Dimension [page 30]
Conditional Formatting [page 158]
Creating Story-Defined Thresholds [page 159]

3.1.9.3

Attributes of an Organizational Dimension

The organizational structure that applies to the account can be defined as a special organizational dimension in
the model. For international business models, currency conversion features are also available.
To create a new organizational dimension, you must select the Type called organization. If the hierarchy refers to
geographical locations such as offices or sales areas, you can also switch on the geolocation feature of SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud while creating a new organization dimension. To use this feature, enable the Use Area ID
checkbox on the Create New Dimension dialog.

Attributes
In addition to the three basic columns of ID, Description, and Hierarchy, the attributes listed in the following table
are available.

34

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Table 9:
Field

More information

Currency

Enter the 3-character code for the currency that each member will use.

Responsible

Select the responsible person for the organization member.


A lookup feature is available for this attribute to select the ID.

Area ID

This attribute is only visible on the grid if you selected the Use Area ID indicator while creating the dimension; it
is used to identify the geolocation information for the members of the organization, and the information is used
in charts to display the data in a geomap.
This attribute includes a lookup feature that autocompletes the value if the Description text is recognized as a
valid Area ID. Alternatively, you can use the Area ID search feature (active when a cell in this column is high
lighted) to look for the correct Area ID value for each row of the hierarchy.

3.1.9.4

Attributes of a Generic Dimension

One or more generic dimensions can be added to a model as required. This is a simple free-format dimension that
supports hierarchies and Data Access control.
For a generic dimension, the three basic columns of ID, Description, and Hierarchy are created by default.
Use the add icon (+ symbol) on the functional toolbar to add whatever additional columns you require or to add
additional hierarchies.

3.1.9.5

Models for Allocation: Pool Dimension

The Pool dimension type is for use with Allocation.

Allocation Scenario
A Business Planning model has been created for Allocation. In addition to the Account dimension, it includes a
CostPool dimension (type Pool) that contains the members Logistics, General, and Sales.
For Allocation, other dimensions in the model can be mapped to the Pool dimension so that in the data output the
costs of each dimension can be allocated to the cost centers defined in the Pool in this case to Logistics,
General, and Sales.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

35

3.1.10 Explore Formulas


This section gives an overview of how formulas are used and gives details of the formulas available in Modeler.

Formulas for Modeler and Formulas for Tables in Stories


Formulas perform calculations on either constant values or members of the account dimension. References to
members must be enclosed in square brackets (see following illustrations). Some formulas are designed for use
in Models and others are designed for use in Tables in Stories.
In Modeler, when you create a new account dimension, the Formula column is automatically added. You can enter
a formula in the formula bar or use the Edit Formula dialog. In Modeler, formulas apply to individual account

36

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

members (rows). This example shows formulas using basic arithmetic syntax to perform calculations referring to
other members of the account dimension:

In Stories, when you use formulas additional columns are generated on the table grid, and calculated values are
inserted for all rows. This example shows the predefined delta() formula being added to column H to calculate the
difference between actual and forecast values for quarters 1 and 2:

Entering Formulas in Modeler


When you select a cell in the Formula column where the formula will be entered, the text entry bar changes
automatically from text mode (T) to formula mode (fx).
Three features are available to help you to enter formula in both Modeler and Stories:
1. Hint Lists. A hint list is immediately displayed as soon as you begin to type in the formula bar. The list shows
all available options (including formula and account members) that match with the text you have typed. The
list shows values for both account member IDs and account member descriptions and the matching process
also operates on both values.
2. Formula Templates and Selection Dialogs. When you select a formula a template is automatically entered in
the formula entry bar with placeholders for each parameter. A short help text description is displayed for each
parameter when you move the mouse pointer over the template, and additionally, you can click the parameter
icon to open a selection dialog for each parameter. The dialog lists all values available for the parameter and
provides options to display just the ID value, just the Description or both the ID and Description together.
3. Formula Editing Dialog. You can use the Advanced Formula Editor dialog to help you to enter, format, and also
validate your formula. This dialog lists all the available functions (functions, conditions, operators) that can be
used to build up a formula. You can select the functions you require from the lists and also type additional
values in the editor.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

37

3.1.10.1 Aggregation in Formula


You can use either the Details() syntax with a formula or the Calculate on details attribute on the account
dimension to determine that a formula calculates all the base details first before calculating an aggregated result.
Brackets are used to determine which part of a calculation should be done first. It is also important with formulas
to say if any aggregation of values should be done before or after the formula is calculated.
The scenario shown here illustrates this problem and shows how to use the Advanced Formula Editor and the
Details() syntax to resolve it. Refer to the account dimension for details of using the Calculate on details attribute
as an alternative method of doing this.
In the following example, the value for Total Income is calculated from [PRICE] * [UNITS]. Both Price and Total
Income are defined to show aggregated (summed) values:

This illustration shows the difference in the result depending on the sequence of the calculation. In this situation, it
is important to determine in the output that is generated from the model if the values are aggregated before
the formula is calculated (see the green result in the next illustration) or if the formula in each column is calculated
first and then the values are aggregated (see the blue result in the next illustration).

Calculate After Aggregation


By default, the formula as entered in the illustration above ( [PRICE] * [UNITS] ) aggregates first and then does
the calculation. In this example, this is calculated as:
([TOTAL INCOME], [2014.Q1]) = ([PRICE], [2014.Q1]) * ([UNITS], [2014.Q1]) = 1020
Million $

38

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Calculate Before Aggregation


To determine that a formula calculates all the base details first before calculating the result, you must use the
Details() syntax. For this, use the Advanced Formula Editor. Enter your calculation and then select the Details
button. This adds the Details formula to the existing calculation. In this case, this is calculated as:
([TOTAL INCOME], [2014.Q1]) = ([TOTAL INCOME], [2014.Jan]) + ([TOTAL INCOME],
[2014.Feb]) + ([TOTAL INCOME], [2014.Mar]) = 310 Million $

Note
Details cannot be used with any of the built-in formulas such as lookup(), cagr(), yoy(), and so on.
Details calculations can be applied only to leaf nodes in the hierarchy. If your calculation makes references to
members that are not valid, a warning message is displayed identifying the invalid members.

Related Information
Attributes of an Account Dimension [page 30]

3.1.10.2 Variables for Formulas


You can define variables and their default values and then enter the variable name as part of the formula
definition. In the table output in Stories, the value of the variable is calculated and displayed.
To make formulas and output data grids more flexible, you can include variables in formula. These are entered in
Modeler as placeholders that are defined with a default value. In the output that is generated from the model, you
can then select the variable values so that the formula can be used to operate with different numbers or different
sets of data.
The following illustration shows firstly the variable definition process in a demo model containing four dimensions.
The Variables dialog shows four variables. You can select the dimension for each variable from a drop-down list.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

39

You can use these variables in the Formula column of the account by referring to the Variable ID:

When you use a model where variables have been defined in a table in Stories you can set the variable values at
any time. You will be automatically prompted to set the variable values when you first add the model to the table,
at any other time you can change a variable setting by selecting the model from the

40

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

(Edit Prompts) icon and

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

opening the Set Variables dialog. Select the variable and enter the new value as shown in this example of an
Employee model:

3.1.10.3 Defining Variables


To define one or more variables for the model, follow the steps given here.

Procedure
1. Choose the Variables option of the Modeler preferences icon.
2. Choose the Add (+) icon on the toolbar and enter a Name for the new variable.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

41

3. Select a Value Domain from the drop-down list box. There are three types of option available for the Value
domain:
The Number type represents a constant digit that you enter manually; initially, as the default value.
To define variables related to the Time dimension, one or more time options (for Year, Quarter, Month,
etc.) are available depending on the granularity settings defined. This type can be used for example with
the predefined CAGR formula.
The list box also includes a reference to each added dimension in the model (based on the Dimension ID
attribute). This type can be used, for example, with the predefined Lookup formula.
4. Set a default value. If the variable relates to an existing dimension, you can choose Edit (pen icon) to open a
list box so that you can browse through the members of the dimension the variable relates to.
5. To use the variable in a formula, simply enter the formula in the normal way. The variables you have defined
will be included in the drop-down list boxes.

3.1.10.4 Formula Functions, Conditions, and Operators


The Edit Formula dialog helps you to enter, format, and also validate your formula; it lists all the available
functions (functions, conditions, operators) that can be used to build up a formula.

Operators
The four arithmetic operators are available for addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division. These can be
used either with constants or when referring to members, for example [A1000]/3 is the value of account
member A1000 divided by 3.
Brackets can be used to change the order of evaluation: bracketed parts of the formula are calculated first, for
example, [A1000]*([A2000]+2).

Conditions
The list of supported conditions that can be used in formula is given in the following table:
Table 10:
Condition Operators

Meaning

Example

AND

Logical expression and: result is true or false

[A1 000]>[B1000] AND [A2000]>[B2000]

OR

Logical expression or: result is true or false

[A1000]>[B1000]

Equal to

[A1 000] = [B1000]

>

Greater than

[A1 000]>[B1000]

<

Less than

[A1 000]<[B1000]

42

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Condition Operators

Meaning

Example

>=

Greater than or equal to

[A1 000]> = [B1000]

<=

Less than or equal to

[A1 000]< = [B1000]

!=

Not equal to

[A1 000]! = 0

Functions
The list of functions available is given in the following table; these can be used with either constants or account
members:
Table 11:
Function

Meaning

ABS(number)

Returns the absolute value of a number (the number without its sign)

IF(expression,val1,val2)

The IF function returns the first value if the specified condition is TRUE, and the second value
if the condition is FALSE
IF([SALES)>100, [SALES], [SALES]+10)
Returns [SALES] if [SALES] is greater than 100
Returns [SALES]+10 if [SALES] is less than or equal to 100

LOG(number)

Returns the natural logarithm

LOG10(number)

Returns the base 10 common logarithm

INT(number)

Rounds a number down to the nearest integer

FLOAT(arg)

Converts arg to a floating point number

DOUBLE(arg)

Converts arg to a high precision floating point number

POWER(number, power)

Returns the result of a number raised to a power

3.1.10.5 Formulas Available in Modeler


Predefined formulas can be used in Modeler to perform complex, frequently required calculations.
This section gives syntax details and examples of the formulas that you can use in Modeler.
The Details() formula, which you can use to determine the sequence of calculations (calculate before/after
aggregation), cannot be used in combination with the formulas listed here.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

43

Link()
Model linking (blending) can be used to display data from more than one model in a single story. The Link formula
cannot be used with other formulas.
Syntax:
LINK(<model name>; <target model account member>; [<dimension name>=<account
member1>, <account member2>])
Table 12:
Parameter

Usage

<model name>

Specifies the target model name.

<account member>

Specifies the target model account member.

[<Point of View>]

Optionally, a point of view can be specified. This is a list containing selected dimensions and their
members and is used to further restrict data in the target account member.
For this parameter, the all keyword is available to select all members in the dimension: [<dimension
name>(all)].

Example
LINK(sap.epm:ProfitAndLoss;INCOME_STMT;[sap.epm:Region(all)],
[sap.epm:Product=HPRD0001,HPRD0002])

Compound Average Growth Rate()


Compound Average Growth Rate (CAGR) is the mean annual growth rate over a specified period of time longer
than one year.
To calculate compound annual growth rate, divide the value of a member at the end of the period in question by its
value at the beginning of that period, raise the result to the power of one divided by the period length, and subtract
one from the subsequent result.
Syntax:
CAGR(<account member>; <start date>; <end date>])

Example
newCAGR = CAGR([400000],[2013],[2014])

44

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Simple Moving Average()


The simple moving average (SMA) is calculated by adding the value of a member for a number of time periods and
then dividing this total by the number of time periods.
Syntax:
SMA(<account member>; <time period>; <number>])

Example
newSMA = SMA([400000];[Month];[3])

Year Over Year()


Year over Year returns a percentage showing the difference between the value of a member in the current year
compared with the previous year.
Syntax:
YoY(<account member>)

Example
Revenue_YoY = YoY([Revenue])
This is calculated as:
[REVENUE_CURRENT]/[REVENUE_PREVIOUS_YEAR]-1,0
A check is made to ensure that the neither the current year not the previous year are blank.

Lookup() and Restrict()


The functionality of the Restrict and Lookup formulas is very similar: both formulas refer to an account, apply a
point of view filter to a named dimension, and return an aggregated value.
Syntax:
Restrict(<account member>; [POV])
Lookup(<account member>; [POV]; [Ignore Dimension])
These two formulas differ in the way the results are displayed in the case where an aggregated number returned
by the formula is based on a dimension where some members in the hierarchy have been excluded by the filter. In

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

45

this case, there will be gaps in the selected data. When you analyze such an aggregated number by drilling down
to lower levels, how should these gaps be handled, and what should be shown? Examples are provided in the
following subsection to show how these formulas handle this situation.
Note that the Lookup and Restrict formulas cannot be used in combination with other formulas.
Table 13:
Parameter

Usage

<account member> Specifies an account member in the model.


[<Point of View>]

Optional. This is a list containing selected dimensions and their members:


[<dimension name>=<account member1>, <account member2>]
This is used to further restrict data in the account member (see following example 1).
For this parameter, the all keyword is available to select all members in the dimension: [<dimension
name>(all)] (see example 2).
Additionally, you can use time navigation syntax to identify specific periods (see example 3 and following
examples).

[Ignore Dimension]

Optional. A dimension that will be ignored see examples for Lookup() in the following subsection.

Example
1. Restrict([400000];[sap.epm:Employee=e1, e2])
2. Lookup([400000];[sap.epm:Region(all)])
3. Restrict([400000];[sap.epm:Time.Year(previous, 1).Day(next, 5)])
An extensive set of keywords is available for time navigation. The following examples show how these are used:
Lookup([400000];[sap.epm:ProfitAndLoss_Time.Year(Next,1).Month(Current)]
Restrict([400000];[sap.epm:ProfitAndLoss_Time.Year(Next,1).Quarter(Last,1).Month(Last,1)])
Lookup([400000];[sap.epm:ProfitAndLoss_Time.Year(Next,1).Month(LastPeriods,2)])

3.1.10.5.1 Comparison of Restrict and Lookup


The functionality of the Restrict and Lookup formulas is very similar, they differ in the way the results are
displayed, showing a breakdown of aggregated numbers.
In the case where an aggregated number is based on a dimension where some members in the hierarchy have
been excluded by the filter, there will be gaps in the selected data. When you analyze such an aggregated number
by drilling down to lower levels, how should these gaps be handled and what should be shown? These formulas
provide two solutions:
Restrict shows no value for rows or columns where no data has been selected.
Lookup simply shows the aggregated value for all lines (including filtered out members).
Here are a number of examples that show how these two solutions can be implemented, firstly by comparing
Restrict and Lookup, and then showing how the additional IgnoreDimension parameter for Lookup can be used.

46

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

All the following examples are based on a simple data set showing revenue for three products and two countries:
Product

Country DE

Country FR

Paper

1$

4$

Plastic

2$

8$

Glue

16$

32$

Restrict()
In this example, select two of the three products (paper and glue):

Example
RESTRICT([MyAccount];[MyDimension_PRODUCT=Paper,Glue])
Total value returned: 53$. That is, an aggregated value for all paper and glue from all countries.
Further analysis: using Restrict, if you drill down further in the product dimension, any lines for products that
were not selected will show empty cells:

Lookup()
Lookup can be used with exactly the same parameters for the same purpose. But the behavior for handling lowerlevel values is different. This example formula makes exactly the same selection as the previous Restrict example:

Example
LOOKUP([MyAccount];[MyDimension_PRODUCT=Paper,Glue])
Total value returned: 53$. That is, an aggregated value for all paper and glue from all countries.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

47

Further analysis: using Lookup, if you drill down further in the product dimension, Lookup will show a value for
all lines:

All selected lines will show the same total value.


The same value is also used for all other products that have not been selected (in this example, Plastic).

Lookup Using the Ignore External Dimension Parameter


The next examples follow on from the previous scenario to show the behavior of Lookup using the additional
parameter IgnoreDimension.

Example
In this first example, the same dimension filter for Paper and Glue is applied, and the IgnoreDimension
parameter is used to disregard the country dimension:
LOOKUP([MyAccount];[MyDimension_PRODUCT=Paper,Glue];[Dim_Country])
Total value returned = 53$. That is, values for all paper and glue from all countries (country is ignored).
Further analysis:
When drilling down to show product detail, no value is shown for products that have been filtered out (not
been selected).
When drilling down to show country detail, the same accumulated value is shown for both countries.

48

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Example
If the filter (POV) parameter is omitted from Lookup, then all products are selected:
LOOKUP([MyAccount];;[Dim_Country])
Total value returned = 63$. That is, values for all products from all countries.
Further analysis:
When drilling down to show product detail, all values are available (no filter was applied).
When drilling down to show country detail, the same accumulated value for all products is shown for both
countries.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

49

3.2

Creating a New Model

The Models page lists all existing models and is the main starting point for designing and creating new models.
There are several ways to get started with creating a new model:
1. From the Home screen you can drag a data file and drop it onto the screen to start the I'm Feeling Lucky /
Prepare Model processes.
2. From within Stories you can also use the Import Data
(Canvas pages) options to quickly get started.

Import File (Stories Start screen) and Add data

3. You can create a model using the templates available in the Planning Wizard available either from the Home
screen or within Stories when you add a table to a story (see Creating Models Using the Planning Wizard
[page 52]).
4. You can create a model manually by setting up the dimensions individually and defining all the preferences
and details of the model exactly as you require (see Creating a Model from Scratch [page 51]).
5. If you have a pre-prepared file of data you can create a fully featured model by importing the file

New

Model Import a File ). This option combines creating a model and loading it with transactional data (see
About Creating a Model from a File [page 59]).
6. You can connect to other systems to create a new model from an external source (see following table).
This table gives an overview of the options available to create a model by connecting to SAP and third party
sources.

50

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Import Option

Import Model from BPC

More Information

About Importing from BPC [page 70]

About Importing a Model from BPC [page 71]

Importing a Model from BPC [page 72]

Creating a Model from a Live Data


Connection

Creating a Model from a Live Data Connection [page 77]

Creating a Model from SAP BW

Importing a Model from a BW System [page 75]

Creating a Model from SAP ERP

Creating a Model from SAP ERP data [page 81]

Import Model from HANA


(individual or multiple)

Importing Models from HANA [page 76]

Creating a Model from an SAP


Universe

Creating a Model from a Universe [page 79]

Creating a Model from Salesforce


Creating a Model from Google
Drive

Connecting to Google Drive [page 58]

Creating a Model from


SuccessFactors

Importing a Model from SuccessFactors [page 77]

Note that loading transactional data to a model (data integration) is usually carried out separately using the
options of the Data Import [page 57] menu.

3.2.1 Creating a Model from Scratch


You can create and design a new model completely from scratch and then import data later.

Context
An overview of the steps to manually create a planning model is given here. Some changes can be made only
during this design phase that is, up to the point where you save the model for the first time. Once the design is
complete, you can populate the model with data.

Procedure

1. On the Models page, choose

(New Model) from the toolbar.

2. Select Start with a blank model.


3. In the Create Model dialog, enter a name and description for the model. For a planning model, select Planning
Enabled, and then select Create.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

51

4. The Time and Categories dimensions are built into planning models. You can modify the default settings as
required:
a. Set the Lowest Granularity time period for the model that is, the time period on which your data will be
based: year, quarter, month, or day.
b. Choose a start and end date for the timeline for the data.
c. Basic categories are predefined: actual, budget, planning, forecast, or rolling forecast. Choose the
frequency (year, quarter, month) that will be used as the basis for these categories.
d. For the Forecast category, choose the forecast range period (quarterly or yearly). The range for the
rolling forecast is defined in relation to the current date as a number of periods in the past (Look Back)
and a number of periods in the future (Look Ahead).
5. Set up the account dimension for the model either by selecting an account from the list of existing dimensions
or by creating a new one from scratch. Optionally, you can add an organizational dimension to your model and
also other generic dimensions. See Explore Dimensions for details of all dimension types.
6. Set the model preferences: from the menu of the wrench icon, choose Preferences, and enable all of the
specific features you need, such as data auditing. Note that only the Privacy setting can be changed later once
you have saved the model.
You can also set preferences (including Data Access restrictions) for each individual dimension.

Related Information
Planning Models and Analytics Models [page 18]
Model Preferences [page 26]
Dimension Preferences: Data Access [page 55]
Explore Dimensions [page 29]

3.2.2 Creating Models Using the Planning Wizard


An additional method for creating models is the Planning Wizard, this is available on the Home screen for first time
users and is integrated into Stories as an option when adding a table to a grid.
The Model Planning Wizard provides a template to create one of three types of plan, when you create the plan the
model behind the wizard is also created on the fly at the same time. In Stories, you can enter data for the new
model directly in the grid of the table. The three types of plan are:
Basic Financial Plan
Headcount Plan
Custom Plan
In Stories, a plan viewed in a table has a simple grid structure of columns and rows and the template prompts you
to enter text values which are added to each column. The Basic Financial Plan, for example, offers predefined
columns for Accounts, Regions and Products. The template does not limit you to using the predefined text, you
can rename the suggested texts and you can also add more columns of your own by using the
Dimension feature.

52

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Add Custom

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

When you have entered all the plan details and selected OK to continue, the plan and the model are created. The
model that is created is added to the Modeler list page and contains the dimensions (columns of the plan) and the
line details (dimension members) which you entered in the template. A dimension type is automatically assigned
to each dimension that is created and the new dimensions are named automatically as
<ModelName>_<DimensionType>. Additional information from the wizard is saved in the dimension Description
value.
The wizard also requires you to enter information about the frequency of data updates. This information is used to
automatically create a time dimension for the model.

3.3

Creating Dimensions

Every model must have one account-type dimension. You can add more dimensions of other types as required:
Organizational (only one), Generic, or Pool.

Context
You are creating a new model or adding dimensions to an existing model. Initially, if no account dimension has
been set up, the account dimension has the name 'Account'. The model cannot be saved until the account
dimension has been added.

Procedure
1. For the account dimension, choose Account and then Create New Dimension from the drop-down list. For
other dimension types, choose Add (plus icon) and then Create New Dimension from the drop-down list.
2. In the Create New Dimension dialog, select the dimension Type. Enter a Name and, optionally, a Description.
Depending on your security requirements, select Enable Data Access Control.
For the account dimension, the additional option Rate Type is available if you need to specify which
exchange rate to apply.
For an organization dimension, the additional option Use Area ID is available to automatically identify
geolocation information for each member of the organization.
For a pool dimension, a list of Mapped Dimensions is also maintained. The account dimension is selected
as a mapped dimension by default. You can select any other dimensions that are available, as needed.
3. Choose Create to add the new dimension to the model.
An initial # member is added to each dimension (but not the account dimension). You cannot delete this
member manually, but you can paste data into the dimension grid and overwrite this initial row.
The Options menu gives access to the Dimension Preferences dialog where you can update some of the basic
details of the dimension.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

53

During the design stage of the model, you can delete dimensions or use the Replace Dimension feature on the
Options menu to select a new dimension from the list of existing ones. Once you have saved the model,
dimensions can no longer be removed or replaced.
It is also possible to completely delete dimensions that are no longer in use. To do this, go to the Modeler
Dimensions tab page and select the dimension from the list. Choose Delete to remove the dimension.

Results
After creating a dimension, a new tab with the name of your dimension is added to the model. You can now add or
load data to the dimension. The new dimension is also added to the dimension list tab page in Modeler.

3.3.1 Editing Dimensions


Once a model has been created, you can continue to maintain the content.
You can add more dimensions to a model and also add more columns and rows to a dimension.
Choose Options Preferences to access the Dimension Preferences dialog. Here you can modify the
Description of the dimension and in some cases it is also possible to change the dimension Type (you can
change a Generic type to an Organization type).
To enable security for the dimension, check Enable Data Access Control and, for the Account dimension,
select the Rate Type checkbox if you wish to add currency types to the dimension. Both of these options add
additional columns to the dimension grid.
Choose the Add (+ symbol) option on the toolbar to add more rows or columns to the dimension.

Related Information
Explore Hierarchies [page 23]
Model Preferences [page 26]

3.3.2 Editing Dimension Attributes


Several options are available for maintaining the content in the dimension grid.
You can change dimension attributes in the grid as follows:
For all properties, you can copy and paste values from an external data source.
The Account dimension includes a set of technical properties. List boxes are available to help you enter data
in each cell of these properties.
To insert a new attribute (column), choose Add (plus icon on the toolbar) and select Add Column. This inserts
a column to the left of the currently selected cell.

54

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

To insert a new hierarchy, choose Add and select Add Hierarchy. This appends a new column to the existing
ones.
To insert a new row, choose Add and select Add Row. This inserts a row above the currently selected cell.
To copy a row, choose Copy Row on the toolbar. This duplicates the current row and marks it red to indicate
that the content must be further edited.
To delete a row or column, choose the Paperbin icon and select the required option.

3.3.3 Dimension Preferences: Data Access


You can restrict access to the output data by setting read and write permissions for individual members. You can
activate this security feature for any dimension in the model from the dimension Preferences.

Context
You can enable Data Access restrictions by selecting the Enable Data Access Control checkbox in the Edit
Dimension Preferences dialog. Once this has been activated, two additional columns (Read and Write) are added
to the grid of the dimension so that individual settings can be applied to each row. You can select from a list box
one or more users (or simply all users) who will have access to the data.

Procedure
1. Select the dimension that you want to modify and choose Preferences from the toolbar.
2. In the Edit Dimension Preferences dialog, select the Enable Data Access Control checkbox and choose OK.
This adds two additional columns to the dimension grid.
3. You can now use the two new columns Read and Write to control access to all rows of the grid by selecting
one or more users in either or both of the columns.
You can see a summary of all data access settings for all dimensions in the model from the model Preferences
menu (Wrench icon) Data Access option. This displays a read-only list of dimensions; the data access setting
can be changed only in the dimension Preferences dialog.

Related Information
Model Security [page 24]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

55

3.4

Clearing Model Data

Using the eraser icon on the toolbar, you can clear a selected model of all data. You can do this for the model as a
whole, for individual dimensions, or for selected dimension members.

Context
This feature is restricted to user roles with privileges to delete models.

Procedure
1. Select a model in the Modeler list screen by marking its checkbox.
2. Select Clear Selected Model (the eraser icon) on the toolbar. This opens the Clean Modeler dialog.
3. The complete hierarchy of members for each dimension in the model is displayed in a dialog. You can
navigate through the collapsible list of available members to select individual account members, or you can
select all members of a branch at the top level of the hierarchy.
4. After making your selection, select OK to continue. This displays a verification prompt that you must confirm
to complete the operation.

3.5

Deleting a Model

You can delete a model and all related data by selecting the

(Delete) icon on the Modeler toolbar.

Context
This feature is restricted to user roles with privileges to delete models. Models that are currently in use cannot be
deleted, and when you attempt to delete a model, the system checks for dependent stories. If the model is in use
in a story, a dialog is displayed showing the story names where it is in use.
When you delete a model, the built-in dimensions of Time and Category (Version) are automatically deleted but
other dimensions are kept. Dimensions that are not deleted are still available in the Dimensions list and can be
reused in other models.

56

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Procedure
1. On the Models list screen, use the model selection checkbox to select one or more models that you want to
delete.
2. Choose Delete from the toolbar.
3. If any selected model is in use in a story, a dialog is displayed that identifies the stories where the model is
used.
4. If the selected model is not in use, a confirmation prompt is displayed asking you to confirm the deletion.
Choose OK to delete the model.

3.6

Data Import

You can populate models with data by importing transactional data from files or other systems.
The table below lists the available options for importing data. To import data from a flat text file, the data must be
delimited (such as comma-separated values). Data in Microsoft Excel can be imported and if the data is saved on
separate sheets in the Excel workbook, you can choose which sheet to import. Data files can be stored locally on
your file system or network; direct import from Google Drive is also supported.
Integration of SAP BusinessObjects Cloud with a number of other SAP and third-party systems is also possible.
Import Option

Import Data from File

Import Data from BPC

Import Data from Google Drive

More Information

About Importing Data from Files [page 66]

Importing Data from Files [page 68]

Importing Data from BPC [page 74]

About Importing Data from BPC [page 73]

Connecting to Google Drive [page 58]

Import Data from SAP BW


Import Data from SAP Universe

Importing Universe Data into an Existing Model [page 80]

Import Data from SAP ERP

Importing SAP ERP Data into an Existing Model [page 82]

Import Data from SuccessFactors

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

57

3.6.1 Connecting to Google Drive


If your data files are stored on Google Drive, you can connect directly to Google and select a file from there.

Context
When you connect to Google Drive, you can import any of the following file formats: Google Sheets, commadelimited text files (csv), and Microsoft Excel files (xlsx).
On the Modeler Import menu, two options are available to connect to Google Drive, but in both cases the
connection procedure to retrieve either a data file or model data is the same: you use the Import Data option to
add data to an existing model and the Import Model option to create a new model. After selecting the source file,
the import action is the same as described for other similar import procedures.
This same option to import files from Google Drive is also available in Stories when adding data to a new story.

Note
You must have your Google Drive ID and password ready. The login prompt for Google Drive is displayed in a
popup dialog, and it is therefore essential to disable the popup blocker in your browser before trying to
connect.

Procedure
1. Select the option you require from the menu. This opens the Import from Google Drive dialog.
2. Select the Choose File button to open the Select Google Drive File dialog.
3. For your first access to Google Drive, select the Sign in link to open the login popup. Enter your ID and
password and select the account you want to use. If you are already signed in and have already got the
address of the target file on the clipboard, you can paste it directly into the dialog.

Note
If you are already signed in to Google, select Sign Out to switch to a different Google account, or to sign out
of your current Google account.
4. The content of the drive you selected is now displayed in the My Drive section of the dialog. Navigate to the file
you want to import and choose the Select button.
5. Complete the other details in the Import from Google Drive dialog; that is, select the existing model or enter
the name of the new model that will be created.
6. Choose the Import button to begin the import procedure.

58

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Results
Data is imported from Google Drive.

Note
You are still signed in to Google. When you are finished using SAP BusinessObjects Cloud, it is recommended
to sign out of your Google account. To sign out, you can select Sign Out in the Select Google Drive File dialog, or
sign out of Google in your browser.

3.6.2 About Creating a Model from a File


You can import data from an external file, such as an Excel spreadsheet, into a new model. The data columns in
the source file are used to create dimensions in the model.
The import process analyzes the source data and creates an initial data view with proposed dimensions for the
new model. You then refine the proposal by specifying the attribute type for each dimension in the new model. The
workflow to create a new model from a file is:
1. Select a source file and enter a name for the model that will be created.
2. Start the import process, which creates the initial data view.
3. Specify attribute types for the dimensions.
4. Start the automatic creation of the model.

Source Data
The source data can be an Excel spreadsheet (.xlsx) or a delimited text file (.csv or .txt). The source data must
include columns that can be used to create dimensions in a new model, and it must also include transactional data
(referred to in Modeler as Measure/Values). The transactional data is not visible in Modeler; only in the output
that is generated.
The data will typically include details for the main account for the model. You can identify which dimension is the
main account during the import process, but if no account data is found, an account dimension will be generated
automatically for the model.
In addition to the main dimensions and transactional data, the source can also include properties for dimensions;
that is, text information such as descriptions, hierarchy information, or other details. Properties are linked to a
specific parent dimension during the import process.

Import Process
The data is analyzed as it is imported, to identify the unique records in each column and to determine the data
types: in the initial analysis, a basic distinction between numeric and text data is made. Columns containing text
are typically identified as dimensions, and numeric data is identified as either transactional data or time values.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

59

Data Quality Considerations


During data import, anomalies in your data can prevent the model from being created. If any of the following
issues are found in your data, those data cells are highlighted, and messages in the Details panel explain the
issues. You'll need to resolve these issues before the model can be created.
Dimension member IDs cannot contain these restricted characters , ; : ' [ ] =.
Numeric data cells in measures cannot contain non-numeric characters.
If member IDs are empty, they are automatically filled with default values if you select the Fill applicable empty
ID cells with a default value option. Otherwise, those rows are omitted from the model.
In dimensions and properties, a single member ID cannot correspond to different Descriptions in multiple
rows (but a single Description can correspond to multiple member IDs).
For example, if member IDs are employee numbers, and Descriptions are employee names, it's allowable to
have more than one employee with the same name, but not allowable to have more than one employee with
the same member ID.
In a Time dimension column, cell values must match the time format specified in the Details panel.
Latitude and longitude columns, from which location dimensions are created, must contain values within the
valid latitude and longitude ranges.
For planning-enabled models, in a hierarchy measure, non-leaf-node members are not allowed.

Note
For analytic (non-planning-enabled) models only, non-leaf node members are allowed, but be aware of the
effects of this behavior. Example: in an organizational chart that includes employee salaries, the Manager
has her individual salary, and her staff members have their own salaries as well. In a visualization, do you
expect the Managers data point to reflect her individual salary, or the sum of her staff members' salaries?
Nodes in a hierarchy cannot be circular. For example, this hierarchy arrangement is not allowed: USA >
California > San Francisco > California.
Other constraints:
At least one measure must be defined for the model.
Only one dimension can be of type Time.

DataView
The result of the initial import process is the DataView. The initial column header names from the source data are
shown together with symbols to show the data type that has been recognized (numeric, time and date, or text
strings). You can edit the column names by double-clicking the column headers, or by changing the Column
names in the Details panel.
The content of the data view and the success of the initial analysis are dependent on the quality of the source
data, such as the column headings and the consistency of the data in each column. Information about the
imported dimensions is shown in the Column view in the Details panel.
The DataView includes these features:
Suggested actions: depending on the currently selected element in the display, a choice of editing options
may be offered.

60

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Highlighting of cells (red background) to indicate anomalous data that may be incorrect.
Automatic selecting of cells with matching values and automatic counting of values.
Additionally, many context-sensitive editing features are available: firstly from the context menu in the data area
to correct or replace cell values, and also from the drop-down menu available in the column heading area. This
menu provides features to manage the columns in the grid, sort and filter the data, convert the data type, or add
additional columns of geolocation information for the model:
Menu Option

Description

Sort

Sort the data.

Filter

Filter the data, either by selecting individual members, or by specifying a range.

Duplicate Column

Create a copy of an existing column.

Hide Column

Hide a column from view. Note that the column still exists in the data. An icon in the
header row shows the hidden column's position. Re-display the hidden column by
selecting the icon.

Delete Column

Delete a column.

Combine Columns

Combine two or more columns into one.

Split Column

Split a text column.

Convert Case

Convert a text column to uppercase or lowercase.

Trim Whitespace

Trim spaces from the start and end of text strings.

Convert to Text

Convert numbers to text.

Convert to Number

Convert text to numbers.

Convert to Date

Convert text or numbers to dates.

Create Location

Create a location dimension.

A history of all changes you make in the data view is maintained and displayed in the collapsible History panel. If
necessary, you can roll back the changes you make either by clicking on entries in the history or using the Undo /
Redo buttons on the toolbar.

Choosing Attribute Types


Manually choose attribute types for the imported dimensions to improve the quality of data so that the complete
new model can be generated.
During initial data import, each column in the DataView is assigned an attribute type. If the assigned attribute
types are unsuitable, you can change them. In general, choose the following attribute types:
Dimension ID: Columns that will become dimensions

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

61

Measure: Columns that will become measures


Description: Specify that a column is a description of another column that serves as the dimension ID. Cells in
the description column have a more flexible character set, and can be empty. Example:
ProductID

Description

X123

Computer and equipment

Y456

Books

Hierarchy: The column is the parent of the parent/child hierarchy pair. The child column is the one that has
attribute type Dimension ID.

Note
After specifying a column to be of type Hierarchy, you're asked to select a child dimension; this is the
Dimension ID column.

Details Panel
The collapsible blue Details panel on the right of the screen is available to apply settings to each selected column.
This panel has two views:
Data Level shows general information about the import, including any data-quality issues in the data.
Column shows information for the currently selected column, and lists the attribute and dimension types
that you can apply. If there are any data-quality issues in the selected column, specific information about
them is shown here also.
The Column panel is shown here with the content of the drop-down menus visible. The three main data types are
shown color coded and the commentary that follows explains how these are handled.

62

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

1) Dimensions: Any column that must appear as a separate dimension in the model requires the attribute type
Dimension ID plus a dimension type.

Note
The date/time data column must also be set to attribute type Dimension ID with dimension type Time to create
a time dimension. This is required for planning-type models. When you have set up this column, you can also
set the Time Format by selecting a template from the drop-down list. This will ensure that the data is correctly
parsed as it is imported.
2) Properties: Columns containing descriptions, hierarchy information, and other properties can be imported and
added as additional columns on any selected dimension. In this case, you must also select the parent dimension
where the column will appear (click the arrow symbol in the attribute type menu to open a new selection dialog). If
you set a column to attribute type Description, the column heading is immediately updated with the word
Description.
3) Values (transactional data): This data type requires the attribute type Measure and is automatically assigned to
the dimension type Value (this data is not visible in Modeler and Value is not shown in the list of dimension types).

Related Information
About Importing Data from Files [page 66]
Creating a Model from a File [page 64]
Enriching Coordinate Data for Geospatial Analysis [page 65]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

63

3.6.2.1

Creating a Model from a File

To create a new model from a file, you select the file, give the new model a name, and then specify how you want
to import the data into model dimensions.

Prerequisites
You have a delimited text file (.csv, or .txt) or a Microsoft Excel (.xlsx) file that contains the transactional data
and the master data that can be matched to the dimensions of the target model.

Procedure
1. In the main menu, choose
2. Select

Modeler

Models .

(New Model).

3. Select Import a file from your computer.


4. In the Import Model From File dialog, choose Select Source File.
5. Browse to the file you wish to import and choose Open.
The name of the file you selected is now displayed. If you need to select a different file, you can remove the file
by using the X icon and then select another.
6. If you are importing from an Excel workbook containing multiple sheets, select the Sheet you want to import.
7. In the Target Model section, enter a Model Name and a description (optional).
8. Select Import to begin the initial import of the source data.
After the import completes, the DataView is displayed.
9. In the Details panel, specify whether you want the model to be Planning Enabled, and indicate whether to use
the first row of the data as column headers.
10. If you want to perform any data preparation, select the down-arrow in a column header, and choose from the
available menu options.
For example, you can hide, delete, or combine columns, and filter the data.
11. Select a column in the DataView, and use the Column panel to apply settings.
For measures, you can add a unit label; for example, cartons, kilograms, and so on.
12. In the Details panel, if there are any messages in the Data Quality area, you'll need to resolve those issues
before creating the model.
Select a message to see the options available to resolve the issue.
13. Choose Create Model.

64

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Results
The data is successfully imported and the new model is listed on the Models page.

Related Information
About Creating a Model from a File [page 59]

3.6.2.2

Enriching Coordinate Data for Geospatial Analysis

Before you perform geospatial analysis in stories, you must first import coordinate data and enrich it in the
Modeler. This process creates a new column in the data view with an enriched format of latitude and longitude
coordinates.

Prerequisites
You must have an Excel file (.xlsx) or CSV file with a location ID column that contains unique data, as well as
latitude and longitude columns.

Context
These steps describe how to enrich coordinate data while creating a model from a file. You can also enrich
coordinate data while uploading data to an existing model. For more information, see About Importing Data from
Files [page 66].

Procedure
1. From the main menu, select Modeler.
2. In the Models page, select Import Model from File and choose a file to import.
3. Type the Model Name and Description, and select Import.
The data from the file appears in the Data Integration page.
4. Ensure that at least one numeric column has Measure as its attribute type.
5. Select the arrow next to a column containing latitude or longitude data and choose

Create Location

By

Coordinate .

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

65

6. In the Create a Location Dimension dialog, specify the following information:


Location Dimension: Type a name for the dimension that you will create using the geo enrich process.
Tooltip Text: Select the column that will provide the tooltip text for dimension members displayed in a geo
map.
Location Identifier: Select the dimension you want to associate with the new location dimension. Select a
dimension with a unique location ID.

Note
You can create a location for the Dimension ID column of an organization or generic dimension. You
cannot create a location dimension associated with Account, Version or Time dimensions.
Latitude: Select the column that contains the latitude coordinate.
Longitude: Select the column that contains the longitude coordinate.
7. Select Create.
A new column is created for the location dimension. A confirmation box is displayed summarizing the number
valid and invalid coordinates.
8. To review the location coordinates for the new dimension, select the new column, and under UNIQUE VALUES
in the Details panel, select the donut chart.
The Location Coordinates dialog is displayed.
9. Select Invalid in the Location Coordinates dialog to review any invalid coordinates.
Return to your new location dimension column to resolve any invalid coordinates.
10. Once you have resolved all the mapping issues, select Create Model in the Details panel.

Results
The model is created. When working with stories, the location dimension will be available to add to geo maps.

Related Information
Analyzing Geographical Data [page 162]
About Creating a Model from a File [page 59]

3.6.3 About Importing Data from Files


You can import data in a delimited (column) format to existing models. During the import process, you can finalize
the mapping of the source data to the dimensions in the model.
The data to be imported must fit the structure of the existing target model. The data is imported, analyzed, and
mapped to the dimensions of the target model. A special feature of importing data to an existing model is the
option to align new data with existing version categories or to create new version categories during the import. For

66

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

example, if the existing model contains actual values, you can now import planning data by selecting the Planning
category and entering a label for the new version data. Then, in the output that is generated from the model, both
the actual and the new planning columns will be visible.
The workflow to import data from a file into a model is:
1. Select a source file and select the name of the model that will be updated.
2. Start the import and automatic initial mapping process that creates the initial data view.
3. Map the data in the data view to align the source data with the model.
4. Start the automatic update process.

Source Data
The source data can be an Excel spreadsheet (.xlsx) or a delimited text file (.csv or .txt). The source data must
include columns that can be matched to the existing dimensions in the selected model. It must also include
transactional data (referred to in Modeler as Measure/Values).

Import and Initial Mapping


After the initial import, the data is displayed in the DataView grid. The status and success of the initial mapping is
shown in each column header of the grid as a color-coded status bar indicating if the source column was mapped
and what percentage of the imported data was accepted. If the status is not 100 percent green, you can click the
status bar to see details of which values have not been matched.
A history of all changes you make in the data view is maintained and displayed in the collapsible History panel. If
necessary, you can roll back the changes you make either by clicking on entries in the history or using the Undo /
Redo buttons on the toolbar.

Data Quality Considerations


Anomalies in your data can prevent the data from being imported properly. If any of the following issues are found
in your data, those data cells are highlighted, and messages in the Details panel explain the issues. You'll need to
resolve these issues before the data can be fully imported.
Dimension member IDs cannot contain these restricted characters , ; : ' [ ] =.
Numeric data cells in measures cannot contain non-numeric characters.
In a Time dimension column, cell values must match the time format specified in the Details panel.
All dimensions of the existing model need to be mapped.
Cells in a column that is mapped to an existing dimension must match the existing dimension members.
Unmatched values will result in those rows being omitted from the model.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

67

Details Panel: Data Level


The Data Level panel shows general details of the import process and is used to apply general settings to the
import process as a whole.
An important setting here is the import method to determine how existing data is handled. A choice of three
import methods is available:
Clean & Replace

Deletes the existing data and adds new entries to the target model.

Replace

Updates the existing data and adds new entries to the target model.

Append

Keeps the existing data as is and adds new entries to the target model.

You can also choose how accounting data is handled in this import. Special data types for accounting data are
available. These automatically apply negative signs to values in the database as necessary, although the data
shown on screen is shown as a positive value (this applies to the types INC and LEQ refer to the Account
dimension type for more information). A checkbox is available on this panel to apply this feature to the
transactional data (values) as it is imported.

Details Panel: Column


The Column panel shows details for the currently selected data column. It shows the mapping status and also the
mapping quality as well as frequency counts and summaries of all the data in the column.
For any column containing version information, you can set which category of data (such as Actual or Planning)
you are going to update in the model.

Related Information
About Creating a Model from a File [page 59]
Importing Data from Files [page 68]

3.6.3.1

Importing Data from Files

You can import data saved in spreadsheets or text files to update existing models.

Prerequisites
To import data to an existing model, you must have a delimited text file (.csv, or .txt) or a worksheet in a
Microsoft Excel (.xlsx) file that contains the transactional data and the master data that can be matched to the
dimensions of the target model.

68

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Procedure
Import Data
1. In the main menu, choose
2. Select

Modeler

Models .

Import Data from File .

3. In the Import Data File dialog, choose Select Source File.


4. Browse to the file you wish to import and choose Open.
The name of the file you selected is now displayed. If you need to select a different file, you can remove the file
by using the X icon and then select another.
5. If you are importing from an Excel workbook containing multiple sheets, select the Sheet you want to import.
6. In the Target Model section, enter a Model Name and a description (optional).
7. Select Import to begin the initial import of the source data.
After the import completes, the DataView is displayed.
Data Mapping: Data Level Details Panel
You can begin the data mapping process in the Data Level panel.
8. Carry out the following checks and apply the settings you require:
Check the source Data file and Mapped to values; you can change these if necessary.
Set the Import Method to determine if the new data should replace, clean and replace, or be appended to
existing data.
Check for onscreen notifications about the overall status of Mapped Dimensions. If the initial import was
not able to map all dimensions, unmapped dimensions in the target model are listed here (warning
triangle symbol). You can select an unmapped dimension here and also apply a filter at this point.
If the target model uses automatic sign switching for accounting data types, you can apply this switching
feature to the imported data by selecting the Reverse the sign of the data checkbox. (See Attributes of an
Account Dimension for details.)
If the source data contains a row of header labels, select the Use first row as header checkbox.
After completing the general data settings, you can look at the mapping of individual columns in the DataView
and the Column details panel.
Data Mapping: Column Details Panel
As you select each column in the DataView grid, the Column details panel updates to show summaries of the data
in the selected column, or, if the column is already mapped, to show the mapping quality status. Note that the final
import cannot be started until all dimensions in the model have been mapped to a data column.
9. Manually map any remaining unmapped columns. Check each column. Use the context menu Replace feature
in the DataView to revise and improve the data quality. Use the column management features (drop-down
menu in the header of each column) to apply more general changes to the data. These features include
sorting, converting data to number or date format, and filtering. The filter offers two methods that can be
used alone or together: firstly, to import only selected members of the account and secondly, to set a data
range filter based on a comparison value (for example, only import data where the value is greater than or
equal to 100).
Values: if you select a mapped column of values, a (Filter) icon is available in the Column panel so that
you can restrict the transaction data you import. You can use this to select data for just one single
member of the account.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

69

Version information: if you select a column that is mapped to a dimension containing version information,
an additional Version Mapping feature is available in the Column panel. In this case, select the Map
Versions button to open an additional dialog where you can map a dimension category (such as Actuals or
Forecast) to the version of the data being imported. After doing this, a message is displayed to confirm
that the data has been mapped to a specific version.
Geolocation data: select the Create Location option of the drop-down menu to add an additional location
dimension to your model. (See Enriching Coordinate Data for Geospatial Analysis for details.)
10. When the mapping process is complete, select the Finish Mapping button.

Results
A confirmation prompt is displayed once the data has been successfully imported. Error messages may be
displayed if the data is not complete for some reason.

Related Information
Attributes of an Account Dimension [page 30]
Enriching Coordinate Data for Geospatial Analysis [page 65]

3.6.4 About Importing from BPC


You can import models and populate them with data by importing from SAP Business Planning and Consolidation.
Imports from versions 10.0 and 10.1 of SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (BPC) are supported:
SAP Business Planning and Consolidation, version for Microsoft Platform (BPC for Microsoft)
SAP Business Planning and Consolidation, version for SAP NetWeaver (BPC for NW)
To import from a BPC system, the on-premise BPC system must be specifically set up to connect with the
application. For further information, please contact your SAP consultant.
Before you can proceed with the import from BPC, you must have set up a connection to the BPC system in SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud Connections.

Related Information
Connections [page 252]

70

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

3.6.4.1

About Importing a Model from BPC

You can import a model from SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (BPC).
The workflow to import a model from BPC is:
1. Specify source model information.
2. Provide target model information.
3. Map source data to the new model.

Source Model
You first need to select the connection to the BPC system. This can be an existing connection or one that you
create on the fly during the import. For more information on creating connections, see the Connections section of
the user help. Next, you must specify the environment, which is a set of models, and from this set, select the
model to be imported. (In BPC terms, a model is a cube and the cube is the object of the import.)

Target Model
You need to provide a name for the target model and optionally a description. The model name cannot start with a
numeral or any other non-alphabetical symbol, such as a space.
You must also specify whether the model is to be planning enabled to support the additional features of planningtype models and if the new model should be read-only. If you set a model to read-only it is still owned by BPC and
you cannot edit it in the application.

Mapping
You can create mappings between the source dimensions and the target dimensions in the Mapping dialog. The
mapping matrix is set out in the following columns:
Source Dimension: This column lists the dimensions in the source model.
Filter Value: You can set a filter for each column to control how much data is imported. Because the volume of
data can be very large, you must filter the Time and Version dimensions to a single member. A warning
symbol is displayed next to the filter icon as a reminder. For the Version dimension an additional Version
Mapping dialog is displayed to enable you to map the BPC category names to the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud
category names.
Dimension Name: This column contains the names of the dimensions for the new model, to which the source
columns are mapped.
Dimension Type: This column contains the type for each dimension. The system automatically suggests a
type for some dimensions, but you can change or set the type by choosing one of the following options from
the list:
Account: This dimension represents the accounts structure of your organization. You can have only one
dimension of this type per model.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

71

Generic: Any kind of business dimension that is not an organizational one. This can include products,
channels, or sales representatives. You can add multiple dimensions of this type to a model.
Organization: This dimension represents the business units that drive your business. Depending on your
organization, these could be operating units, geographic entities, cost centers, and so on. You can have
only one dimension of this type per model.
Time: Specifies the smallest time period to be applied to the model. You can use year, quarter, month, or
day. It is created automatically when you create a model.
Version: This is for the Category dimension.
Signed Data (Values): Select this type for transactional data.
Once the mapping is complete, you can start the import. When the import is complete, you can open the model to
check the model structure. At this point, you can add more dimensions to the model. If you add more dimensions,
you should set a default member for data import.

Related Information
Connections [page 252]
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP BPC System [page 265]

3.6.4.1.1

Importing a Model from BPC

To import a model from SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (BPC), you specify the source model and then
map the imported data to the new model structure.

Prerequisites
You use SAP Business Planning and Consolidation, version for SAP NetWeaver (BPC NW) of version 10.0 or
above and the SAP HANA Cloud Connector is installed and configured on premise or
You use SAP Business Planning and Consolidation, version for Microsoft of version 10.0 or above and the SAP
HANA Cloud Connector and SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent are installed and configured on premise.

Procedure
1. In the main menu, choose
2. Select

Modeler

Use a datasource

Models .

BPC .

3. In the Import Model from BPC dialog, choose a BPC System from the list of connections.
You can create a new connection on the fly by selecting New Connection and following the instructions in
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP BPC System [page 265].

72

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

4. If the source model requires access credentials you will be prompted to enter a user name and password in
the Credentials dialog.
5. Select an Environment and then select a Model.
6. Enter a Model Name for the new model and optionally a Description.
7. For a planning-type model choose Planning enabled.
8. If the model is to be read only, choose Read only (SAP Business Planning and Consolidation owned).
9. Choose Edit Mapping to open the Mapping dialog.
10. In the Mapping dialog, complete the mapping matrix as follows:
a. To set a filter, choose the filter icon for a source dimension to open the filtering dialog, select members to
filter, and choose OK.

Note
You must set filters for the version and time dimensions and select only a single member. This is
necessary to reduce the amount of data to import.
b. For the Version dimension an additional Version Mapping dialog is displayed to enable you to map the
BPC category names to the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud category names.
c. In the Dimension Name column, you can edit the system-generated name of the new dimension, if
required.
d. Select a type for the dimension from the Dimension Type list.
e. When you have completed the mapping, choose Map Data.
11. In the Import Model from BPC dialog, choose Import.
The new model opens in the Modeler interface.
12. Save your model.

3.6.4.2

About Importing Data from BPC

You can populate models by importing data from SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (BPC).
The workflow to import data from BPC is:
1. Specify source model information.
2. Select target model information.
3. Map source data to the existing model structure.

Source Model
You first need to select the connection to the BPC system. This can be an existing connection or one that you
create on the fly during the import. For more information on creating connections, see the Connections section of
the user help.
Next, you must specify the environment, which is a set of models, and from this set, select the model to be
imported. (In BPC terms, a model is a cube and the cube is the object of the import.)

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

73

Target Model
You select the target model from a list of existing models.

Mapping
In the Mapping Options you must specify how any existing data in the model is to be treated by choosing from the
following import options:
Clean & Replace

Deletes the existing data and adds new entries to the target model. In this case you can use the
Replace Scope checkbox for each dimension to include or exclude specific dimensions from the
update.

Replace

Updates the existing data and adds new entries to the target model.

Append

Keeps the existing data as is and adds new entries to the target model.

In the Dimensions section of the dialog create mappings between the source data and the existing model
dimensions:
Source Dimension: This column lists the columns in the source model.
Filter Value: You can set a filter for each column to control how much data is imported. Because the volume of
data can be very large, you must filter the Time and Version dimensions to a single member. A warning
symbol is displayed next to the filter icon as a reminder. For the Version dimension an additional Version
Mapping dialog is displayed to enable you to map the BPC category names to the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud
category names.
Dimension Name: This column contains the names of the dimensions for the new model that the source
columns are mapped to.
Default value: You can enter a default for each mapped member by typing the value in this column.
Once the mapping is complete, you can start the import. A confirmation message is displayed when the import is
complete.

3.6.4.2.1

Importing Data from BPC

To populate models by importing data from SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (BPC), you have to map the
import data to the corresponding dimensions in the model and decide how existing data should be treated.

Prerequisites
You use SAP Business Planning and Consolidation, version for NetWeaver (BPC NW), version 10.0 or above
and the SAP HANA Cloud Connector is installed and configured on premise or
You use SAP Business Planning and Consolidation, version for Microsoft, version 10.0 or above and the SAP
HANA Cloud Connector and SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent are installed and configured on premise.

74

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Procedure
1. In the main menu, choose
2. In the

Modeler

Models .

Import data menu, select Import Data from BPC.

3. In the Import Data from BPC dialog, select a BPC System from the list of connections.
You can create a new connection on the fly by selecting New Connection and following the instructions in
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP BPC System [page 265].
4. If the source model requires access credentials you will be prompted to enter a user name and password in
the Credentials dialog.
5. Select an Environment and then select a Model.
6. Select the Target Model from the list.
7. To map source data to the model structure, choose Edit Mapping to open the Mapping dialog.
8. In the Mapping Options section, specify how any existing data in the model is to be treated by choosing from
the following import options: Clean and Replace, replace, Append.
9. In the Dimensions section, complete the mapping matrix as follows:
a. For each Source Dimension set a filter by choosing the filter icon to open the filtering dialog, select
members to include and then choose OK.

Note
You must set filters for the version and time dimensions and select only a single member. This is
necessary to reduce the amount of data to import.
b. In the Dimension Name column, you can edit the system-generated name of the new dimension if
required.
c. Where required, enter a Default Value for dimensions.
d. When you have completed the mapping, choose Map Data.
10. In the Import Model from BPC dialog, choose Import.
11. Save your model.

3.6.5 Importing a Model from a BW System


To import a model from an SAP Business Warehouse (BW) system, you specify the source model and then
specify how incoming data should be mapped to model dimensions.

Prerequisites
You use an SAP Business Warehouse (BW) system, version 7.4 or above andSAP HANA Cloud Connector and
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent are installed and configured.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

75

Procedure
1. In the main menu, choose
2. Select

Modeler

Models .

Select Other Models .

3. In the Select Data Model dialog, choose the BW connection type.


4. Choose an existing BW connection, or create a new connection.
5. Choose an existing query, or create a new query.
If you create a new query, select the BW data that you want to import, and then select OK.
6. Specify whether the model is Planning Enabled, and indicate whether to use the first row of the data as
column headers.
7. Map data for the new model and then select Create Model.

Related Information
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP BW System [page 266]

3.6.6 Importing Models from HANA


The Import Models from HANA option allows you to connect to the underlying HANA database to import database
views and create new models.
Two menu options are available to import views from HANA: to import either a single view or to import multiple
views. To use either of these options, the HANA database must be set up by the system administrator as a
Remote System (Connections feature). Once the connection is made, the HANA views in the database (analytic or
calculation-type views) are available and can be imported to create new analytic-type models; a new model is
created for each view selected. A view can only be imported once; to re-import the view, delete the existing model
from the Models list page and then start the import process.
When you select either of the Import Model From HANA options (Import menu on toolbar), the views that are
available for import in HANA are listed in the Select HANA Views dialog. The views are arranged in a collapsible
hierarchical structure that you can navigate through to find the view you want. A search feature is also available.
On completion of the import process, a message is displayed to confirm that the model was created. You can
immediately work with the new model by, for example, modifying the model further or creating an output table
from the model in Stories.

Import Single Model From HANA


When importing a single view containing location information, you also have the option to enrich data for
geospatial analysis by adding a location dimension to the model during the import process. To do this, select the
Enrich Data checkbox before starting the import (refer to following section).

76

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Import Multiple Models From HANA


Using this option, you can use checkboxes in the Select Views dialog to select several items or a branch of the
hierarchy.

3.6.7 Importing a Model from SuccessFactors


To import a model from a SuccessFactors system, you specify the source model and then specify how incoming
data should be mapped to model dimensions.

Procedure
1. On the main menu, choose

Modeler

Models .

2. Select New Model.


3. Select Import model from SuccessFactors.
4. Select your SuccessFactors connection or select Create New Connection to create a new connection.
For more information, see Creating an Import Data Connection to SuccessFactors [page 270].
5. Select your SuccessFactors query or select Create New Query to create a new query.
6. In the Create New Query dialog, enter a name and a description for your query.
7. Select the entity to build your query and select Next.
From here you can build a query for this entity by moving data elements into the Selected Data and Filters
areas.
8. Select OK.
9. Review the newly imported data and fix errors and inconsistencies.
10. Select Create Model.

3.6.8 Creating a Model from a Live Data Connection


Use this option of the New Model page to automatically create a new analytic-type model from a data source in a
connected remote system.

Prerequisites
For this option, a connection to a remote system is required. The system administrator will create live data
connections using the Connections menu option of SAP BusinessObjects Cloud. You must manually prepare data
for geospatial analysis in the remote system using SAP HANA Studio.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

77

Access to remote systems is usually secured by user ID and password.

Procedure
1. Choose Import a Model from a Live Data Connection.
2. In the dialog that is displayed, select the System you want to connect to from the drop-down list. You will be
prompted to enter the user ID and password to access the selected system. This makes a connection to the
target system and reads the list of views that are available.
3. Select the Data Source. The list of views may be very long and a Search feature is available to help you to
locate the source you are looking for.
4. Enter the Name and Description for the new model that will be created, and click OK to start.

Results
A confirmation message is displayed that the model has been created. The new model is immediately available in
the model list.
In the model list, the name of the data source is shown in the Data Resource column. If you click the link in this
column, you can see the details of the import. You also have the option here to rerun the import at any time by
selecting the Run button.

Note
If you have imported a model containing geographical data from a remote HANA system, some geospatial
analysis features will be automatically disabled. These include map filters and the choropleth layer.

Related Information
Live Data Connection [page 272]

78

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

3.6.9 Creating a Model from a Universe


To create a model from an SAP BusinessObjects BI platform universe, you specify the source model and then
specify how you want to import data into model dimensions.

Prerequisites
The SAP HANA Cloud Connector and SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent are installed and configured.
You use a supported version of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform. For information on
supported versions, see System Requirements and Technical Prerequisites [page 287].

Procedure
1. In the main menu, choose
2. Select

Modeler

Use a datasource

Models .

SAP Universe .

3. Choose an existing universe connection, or create a new connection.


4. If you created a new connection, you'll next create a new query.
If you chose an existing connection, you can choose an existing query (which you can edit), or create a new
query.
To edit an existing query, follow these steps:
1. Select a query from the list.
2. Select Edit Query.
3. Make your changes, and then select Next.
4. Select Import.
Or, to create a new query, follow these steps:
1. Select Create New Query.
2. Type a name for the query.
3. Select a universe from the list, or search for a universe by name, and then select Next.
4. Select data objects from the universe tree, and drag or double-click to add them to the Selected Data
or Filters area.
5. Select Next.
6. If the universe contains prompts, select values for them.
7. Select Import.
5. Under Mapped To, type a name for the new model.
6. Specify whether the model is Planning Enabled, and indicate whether to use the first row of the data as
column headers.
7. Choose attribute types for the model dimensions, and then select Create Model.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

79

Related Information
Creating an Import Data Connection to a Universe (UNX) [page 267]
Planning Models and Analytics Models [page 18]
About Creating a Model from a File [page 59]

3.6.10 Importing Universe Data into an Existing Model


You can import data from an SAP BusinessObjects BI platform universe into an existing model.

Prerequisites
The SAP HANA Cloud Connector and SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent are installed and configured.
You use a supported version of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform. For information on
supported versions, see System Requirements and Technical Prerequisites [page 287].

Procedure
1. In the main menu, choose
2. Select

Modeler

Models .

Import Data From Universe .

3. Choose an existing universe connection, or create a new connection.


4. If you created a new connection, you'll next create a new query.
If you chose an existing connection, you can choose an existing query (which you can edit), or create a new
query.
To edit an existing query, follow these steps:
1. Select a query from the list.
2. Select Edit Query.
3. Make your changes, and then select Next.
Or, to create a new query, follow these steps:
1. Select Create New Query.
2. Type a name for the query.
3. Select a universe from the list, or search for a universe by name, and then select Next.
4. Select data objects from the universe tree, and drag or double-click to add them to the Selected Data
or Filters area.
5. Select Next.
6. If the universe contains prompts, select values for them.
5. Choose a model from the list, and then select Import.

80

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

6. Specify whether to use the first row of the data as column headers.
7. Map data for the model, and then select Finish Mapping.

Related Information
Creating an Import Data Connection to a Universe (UNX) [page 267]

3.6.11 Creating a Model from SAP ERP data


To create a model from SAP ERP data, you specify the source data and then specify how you want to import the
data into model dimensions.

Prerequisites
The SAP HANA Cloud Connector and SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent are installed and configured.
You use a supported version of SAP ERP Central Component. For information on supported versions, see
System Requirements and Technical Prerequisites [page 287].

Procedure
1. In the main menu, choose
2. Select

Modeler

Use a datasource

Models .

SAP ERP .

3. Choose an existing connection, or create a new connection.


4. Choose an existing query (which you can edit), or create a new query.
To edit an existing query, follow these steps:
1. Select a query from the list.
2. Select Edit Query.
3. Make your changes, and then select Next.
4. Review the Preview data, and then select Done.
5. Select Import.
Or, to create a new query, follow these steps:
1. Select Create New Query.
2. Type a name for the query.
3. Select an ERP object from the list, or search for an object by name, and then select Next.
4. Select columns from the Available Columns list to add to the Selected Columns list, and then select
Next.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

81

5. Review the Preview data, and then select Done.


5. Under Mapped To, type a name for the new model.
6. Indicate whether to use the first row of the data as column headers.
7. Specify whether the model is Planning Enabled.
8. Choose whether you want to fill empty ID cells with a default value.
9. Choose attribute types for the model dimensions, and then select Create Model.

Related Information
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP ERP System [page 268]
Planning Models and Analytics Models [page 18]
About Creating a Model from a File [page 59]

3.6.12 Importing SAP ERP Data into an Existing Model


You can import data from SAP ERP into an existing model.

Prerequisites
The SAP HANA Cloud Connector and SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent are installed and configured.
You use a supported version of SAP ERP Central Component. For information on supported versions, see
System Requirements and Technical Prerequisites [page 287].

Procedure
1. In the main menu, choose
2. Select

Modeler

Models .

Import Data From SAP ERP .

3. Choose an existing connection, or create a new connection.


4. Choose an existing query (which you can edit), or create a new query.
To edit an existing query, follow these steps:
1. Select a query from the list.
2. Select Edit Query.
3. Make your changes, and then select Next.
4. Review the Preview data, and then select Done.
Or, to create a new query, follow these steps:

82

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

1. Select Create New Query.


2. Type a name for the query.
3. Select an ERP object from the list, or search for an object by name, and then select Next.
4. Select columns from the Available Columns list to add to the Selected Columns list, and then select
Next.
5. Review the Preview data, and then select Done.
5. Choose a model from the list, and then select Import.
6. Specify whether to use the first row of the data as column headers.
7. Choose whether you want to fill empty ID cells with a default value.
8. Map data for the model, and then select Finish Mapping.

Related Information
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP ERP System [page 268]

3.6.13 Creating a Model from an SQL Database


To create a model from an SQL database, you specify the source model and then specify how you want to import
data into model dimensions.

Prerequisites
The SAP HANA Cloud Connector and SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent are installed and configured.
You have installed a JDBC driver. For details, see Creating an Import Data Connection to an SQL Database
[page 271].

Procedure
1. In the main menu, choose
2. Select

Modeler

Use a datasource

Models .

SQL Databases .

3. Choose a connection type.


4. Choose an existing connection, or create a new connection.
5. If you created a new connection, you'll next create a new query.
If you chose an existing connection, you can choose an existing query or create a new query.
To create a new query, follow these steps:
1. Select Create New Query.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

83

2. Type a name for the query.


3. Select an object from the list, or search for an object by name, and then select Next.
4. Select data objects from the data tree, and drag or double-click to add them to the Selected Data or
Filters area.
5. Select Next.
6. Check the previewed data, and then select Done.
6. Under Model Name, type a name for the new model.
7. Specify whether the model is Planning Enabled, and indicate whether to use the first row of the data as
column headers.
8. Choose attribute types for the model dimensions, and then select Create Model.

Related Information
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SQL Database [page 271]
Planning Models and Analytics Models [page 18]
About Creating a Model from a File [page 59]

3.6.14 Importing SQL Data into an Existing Model


You can import data from an SQL database into an existing model.

Prerequisites
The SAP HANA Cloud Connector and SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent are installed and configured.
You have installed a JDBC driver. For details, see Creating an Import Data Connection to an SQL Database
[page 271].

Procedure
1. In the main menu, choose
2. Select

Modeler

Models .

Import Data From SQL Databases .

3. Choose an existing connection, or create a new connection.


4. If you created a new connection, you'll next create a new query.
If you chose an existing connection, you can choose an existing query or create a new query.
To create a new query, follow these steps:
1. Select Create New Query.

84

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

2. Type a name for the query.


3. Select an object from the list, or search for an object by name, and then select Next.
4. Select data objects from the data tree, and drag or double-click to add them to the Selected Data or
Filters area.
5. Select Next.
6. Check the previewed data, and then select Done.
5. Choose a model from the list, and then select Import.
6. Specify whether to use the first row of the data as column headers.
7. Map data for the model, and then select Finish Mapping.

Related Information
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SQL Database [page 271]

3.7

Data Export

You can export models for reuse in other systems.


Options are available to export models either directly to SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (BCP) or to
simple text file format. You can set up a schedule so that text file exports recur automatically on a daily, weekly or
monthly basis.

Related Information
Exporting a model to a file [page 86]
Exporting data to BPC [page 87]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

85

3.7.1 Exporting a model to a file


You can export a model to a .csv file once or on a recurring schedule.

Context

Note
Both Planning and Analytics models can be exported to a flat .csv file. However, you cannot export an Analytics
model based on a HANA view.

Procedure

1. Select a model from the Models tab and choose

Export Model As File

Create New Schedule .

The Export Model As File dialog is displayed.


2. In the Export Details section, select a folder location to save the exported model to.
You can change your selected model from the Model Name drop-down list.
3. In the Select Data section, select the dimensions to export and choose
columns you want included.

(Columns) to select individual

You can rename dimensions and the dimension name is concatenated to the name of the column heading
after exporting. Models are exported as a flat file, with each selected dimension column listed one after
another. For example, a dimension named Product with columns named ID, ParentID, and Description is
exported as follows:
Table 14:
ProductID

ProductParentID

ProductDescription

PRD001

HPRD0001

Athletic Shirts

PRD002

HPRD0002

Tennis Shoes

4. In the Scheduling section, choose when you want to export your model.
Choose Export Now if you want to export only once now.
Choose Scheduling Recurrence to define a recurring export schedule.
When setting up a recurrence, create a name for your schedule and determine how frequently you want the
export to occur.
5. Choose Schedule to save your export schedule or Export if you chose to export now.

86

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Results

View all your export schedules by choosing


Export Model As File Manage Existing Schedules . From
the Scheduled Exports dialog, you can see the time and status of the last scheduled export, as well as delete
existing schedules you no longer need:

Successfully exported models are found in the Files area under the folder you specified.

3.7.2 Exporting data to BPC


You can update a model in the application and then export it to a target model in an SAP Business Planning and
Consolidation (BPC) system.
The application supports export to a BPC system for the following:
SAP Business Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft Platform (BPC for Microsoft)
SAP Business Planning and Consolidation 10.1, version for Microsoft Platform
SAP Business Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver (BPC for NW)
SAP Business Planning and Consolidation 10.1, version for SAP NetWeaver
This means, for example, that you could import a model from BPC, perform planning activities and updates on the
model, and then export the planning data back to the original model in BPC.
As for import, in order to export to BPC, the system must be set up correctly to connect to BPC, and you must
create connections using the Connections functionality. For more information, see Explore Connections.
The workflow for an export is also very similar to that of an import:
1. Specify source model information.
2. Provide target model information.
3. Map source data to the target model structure.

Specifying Source Model Information


You select the source model from a list of existing models.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

87

Providing Target Model Information


You first need to select the connection to the BPC system. This can be an existing connection or one that you
create on the fly during the export. For more information on creating connections, see the Connections section of
the user help.
You must specify the environment and then select the model to be imported. In the case of an export, this
information is pre-selected based on the environment and model used when the source model was imported.

Mapping Data
You map the source model data to the target model data in the mapping dialog. The mapping matrix is set out in
the following columns:
Source Dimension: This column lists the dimensions in the source model.
Filter: You can set a filter for each column to control how much data is exported. Filters for time and version
data are mandatory.
Target Dimension: In this column, you can select the target BPC dimensions to map to the source dimensions.
Matches are automatically suggested by the system, but you can change them.

Related Information
Connections [page 252]

3.8

Creating Points of Interest

Points of interest are sets of geographical data that can be added to a geo map and analyzed with reference to
business data from a model. You add them in the Modeler.
Points of interest can show the following:
Locations, such as store locations or event sites.
Lines, such as rivers, highways, or pipelines.
Shapes, such as sales regions or electoral districts.
You can use this data in a geo map by adding it as a point of interest layer in the map, or by creating a Map Filter to
filter locations within a certain distance of one of the points of interest.
Point of interest data can be added from an Esri shapefile or from an SAP HANA model with a geographical
dimension.

88

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Note
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud supports a finite number of spatial reference IDs. To avoid incorrectly displayed
data or error messages, you should know the SRID used in your shapefile. Publicly available tools can help you
recognize the shape identifier and thus determine the shapefile format.
You can view and maintain point of interest data in the Modeler page. Select the Point of Interest tab to view them.
From this page, you can add or search points of interest, enable or disable point of interest data for use in stories
using the Data Enabled switch, or select points of interest to delete.

Related Information
Analyzing Geographical Data [page 162]

3.8.1 Creating Point of Interest Data from an Esri Shapefile


Follow these steps to create point of interest data by uploading an Esri shapefile.

Procedure
1. From the main menu, choose Modeler and then select the Point of Interest tab.
2. Select the

(New)icon to add a new point of interest.

3. Select From File.


4. Select the files to upload.
You must select the SHP and DBF files from the shapefile. As well, both files must have the same name, for
example, sales_regions.shp and sales_regions.dbf.
5. In the Name of data field, type a name to identify the point of interest data.
6. Select an option from Spatial Reference ID corresponding to the encoding of the imported shapefile.
For more information on spatial reference IDs, see the SAP HANA Spatial Reference available on the SAP Help
Portal at help.sap.com.
The following options are available:
3857:WGS 84 / Pseudo-Marcator
4326:WGS 84
1000004326:WGS 84 (planar)
7. From the Tooltip list, select a field to provide the tooltip text for each point of interest.
8. Set the Enable on creation switch on or off.
The data can be used in geo charts when this setting is turned on. You can change the setting in the main
Point of Interest page.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

89

9. Select Create.

3.8.2 Creating Point of Interest Data from a Model


Follow these steps to create point of interest data from an SAP HANA analytic or planning model.

Prerequisites
You must have access to an SAP HANA analytic or planning model with a dimension that has been geographically
enriched.

Procedure
1. From the main menu, choose Modeler and then select the Point of Interest tab.
2. Select the

(New) icon to add a new point of interest.

3. Select From Model.


4. In the Name of data field, type a name to identify the point of interest data.
5. Select the source model in the From model list.
6. From the Location Dimension list, select the dimension that contains the point of interest data.
7. From the Tooltip list, select a field to provide the tooltip text for each point of interest.
8. Set the Enable on creation switch on or off.
The data can be used in geo charts when this setting is turned on. You can change the setting in the main
Point of Interest page.
9. Select Create.

90

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Models

Allocations

Allocation is the process of splitting values derived from source data into multiple values and storing the values in
target data.
You can use allocation calculations in planning and in data analysis to gain insights such as the following:
Simulated costs, revenue, and profitability.
Information for economic decisions, for example product mix, make or buy, or selling price decisions.
Motivation for managers and employees, such as encouraging simple manufacturing processes and the sale
of products with high profit margins.
Justification for costs, such as determining a fair price for a product.
Calculation of reimbursement amounts.
Measurement of income and assets, such as cost inventories.
In the application, you can create allocation processes for planning models and then perform structured
allocations. You can also perform ad hoc allocations using the spreading and distribute features.
Values are then distributed from the source dimension, which holds the value to be allocated, to one or multiple
target dimensions, which receive a portion of the distributed value. Depending on the allocation method you use,
you can refine an allocation calculation by adding overwrites, filters on target dimension members, and weightings
of various granularities.
Once you have applied the allocation and displayed the results in a table in a story, you can visualize the results
using a suitable chart type.

Tasks
Spreading a Value [page 95]
Distributing a Value [page 98]
Creating an Allocation Step [page 105]
Creating Allocation Rules [page 106]
Executing an Allocation Process [page 107]
Creating Pools for Structured Allocation [page 101]
Mapping Pools and Dimensions [page 102]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

91

4.1

Allocation Models

An allocation model is a planning-enabled model that meets certain criteria.


To create an allocation model, you must create a planning-enabled model with the following:
An Account dimension.
A Category dimension.
A Time dimension Allocation does not require a Time dimension, but because allocation models are based
on planning models, which require a Time dimension, you must include this in your model.
An Unassigned member for each dimension other than Account, with # as the member ID. This member is
created automatically when you create a new dimension.
Allocation models can also include a pool dimension, the members of which are pools. In allocations, a pool is a
group of accounts serving to express the cost of goods and services allocatable within a business or
manufacturing organization. Costs are grouped typically by department or service center. For example, the cost
of the maintenance department is accumulated in a cost pool and then allocated to those departments that use
its services. For more information on creating planning models and pool dimensions, see the related topics.

Related Information
Creating Pools for Structured Allocation [page 101]
Planning Models and Analytics Models [page 18]
Creating a Model from Scratch [page 51]
Creating Dimensions [page 53]

4.2

Allocations Role and Permissions

Roles in the application that include allocation permissions are the Modeler and Viewer roles.
The permissions required for allocations are as follows:
Create: To create allocation steps.
Read: The pre-condition to work with allocations, including to see the allocation rules in the user interface.
Update: To create, change, and delete allocation rules.
Delete: To delete an allocation step.
Execute: To execute an allocation step.
The permissions required for pool mappings are as follows:
Create: To create a pool dimension.
Read: The pre-condition to perform the pool mappings, including access to the Pool Mapping layout in Stories.
Update: To change mappings in the Pool Mapping layout.

92

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

Unlike for models, the permissions for allocations are bound to roles, not individual models. This means that the
permissions apply to all allocation steps. To create allocation steps and rules and perform pool mappings, you
must have the Modeler role. The relevant permissions in this role are as follows:
Table 15: Allocations Permissions for Modeler
Permission

Create

Read

Update

Delete

Execute

Allocation

Share

Assign

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Step
Pool Mapping

If you have the Viewer role, you can view and execute allocation steps, but you cannot create steps or perform
pool mappings.
Table 16: Allocations Permissions for Viewer
Permission

Create

Allocation Step

No

Pool Mapping

No

4.3

Read

No

Update

Share

Assign

No

N/A

N/A

No

N/A

N/A

Spreading and Distribution

Spreading and distribution are ways of allocating values from a single source cell in a table to one or more target
cells. These features can help you quickly book new values and adjust existing values in a plan.
In spreading operations, the value of the source cell is spread across leaf members that aggregate up to the
source cell. You can perform spreading automatically or manually.
Distribution is another type of allocation that changes values within a hierarchy by distributing amounts from a
source member to leaf members of its siblings.
These operations are available when the following conditions are met:
The table is based on a planning-enabled model.
The source cell is not calculated by a formula.
For automatic spreading, the source cell must be an aggregation of at least one dimension, not including
account or version. For manual spreading, it must also be a visible dimension that uses SUM aggregation.

Automatic Spreading
Automatic spreading takes place when you enter a value in a blank source cell in a view, and the value is
automatically distributed to leaf items for that cell.
For each dimension with leaf members, the source value is spread according to the aggregation type that was set
up for its account when the model was created. The aggregation type can be one of the following:

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

93

SUM: The source value is divided equally among the leaf members. For example, if you enter one million in a
cell with two leaf members, the leaf members receive 500, 000 each.
AVERAGE: Each leaf member receives the same value as the source cell. In this case, the leaf members
receive one million each.
LAST: The last leaf member receives the same value as the source cell. The second leaf member would
receive one million, and the first leaf member would remain unbooked.
NONE: Each leaf member receives the same value as the source cell. The leaf members receive one million
each.
If you spread an account member to its child accounts, the targets may include different account types such as
Income and Asset accounts as well as Expense and Liabilities and Equity accounts. In this case, accounts with
different aggregation behavior from the source account do not receive values from spreading.
For more information on the aggregation types and sign switching, see the Attributes of an Account Dimension
section.

Note
When you change a booked value, its leaf members are adjusted proportionally, based on the existing values.
This type of operation is not considered automatic spreading.

Manual Spreading
If you want to specify values for child members of a booked cell, you can spread the cells value manually. For the
selected source cell, you can set spreading weights for a perspective and level that you choose. Those values are
adjusted accordingly. For children at a lower level of the target dimension, or leaf members of a different
dimension in the view, automatic spreading is applied.

Distribution
While manual spreading allows you to allocate a value to its leaf members, you may also need to change values in
a hierarchy by distributing amounts from a source member to its siblings. Distributing values can help you adjust
your plan in response to new information such as a change in sales forecasts.
Unlike spreading, distribution subtracts value from the source cell to add it to the target cells. Leaf members that
aggregate up to the source cell are decreased proportionally, and leaf members of the target cells are increased
proportionally.
Distribution may also trigger an automatic spreading operation. That is, if you distribute a value to an unbooked
sibling member, the value will then be spread to the leaf members of that target cell.

94

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

Filtering dimension members for spreading


When you perform a spreading or distribution operation, you may want to control the number of facts created by
automatic spreading. In particular, if your model contains many dimensions or dimensions with many members,
you may not want to spread data to all leaf members for each dimension.
During spreading or distribution, the source cell determines the members that receive values for the dimensions
in the table other than the target dimension. For dimensions that are not added to the table, you can apply filters
from the Confirm Data Input dialog. The following options are available:
Use Point of View: The value is spread to the members that are selected in the filters applied to the view. For
example, if you have set a filter for Q4 of 2016 to plan sales revenue for that quarter, values are not spread to
members of the Time dimension that are outside that range.
Refine Filters: For dimensions that are not added to the table, you can choose members that will receive
values. By default, the current point of view is applied, but you can select dimensions from the list in the
Selected filters dialog to refine the members of each dimension that will receive values. For example, you
might choose the Time dimension, deselect Q4 2016, and select December 2016 only.
Refining the filters already applied by the point of view can change booked values for members that you filter out,
because you are spreading the aggregated value of all the dimensions members in the point of view to a smaller
subsection of those members. For example, if you refine the filter for time to only December 2016, all of the target
members values for Q4 2016 will be spread to that month only. With sum aggregation, any booked values for the
target members in October and November 2016 are reduced to zero.

Note
For a distribution operation that does not have any unbooked target members, the dialog does not appear
because no automatic spreading takes place.

Note
If too many items are affected by the spreading, a message appears when you select Continue. In this case, you
can refine the point of view, or filter out more dimension members in the Selected filters dialog.

Related Information
Attributes of an Account Dimension [page 30]
Example: Spreading a Value [page 97]

4.4

Spreading a Value

Prerequisites
To manually spread values, you must have access to a table based on a planning-enabled model.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

95

Procedure
1. In the table, select a source value that meets the following conditions:
The cell is booked.
The cell is not calculated by a formula.
The cell is an aggregation of at least one visible dimension, not including account or version.
2. Select

Spreading

to manually specify weights for members of a specific dimension and level.

The Spreading dialog appears.


3. From the Target Dimension list, select the dimension that you want to specify weights for.
Values will be spread automatically to other dimensions, depending on the filters that you apply.
The available dimensions include visible dimensions in the table that aggregate up to the source cell using
SUM aggregation. You cant spread along Account or Version dimensions.
4. Set the level where you want to specify weights using the
buttons.

(roll up),

(drill down), and

(set to leaf level)

When there are multiple target members with the same name, for example, Q1 in a Time dimension, the
members are grouped by their parents to distinguish them.
Unless you specify weights at the leaf level, values will be assigned to leaf members using automatic
spreading.
5. Set the spreading weights for target members.
If the target cells have values, those values are listed in the Weights column. You can overwrite the values by
typing in new weights, or by selecting

(Use values of the selected cells) and picking values from the view.

To spread to unbooked cells, switch Show unbooked members on.


Note that weights represent proportions, and not the actual value that will be assigned to members. The
Preview column shows the final value and percentages for members based on the weights you have entered.
6. Select Apply Spreading.
7. In the Confirm Data Input dialog, choose how to filter the dimension members that will receive values from
automatic spreading.
For more information on filtering the spreading operation, see Filtering values for spreading and distribution in
the Explore spreading and distribution section.
8. If you selected Refine Filters, select one of the dimensions not added to the table from the Dimension list, and
choose the members that will receive values during spreading. Repeat this step for other dimensions as
necessary, and then select OK.
The source value is spread to the target cells using the weights that you specified. For leaf members of the
target cells, and for other dimension members included in the spreading operation, values are spread
automatically.

96

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

4.5

Example: Spreading a Value

The following section is a simple example of how to use automatic and manual spreading.

Prerequisites
In a table, you have set a filter on the Category dimension so that only the version that you want to work with is
visible. Also, set filters so that only the Unassigned member is included in the point of view for dimensions that are
not added to the table.

Context
Your company is launching a new product, soccer shoes. You are composing a story to show the projected sales
of the shoes and want to spread the projected Units Sold figure across the two cost centers in the North America
region. You want to weight the distribution of values based on existing figures for the sales of running shoes. You
add a table to the story with the following data:
Table 17:
A

Measures

Category

Version

Cost Center

North America

United States

Canada

Europe >

>
5

Accounts

Products

Units Sold

Footwear

24,200

12,800

11,400

306,600

Tennis Shoes

8,600

4,800

3,800

63,500

Running Shoes

15,600

8,000

7,600

114,300

Soccer Shoes

128,800

Procedure
1. To enter the projected Units Sold figure, select the appropriate cell for the Soccer Shoes product (C9 in the
table) and enter a value. In this case, 29,000.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

97

The Confirm Data Input dialog appears.


2. Since you have already filtered out the dimension members that you are not using for this sales projection,
choose Use Point of View. Turn the Don't show this dialog again setting on and select Continue.
The cell in which you enter the value is highlighted in yellow. The value 29,000 is equally distributed between
United States and Canada cost centers. The cells for the cost centers (D9 and E9) are highlighted in yellow
and each contain a value of 14,500. The Units Sold total for Footwear, United States, and Canada are also
updated and the relevant cells are highlighted too (C6, D6, and E6).
3. You need to adjust the spreading of the Unit Sold value for soccer shoes based on the Unit Sold values for
running shoes. To do this, select the Units Sold value (29,000 in cell C9) and choose
Spreading

Allocate values

The Spreading dialog opens. The suggested spreading destination is the two cost centers, United States and
Canada.
4. You want to weight the spreading of the Units Sold value according to the Units Sold values for running shoes.
To do this, select the weight for the first United States member, then select
cells) and choose cells D8 and E8 in the table.

(Use values of the selected

The values in the cells are copied to the Weights column. The Preview column shows the adjusted Units Sold
values and the percentage they make up of the total 29,000 figure.
5. To apply the new spreading, choose Apply spreading.
The spreading is applied to the current point of view. The new Units Sold values, 14, 872 and 14, 128, are
displayed in the cells for United States and Canada (D9 and E9).

4.6

Distributing a Value

Prerequisites
To distribute values, you must have access to a table based on a planning-enabled model in a story.

Procedure
1. In the table, select a source value that meets the following conditions:
The cell is booked.
The cell is not calculated by a formula.
The cell has sibling members on the same hierarchy level of at least one visible dimension, not including
account or version.
2. Select

Distribute .

3. In the Distribute dialog, pick the dimension along which you want to redistribute from the Target Dimension
list.

98

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

4. To distribute to members that don't have a value yet, select Show unbooked members.
5. If necessary, change the level using the

(roll up),

(drill down), and

(set to leaf level) buttons.

You can distribute values to the siblings of the source member, or the children of those siblings.
When there are multiple target members with the same name, for example, Q1 in a Time dimension, the
members are grouped by their parents to distinguish them.
6. For each target member, type the amount that you want to distribute from the source member.
The dialog shows the percentage of the total amount to distribute for each member, and a preview of the
target member values after the distribution.
7. Select Distribute.
If you distributed values to unbooked cells, the Confirm Data Input dialog appears.
8. Choose how to filter the dimension members that will receive values automatically spread from the unbooked
cells.
For more information on filtering the operation, see Filtering values for spreading and distribution in the
Spreading and Distribution section.
9. If you selected Refine Filters, select one of the dimensions not added to the table from the Dimension list, and
choose the members that will receive values. Repeat this step for other dimensions as necessary, and then
select OK.
The target cells are increased by the amounts that you specified, and the value of the source cell is reduced.
Cells that aggregate up to the source cell or a booked target cell are adjusted proportionately.

4.7

Example: Distributing a Value to Unbooked Cells

The following section is an example of how to use the distribute feature with unbooked cells as the target.
In this example, using SUM aggregation for Units sold, you want to adjust your plan by distributing data from the
existing number of units sold for North America to Latin America, which is currently unbooked.
Table 18:
A

Account

Units sold

Product

Footwear >

Responsibility

Tennis shoes

Running shoes

Soccer shoes

Centre
4

All Companies >

350,900

81,100

145,500

124,300

HQ

North America

48,800

17,600

31,200

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

99

Latin America >

Mexico -

302,100

63,500

114,300

124,300

10

Germany 170,100

38,100

63,500

68,500

11

Italy 132,000

25,400

50,800

55,800

8
9

EMEA >

You select the value for Footwear in North America (cell B6), and select

Allocate values

Distribute .

In the Distribute dialog, you select ResponsibilityCenter as the Target Dimension.


On the same level as North America, you have the option of selecting HQ, Latin America, or EMEA as target
members. If you drill down one level to Country, you can distribute to HQ (since it has no children at the Country
level), Mexico, Germany, and Italy.
Type 6,000 for Latin America and select Distribute. Since you distributed to an unbooked cell, the Confirm Data
Input dialog appears. You can use the point of view that you established, or refine it your choices will only affect
dimensions that arent visible in the view. After the distribution, the table shows the following data, with the
changed values shown in bold:
Table 19:
A

Account

Units sold

Product

Footwear >

Responsibility

Tennis shoes

Running shoes

Soccer shoes

Centre
4

All Companies >

350,900

80,936

143,664

126,300

HQ

North America

42,800

15,436

27,364

Latin America >

6,000

2,000

2,000

2,000

Mexico 6,000

2,000

2,000

2,000

302,100

63,500

114,300

124,300

10

Germany 170,100

38,100

63,500

68,500

11

Italy 132,000

25,400

50,800

55,800

8
9

EMEA >

As a result, 6,000 units sold are subtracted from North America and added to Latin America. The value is evenly
spread to the unbooked cells for different types of footwear for Latin America and Mexico, and reduced
proportionally based on the existing values for Tennis shoes and Running shoes in North America.

100

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

The overall number of units sold stays the same; only the distribution is changed.
If you wanted to limit the spreading to only Tennis shoes and Running shoes, it is possible to do so by removing
the Product dimension from the table and refining the filter for that dimension in the Confirm Data Input dialog. If
you selected only Tennis Shoes and Running shoes, both members would receive 3,000 units, and Soccer shoes
would remain unbooked.

4.8

Structured Allocations

In structured allocations, you create allocation processes that use steps and rules to distribute values from source
dimensions to target dimensions, using drivers or direct assignments.
After you have created an allocation model and optionally added a pool dimension, use the following tasks to build
and execute an allocation process for it.

Tasks
Creating an Allocation Step [page 105]
Creating Allocation Rules [page 106]
Creating Pools for Structured Allocation [page 101]
Mapping Pools and Dimensions [page 102]
Executing an Allocation Process [page 107]

Related Information
Allocation Models [page 92]
Creating Dimensions [page 53]

4.9

Creating Pools for Structured Allocation

In an allocation model, you can optionally create pools in order to group costs. The pools are members of a pool
dimension, so they become the source dimensions that contain the values to be allocated to the target
dimensions.
Once you create a pool dimension, you create members of the dimension to represent the groups of costs or
values that you want to allocate, for example Services, Human Resources, or Logistics. You can create more than
one pool dimension per model, but you cannot share pool dimensions between models. Pools are specific to their
models.
In order to group the costs into a pool, you must map dimensions and dimension members related to the cost to
that particular pool. For example, if you created a pool for the cost of IT Services, you would map to it the

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

101

dimensions that represented IT staff wages, or the cost of replacement equipment. You specify the dimensions to
be mapped to the pools when you create the pool dimension. The Account dimension is always a mapped
dimension by default.
You map dimensions to pools when working with a table in the Stories area, using a special layout called Pool
Mapping. The pool mapping layout automatically includes all the dimensions you chose as mapped dimensions on
the row axes, along with the pool dimension, so that you can expand dimensions and map costs to pools at a
granularity that suits you. For example, suppose you selected the Cost Center and Product dimensions as
mapped dimensions when you created your pool dimension. This means that the Pool Mapping layout will have
the dimensions Account (by default), Cost Center, and Product on the row axes of the table. You could choose to
map the Cost of Good Sold account for all cost centers for all products to a single pool, or you could do more finegrained mapping, such as mapping the cost of goods sold for a single product for a single warehouse to a cost
pool.
Not all dimension members need to be mapped to a pool. You can assign the default pool dimension member
UNASSIGNED to members you do not want to map to pools.
The Pool Mapping layout also allows you to create new pools on the fly.

Remember
Pools are optional in an allocations model. You can create allocation steps with source dimensions that are not
pool dimensions.

Related Information
Mapping Pools and Dimensions [page 102]

4.10 Mapping Pools and Dimensions


You perform pool mapping from a table in the Stories page, using a special layout called Pool Mapping.

Context
You have created a model with a pool dimension that has a number of members. When you created the pool
dimension, you selected mapped dimensions in addition to the default, the Account dimension. You now want to
map accounts and dimensions to the different pools.

102

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

Procedure
1. In Stories, open a page with a table based on the model for which you want to map pools.
2. In the Designer panel, choose the Layout tab.
3. In the Layout tab, select Pool Mapping.
4. If the model has more than one pool dimension, select the dimension for mapping in the Select Pool
Dimension dialog, and choose OK.
The layout changes to have Account first on the row axis, followed by the other mapped dimensions, and then
the pool dimension. Only the Category dimension is visible on the column axis.
5. If necessary, expand the hierarchies of the mapped accounts and dimension to locate the item that you want
to map to a pool. Then, double-click in the pool cell for that item.
A drop-down menu with pool names is displayed.
6. To select a pool from the menu, start typing the pool name and select the pool from the auto-suggested
matches. Alternatively, delete the current pool name to display all the pools in the menu and select from
there.
7. To create a new pool, double-click in the pool cell, type the name of the new pool, and press Enter.
A dialog asks you to confirm that you want to create a new pool with the name you entered.
8. Choose Create to create the new pool.
9. Repeat steps 5 and 6, and if necessary, 78, until you have completed the pool mapping, and then save your
changes.

4.11 Allocation Processes, Steps, and Rules


For each planning-enabled model, you can create multiple allocation processes in the Allocation window, and
define each process by adding allocation steps and rules.
Allocation processes can consist of a single step, or a sequence of steps. You execute the process in a table to
perform its allocation steps on the data for that table.
An allocation step as a whole determines how values from one source dimension, say a pool of costs, is
distributed among members of target dimensions. (It's possible to have multiple target dimensions.)
The allocations for a step are governed by allocation rules. An allocation rule specifies that values in source
dimension members are to be allocated to target dimension members using a driver. A driver is a variable, such as
the level of activity or volume, that causally affects costs over a given time span. That is, there is a cause-andeffect relationship between a change in the level of activity or volume and a change in the level of total costs. For
example, changes in the driver headcount affect salaries, or changes in square meters of floorspace affect rent.
You can also choose the Direct Assignment option, which assigns all of the source member's value to a single
target member.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

103

Working with allocation steps


You can create an allocation step as part of a process, or create the step on its own and add it to a process later.
To create an allocation step, you must specify a source dimension, which holds the values that you want to
distribute. Then you specify a target dimension to receive the distributed values. You can also specify an overwrite
dimension, which will allow you to create overrides for allocation rules. An override is a more specific allocation
rule that takes preference over a more general one. For example, you could create an allocation rule that the travel
costs for all cost centers is allocated to all products using the driver Revenue, except for the exception (the
override) that for the United States cost center, the travel costs are directly assigned to the single product,
Laptop.

Note
Allocation rules are executed in the order of the more specific first, not in the order in which you create them.
It is possible to use the same dimension as the source and target for an allocation step. In this case, values will be
reallocated from a source member to one or more members of the same dimension hierarchy. For example, you
can use reallocations to take costs that have already been assigned to a software support department, and
reassign them to all of the departments in your organization based on the number of support hours that they
used. This is known as the reciprocal method of cost allocation. Since some of the original value may be allocated
back to the source member, you can choose to perform multiple repetitions of the step to further reduce this
amount.
You can also specify a reference dimension for an allocation step. Reference dimensions enable you to use more
fine-grained weights for the allocation because only weights matching a fact to be allocated in all reference
dimensions will be used for its allocation. Consider the Time dimension, which by default is treated as a reference
dimension. Allocations will use reference values broken down by time. For example, assume all Salaries are
allocated to all Cost Centers using the driver Headcount, and that Time is maintained with month granularity. This
means the Salaries costs will be further broken down to the month level based on the Headcount specified per
month.
Finally, you may want to exclude some accounts from the allocation step. For example, you want to allocate values
for all financial accounts, but leave driver accounts unchanged. In this case, you can use the Filter by Accounts
feature to select only the financial accounts.

Adding rules to a step


Once you have created an allocation step, you can begin to add allocation rules to the new step. To create an
allocation rule, you select a member of the source dimension, choose a driver (or direct assignment), and choose
a member or members of the target dimension. If you have added an overwrite dimension, you can add an
override.
Existing allocation rules can be deleted, copied, and edited using the standard icons in the step window page.

104

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

Working with processes


As you create steps, you can visualize the entire allocation process in the Steps Overview pane, which can be
displayed or hidden by selecting
(Details). To rearrange the step order, select and drag steps on the tab bar of
the allocation process page. You can also load existing steps based on the same model into your process.
Creating a sequence of multiple steps allows you to perform complex allocations, for example, allocating costs
from pools to different projects and products, and then further allocating costs from those dimensions to different
geographical responsibility centers.
Once the allocation process is complete and saved, you can open a table to execute the process.

Related Information
Creating an Allocation Step [page 105]
Creating Allocation Rules [page 106]

4.12 Creating an Allocation Step


Create an allocation step to distribute values from a source dimension to one or more target dimensions.

Context
You have created a planning-enabled model and want to create allocation steps for a corresponding allocation
process.

Procedure
1. In the navigation menu, choose Allocation.
All the allocation processes for planning-enabled models are listed in the Allocation Processes window. Each
model can have multiple processes. The Allocation Steps tab also shows all of the steps that have been
created.
2. Open a new step.
To create a step in an allocation process, open the appropriate process and select the Create Step icon
(the plus sign), either on the tab bar or in the Steps Overview tab.
If you want to create a step without adding it to an allocation process yet, select the Allocation Steps tab
and choose Create New Step (the plus sign). In this case, you must specify the corresponding model in

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

105

the Create Step dialog. You can add the step to an allocation process when you are finished working with
it.
3. In the Create Step dialog, enter a name and optional description for the step. If necessary, specify the model
for the step.
4. In the Source section, select a Source Dimension from the list.
5. If you want to add an overwrite dimension, choose the Add icon (the plus sign), and then select a dimension
from the Overwrite Dimension list.
6. In the Target section, select a Target Dimension from the list.
7. If you want to add multiple target dimensions, choose the Add icon (the plus sign), and then select a
dimension from the additional Target Dimension list. Repeat this step until you have added the required
number of targets.
8. If you selected the same dimension as a source or overwrite and as a target, specify the number of Repetitions
for the step. This allows you to run the step multiple times in the allocation process, which can be useful when
allocating values across members of the same dimension.
For example, if you are allocating costs from support departments to all departments based on support
hours, some cost will be allocated back to the support departments due to their own use of support hours.
Repeating this allocation step multiple times will reduce the amount allocated back to support departments
until it is negligible. This process is known as the reciprocal method of cost allocation.
9. To add a reference dimension, select Show Options and choose a dimension from the Reference Dimension
list. Select the Add a new reference dimension icon (the plus sign) next to the list to add another reference
dimension.
10. If necessary, filter the accounts that the step applies to by selecting Show Options and choosing Set Filter.
Then, select the members of the account dimension that you want to include in the allocation step.
11. Choose Create.
If you created the step in an allocation process, the new step opens on its own tab in the window for the
allocation process. The tab is arranged in columns that display the source, overwrite, driver, and targets for
the rules.
If you created the step from the Allocation Steps page, you can open an allocation process to load the step
and then configure rules for it.

4.13 Creating Allocation Rules


You create allocation rules by specifying source dimension members, drivers, and target dimension members.

Context
You have created an allocation step and now want to create allocation rules for that step. In Allocation, you have
opened the allocation process for a model.

106

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

Procedure
1. In the allocation process window, choose the allocation step for which you want to create allocation rules in
the tab bar.
You can also select Load Steps to add existing steps based on the same model to the tab bar.
2. In the allocation step tab, choose the Create New Allocation Rule icon (the plus sign) in the top right corner of
the tab.
3. In the Create Allocation Rule dialog, select a Source member, a Driver, and one or more Target members.
If you select Direct Assignment as the driver, select only one target member. All of the source member's value
will be assigned to that target member.
Your selections are listed in the Selected Allocation Rules section.
4. If you want to create an override, and you selected an Overwrite Dimension for the step, expand Overwrite in
the Source column, and select a member for the overwrite dimension.
The rule will apply only to that member of the overwrite dimension.
For example, if your step assigns costs from account to a product dimension, you may have added cost
center as an overwrite dimension. In this case, you can create one rule with travel costs as the source
member, revenue as the driver, and all products as the target. A second rule could use travel costs as the
source member and the North American cost center as the overwrite member, and directly assign the costs
to the laptop member. In this case, the first rule would not affect travel costs for North America. Instead, they
would all be assigned to the laptop product.
5. Choose Create.
The new rule is now listed in the tab for the allocation step.
6. Select Save Allocation rules.

Results
The allocation step now includes your new rule. You can continue to add rules to the step, or select an existing rule
to copy, edit, or delete it.

4.14 Executing an Allocation Process


You execute allocation steps in a story page that contains a table.

Context
You have created an allocation process for a model and you now want to execute it.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

107

Procedure
1. In Stories, add a table based on the model for which you want to perform allocations.
2. Select

Execute Allocation .

3. In the Execute Allocation dialog, select the Allocation Process that you want to execute, and choose a version
from the Version list.
The selected process will be performed on this version. You can also type a version name to create a new
private version.

Note
In this release, executing an allocation process on a shared private version is not supported.
4. If you typed the name of a new private version in the Execute Allocation dialog, the Select Public Version dialog
appears. Choose the public version that your private version is based on.
5. In the Confirm Scope Of Allocation dialog, choose how to filter the members that are affected by the
allocation:
Use Point of View: The scope of the allocation step will be restricted using the filters that are currently
applied to the view.
Refine Filters: For dimensions that are not added to the table, you can choose members that will be
included in the allocation. By default, the current point of view is applied, but you can select dimensions
from the list in the Selected filters dialog to choose members to filter.
No Filters: The allocation is performed on all available members in the model.
You can choose Dont show this dialog again to apply the same choice each time you execute an allocation
process in the current report view.
The layout is refreshed with the results of the allocation.

108

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Allocations

Value Driver Trees (Beta Feature)

Value driver trees are a tool for budgeting, forecasting based on different scenarios, and making daily business
decisions.
By linking a variety of nodes together in a directed graph, value driver trees show how changes to specific factors
can affect KPIs.
For example, a simple value driver tree might show how changes in year over year (YOY) growth in sales across
different accounts will impact overall sales revenue now, and in future years.
Therefore, a value driver tree can help align decision makers in different organizations or at different levels,
focusing the business on a common overall goal.
In SAP BusinessObjects Cloud, value driver trees are made up of different types of nodes, which can bring in data
from a model and perform calculations on that data. You can build value driver trees in a section of the Modeler,
which also allows you to simultaneously view and update the model data in a table. When a value driver tree is
complete, you can add it to stories for analysis. For example, you might add a value driver tree and a table based
on the same model to a story page. To simulate different scenarios, you can choose the version that the value
driver tree displays, and recalculate its values after changing values in the table.

Tasks
Creating a Value Driver Tree [page 109]
Managing Value Driver Trees [page 114]

Related Information
Canvas [page 123]

5.1

Creating a Value Driver Tree

You create value driver trees in the Modeler by specifying a base model and time range, and then adding nodes to
bring in data from the model, perform calculations on it, and return calculation results to the model.

Prerequisites
Before you begin, you must have authorizations for working with value driver trees; for example, the Modeler role.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Value Driver Trees (Beta Feature)

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

109

Procedure

1. Select
2. Select

Modeler

Value Driver Tree (Beta) .

(Create Value Driver Tree).

3. In the Create Value Driver Tree dialog, type a unique name for the tree, and select the Underlying Model that
contains the data that you want to use.
Only planning models are available in the Underlying Model list.
4. Select Create.
The Time & Model tab for the new value driver tree is displayed. You can configure the time period for the
value driver tree in this panel. In the current release, the only available option for Default Calculation Period
and Default Presentation Period is Year.
5. Select a Default Calculation Start Date and a Default Calculation End Date.
These dates set the years for which node values will be calculated in the tree. The dates must fall within the
Start Date and End Date set up for the underlying model.
6. Select a Default Presentation Start Date and a Default Presentation End Date that fall within the default
calculation dates that you set.
These dates set the years for which node values will be displayed when you add a value driver tree to a story.
7. Select the Calculation tab.
Here, you can build the value driver tree by creating nodes and configuring their relationships to the model
and to other nodes.
The Designer panel allows you to configure a selected node in the Node Details view, or to view, search, and
sort all of the nodes in the List of Nodes view.
By default, the value driver tree is created with a single blank node. You can begin working with this node to
set up your value driver tree.
8. Set up a node by selecting it and typing a unique name in the Node Details panel.
To make the values easier to analyze, include the unit symbol for the node values in the name.
9. Select the Node Type in the Node Details panel, and configure the inputs and outputs.

Tip
Because the model data can be difficult to access from this page, using a separate browser window to
display a table based on the model can help you choose the correct accounts and dimension members.

110

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Value Driver Trees (Beta Feature)

Table 20: Setting up a node


Node Type

Description

Options

Data Source

A data source node provides data from

Source: Select the account that will

the model. Other nodes can use data

provide source values for the node.

source nodes as the basis for calcula


tions.

By default, all dimension members will


be included, but you can filter one or
more dimensions if you only want to in
clude certain members.

YOY (Year over year)

A YOY node calculates the yearly val

Base: The node that provides the base

ues for an account using a base value

value for the first year, which will grow

and a growth rate driver, and outputs

for subsequent years according to the

that data to an account in the model.

driver that you configure. In the current

For example, if you have an account


containing sales data for 2015 and an
account containing the YOY sales

release, the base is set to the YOY node


itself.
Driver Type: The type of YOY calcula

growth rate, you can use a YOY node to tion to apply. In this release, only
forecast sales for 2016 and subse
quent years.

Growth Rate is available.


Driver: The node that provides the
growth rate data for the calculation.
For example, if you created a YOY node
for Software License Sales, you could
use a Data Source node for Software
Licenses YOY Growth as the driver.
If you havent configured a node for the
driver yet, you can select New Node to
add the input node to the canvas, and
then configure it.
Output: The account where the results
of the YOY node calculation for each
year are stored. This account therefore
provides the base value for calculating
the subsequent year, too. For example,
the Software License Sales node would
use the Software License Sales ac
count as the output.
This account must be a leaf member,
and must use SUM aggregation for all
dimensions.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Value Driver Trees (Beta Feature)

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

111

Node Type

Description

Options

Union

A union node creates an aggregate of

Inputs: The nodes that will be aggre

two or more nodes.


For example, you might create a union
node called Overall Sales that uses

gated together. Select

to add an

other input.

Software Sales and Hardware Sales

Parent and ancestors of the union node

nodes as inputs.

cannot also be used as one of its in


puts.
If you havent configured an input node
yet, you can select New Node to add
the input node to the canvas, and then
configure it.

Simple Calculation

A simple calculation node allows you to Operator: Select an operator to set the
perform basic arithmetical calculations type of calculation as addition, sub
using two input nodes.

traction, multiplication, or division.

For example, you may need to calcu

Inputs: Set two inputs for the calcula

late values for the Average Contract

tion. For each input, select a node.

Value (ACV) per year by multiplying


the Total Contract Value (TCV) ac
count and the ACV/TCV Ratio account.
You can carry out this calculation using

For subtraction and division, set the in


puts in the same order that you want
them to appear in the formula.

a Simple Calculation node, and filter

Output: The leaf account where the re

the result for specific products or sales

sults of the calculation are stored.

regions.

10. If necessary, you can apply filters to the account data in the node. Choose the
Node Details panel.

icon next to Filter in the

The Selected Filters dialog allows you to select members for each dimension other than Account, Time, and
Version.
For example, if you are only interested in sales data for a certain region, you can filter the account data by
geography. If you want to view data for a specific product, you can filter the members of the product
dimension.
When you use a filtered node as an input for a union or calculation node, the intersection of the filtered
members are kept. That is, if a member is filtered out in all input nodes, it is completely excluded from the
node. Otherwise, the data for that member is included for all accounts in the node.
11. To show data for the node, select

(Reload Data).

Each node that is fully configured will show a value for each year in the value driver trees time range that has
booked data. A dash character (-) represents unbooked data.
12. To highlight important nodes or help identify different types of nodes, you can set a unique header color for
each node. Select the node and choose Formatting on the Designer panel. Select a color from the Node color
list to apply it to the node header.

112

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Value Driver Trees (Beta Feature)

You can quickly format another node with the same color by selecting the colored node, selecting
style painting), and then selecting another node that you want to color.
13. To add a new node, select

(Node

(Add Node).

14. Repeat steps 8-13 to set up subsequent nodes and build your value driver tree.
As you build your tree, you can navigate by clicking and dragging the page and using the mouse wheel to
zoom. A map of the value driver tree is displayed in the lower left corner by default, and you can drag the
selected area in the map to change the view of the value driver tree. You can also drag the border of the map
to reposition it on the screen.
15. To delete a node, select the node and select

(Delete).

16. You can also specify the version of the data that is displayed by selecting the version name in the top left
corner of the canvas. The default version is Actual.
If you want to add or edit values in the model, select Explore to show the model data in a table. See Exploring
Model Data for a Value Driver Tree [page 113] for more details.
17. Select

(Save).

Results
You can add the value driver tree to a story to analyze node values for different versions in the model.

Note
In future releases, the Consumption tab will allow you to customize the display of the value driver tree to make
it easier to present in stories. In the current release, these features are not available the tree is displayed as
you configure it in the Calculation tab.

Related Information
Canvas [page 123]

5.2

Exploring Model Data for a Value Driver Tree

When building a value driver tree, you can use the Explore view to work with the model data in a table view.
If you want to add or edit node values, select Explore in the Calculation or Consumption tab. This view splits the
screen between the value driver tree nodes and a table with the model data.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Value Driver Trees (Beta Feature)

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

113

If no node is selected, the table shows the models accounts in each year included in either the default calculation
period or the default presentation period. The Category dimension is also filtered by the same version that is
displayed in the value driver tree.
When you select a node, the relevant account values are displayed. The Source or Output account of the node is
shown on the rows. For a union node, the accounts of each of the input nodes are added to the rows.
If the node is filtered by any other dimensions, the selected members for these dimensions are added to the rows
of the table.
As with a table in a story, you can update booked values or create new values by typing in the table cells. These
changes to the model data are reflected in the value driver tree when you select Reload Data.

5.3

Managing Value Driver Trees

You can view and manage a list of the value driver trees that you have access to by selecting

Modeler

Value Driver Trees (Beta) .


Select the name of a value driver tree to view and edit it.
The following options are also available:
Table 21:
Option

Description
Search for the name of a Value Driver Tree.

(Search)
Add a new value driver tree.
(Create Value Driver Tree)
Create a copy of the selected value driver tree, based on the
(Duplicate Value Driver Tree)

same model and containing the same nodes.


Delete the selected value driver trees.

(Delete Value Driver Tree(s))


Change the name or description of the selected value driver
(Edit Value Driver Tree)

tree.
To make changes to the nodes in the tree, select the name of
the tree in the main list.
Refresh the list of value driver trees.

(Reload List)

114

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Value Driver Trees (Beta Feature)

Stories

A story is a presentation-style document that uses charts, visualizations, text, images, and pictograms to describe
data. Once you create or open a story, you can add and edit pages, sections, and elements as you like.
The tasks you can perform on stories include the following:
Task

More Information

Explore your data.

Explore Your Data [page 119]

Add a chart, text, image, or pictogram.

Canvas [page 123]

Apply a story or page filter.

Applying a Story or Page Filter [page 202]

Format a story.

Formatting a Page [page 207]

Sort measures and dimensions in a chart.

Sorting Measures and Dimensions [page 145]

Filter or exclude data points in a chart.

Chart Filters [page 147]

Drill through hierarchical data in a chart.

Drilling through Hierarchical Data [page 148]

Add a story to a discussion.

Collaboration for Stories [page 216]

Export a story to PDF.

Exporting to PDF [page 215]

Tasks
Story Management [page 116]
Explore Your Data [page 119]
Canvas [page 123]
Tables [page 175]

Related Information
Story Pages [page 198]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

115

6.1

Story Management

You can manage stories in the first page of the Stories area. Here you can open, create, edit, and share stories.

Tasks
Create a New Story [page 116]
Edit a Story [page 117]
Copy a Story [page 118]
Share a Story [page 118]

Related Information
Stories [page 115]

6.1.1 Create a New Story


You can create a new story in a series of short steps in the Create New Story window.

Context
The window also lists your other stories. You can indicate which are your favorites by selecting the relevant Add to
Favorites icon (the star).

Procedure
1. On the Stories page, select

(New).

The Create New Story window appears.


2. Specify the story's path you can select public, private, or teams.

Note
A public story is visible to all users. A private story is visible to its creator and the users they have chosen to
share it with. You can also make the story visible to all members of a team.

116

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

3. Provide a unique name for your story.

Note
Valid characters are alphanumeric characters and underscores. Spaces can be included but not at the start
or end of a name.
4. Provide an optional description.
5. Select Create.
Your story has been created. You can now start working on your story by importing data and adding pages.
6. Import data to use in your story. You can bring in data from a CSV or Excel file.

Note
You can add data at a later stage from the Data View tab.
7. Add one or more pages to your story.
A story page can be a blank canvas or a grid. Add a blank canvas to lay out tables and charts, or add a grid to
work with numbers and formulas on a sheet. Suggested data and data sets will display in the left panel when
adding a new canvas to a page. Select any of the suggestions to quickly create and view the most relevant
visualizations for your data.

Next Steps

Note
You can also create a story by dragging a CSV or Excel file to the Home screen, or by selecting Add New Data
from the Data View menu and then selecting Import File. When you create a story in this way, the story includes
an embedded model that isn't visible on the Modeler page.

6.1.2 Edit a Story

Context
You can change the name or description of a story in the Edit Story dialog.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

117

Procedure
1. Do one of the following:
In the story management window, select the checkbox for the story and access the editing window.
From within a story, choose Edit in the Preferences menu.
2. Enter the changes to the name or description or both.
3. Confirm your changes.

6.1.3 Copy a Story

Context
You can use the Copy to Story command to copy an entire story (all of its contents) to a new story.

Procedure
1. In the story management window, select the checkbox for the story you want to copy and choose the Copy
selected stories icon.
2. In the Copy to Story dialog, specify whether the new story is Public or Private.
3. Enter a unique name for the story.

Note
Valid characters are alphanumeric characters and underscores. Spaces can be included but not at the start
or end of a name.
4. Enter an optional description.
5. Save your settings.

6.1.4 Share a Story

Context
Access the Change Sharing Settings dialog to specify which users can share your story.

118

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Procedure
1. Do one of the following:
In the story management window, select the checkbox for the story that you want to share and choose
the Share selected stories icon.
From within a story, choose the Share option in the top navigation panel.
2. In the dialog, select or deselect options to indicate that you want to share with all users, or access the list of
users to select or deselect specific individuals.
3. Once you have made your selections, save your settings.

6.2

Explore Your Data

You can start creating a story for your data by experimenting with filters and charts in the Explorer.
In the Explorer, you see a faceted view of your data, which you can manipulate to generate charts for your story
pages. When you select measures and dimensions in the upper pane, the visualization in the lower pane updates
in real time.
You can filter dimensions by selecting individual members, and the visualization changes immediately to show you
the filtered result.
In addition to this Data Exploration mode, you can also use the Data Manipulation mode, which lets you perform
simple data preparation, such as specifying which column is a measure and which is a dimension.

Note
The Data Manipulation mode is available only when you acquire data by dragging an Excel file onto the Home
screen, or by selecting Add New Data from the Data View menu, and then selecting Import File.

6.2.1 Accessing the Explorer


You can access the Explorer to begin creating a story for your data.

Procedure
1. From the Home screen of SAP BusinessObjects Cloud, select Explore Your Data.

Note
If you've pinned any objects, for example a chart, to the Home screen, the Explore Your Data shortcut
doesn't appear. Access the Explorer using one of the alternative methods described in step 2.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

119

2. Select Use existing data to add data from an existing model, or Import a file to import data from a source file,
or Connect to Google Drive to import data from a file stored on your Google Drive.
A new story is created, with your data shown in the Explorer.
Alternative methods for accessing the Explorer:
From the main menu, select Stories, and then either open an existing story or create a new one. At any
time when you're working on a story, you can select Data View to open the Explorer, and select Pages to
return to your story pages.
Drag an Excel file to the Home screen, and choose the I'm Feeling Lucky option. Your data is displayed in
the Explorer in a new story.
Drag an Excel file to the Home screen, and choose the Prepare Dataset option. Your data is displayed in
the Explorer in Data Manipulation mode (
Exploration mode (

). After you prepare your data, you can switch to Data

).

The Explorer displays your data in a faceted view, with a visualization area below it. The initial Explorer view
contains the dimensions that are selected in the Show/Hide Data list, plus any other dimensions that are
included in visualizations in the story. If you're creating a new story, only Measures are shown initially. Add
dimensions to the Explorer view by selecting

(Add Dimensions) or

(Show or Hide Dimensions).

3. Select measures and dimensions in the facet panel to add them to the visualization, or select individual
members to filter a dimension.
To help you find dimension members, you can search for them. Hover over the dimension name in the facet
panel, and then select
(Search) to display the search bar. Note: searching in the facet panel is not
supported for date-type dimensions.
You can also display additional information about the members in the facet panel. Hover over the dimension
name in the facet panel, select the

(Access Other Interactions) icon, and then select Show Measure.

For analytic view datasets, you can select Occurrences to display the number of times that member
occurs in the dimension. Or you can select a measure from the list, to display the sum of that measure for
each dimension member.
For planning models, select Accounts to display the sum of a selected measure (account) for each
dimension member.
If you display the occurrences or sums, you can also sort the dimension by that information. Hover over the
dimension name in the facet panel, select the
Highest to Lowest or Sort Lowest to Highest.

(Access Other Interactions) icon, and then select Sort

Note
Only flat dimensions can be sorted. Sorting dimension values for hierarchical dimensions (for example,
dimensions belonging to planning models, or a hierarchical dimension defined in an analytic view dataset)
is not supported.
You can choose whether selecting members includes them in your visualization or excludes them. Selected
members are included in your visualization by default, but to exclude them, hover over the dimension name in
the facet panel, select the

120

(Access Other Interactions) icon, and then select Exclude.

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

4. If the suggested visualization type isn't suitable, you can change it to any of the types supported for your data.
When you're happy with your visualization, you can copy it to a page in your story.
If you want to clear your visualization settings and start again, select the
icon in the visualization area, and
select Clear Chart. All measures, dimensions, and members are deselected, the sort order is reset to Sort
Ascending, and filter selection mode is reset to Include. However, all hidden dimensions remain hidden.
5. Switch to Data Manipulation mode (

) if you want to perform any data preparation.

When you make changes in the Data Manipulation mode, previous selections made in the Data Exploration
mode (

) are cleared.

The Data Manipulation mode is available only for datasets acquired by dragging a data file onto the Home
screen (using the I'm Feeling Lucky or Prepare Dataset workflows), or when choosing Import File in the
Add Data dialog.

6.2.2 Guided Machine Discoveries


A guided Machine Discovery is three result generated by mapping your data to a statistical model to uncover new
or unknown relationships between columns within a dataset.
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud uses different statistical techniques depending on the form of Machine Discovery you
choose to run. You can for example choose to run a discovery against a measure or dimension within a dataset to
determine the influencers on the focus of the discovery, how they relate to one another, and key members or
value ranges. The guided analysis will also alert you if no significant or insightful relationships are present in your
data.
Discoveries are driven by users working on Stories. You can exclude particular dimensions or measures from the
analysis, focus on particular dimension members, and display relationships from a list of influencers. The results
can be pasted to new or existing pages and you can take action by sharing the insights within your organization.

6.2.2.1

Running a Machine Discovery

You can run a discovery to gain insights on how underlying variables influence a given dimension or measure
within a dataset in a story.

Prerequisites
The predictive analyst role and license are required to run discoveries.

Context
Launch the machine discovery after you create or open a story containing a dataset you want to explore.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

121

Procedure
1. Open or create the new story and add the dataset on which you wish to run the discovery.
2. Select the

(New Machine Discovery) tab in the Data view.

All the available measures and dimensions columns are displayed in the data view.
You can exclude a column (measure or dimension) from being considered in the discovery. Highlight the
column entry you want to exclude from the dataset and deselect its corresponding box. All columns not
included in the discovery analysis are displayed as strike-through text.
3. Select one dimension or measure on which to run the discovery.
The discovery is made from the data at the time it was initiated and is not automatically re-run as your data
changes.
If you selected a measure, select the RUN button in the panel on the right.
If you selected a dimension, the Classification Groups dialog is displayed with all the members of the
dimension listed under the Others Group column. Drag all the members you want to serve as the focus of
the discovery to the Target Group column and select OK to continue. Select the RUN button in the panel
on the right.
If the discovery is considered to be of sufficient quality, a list of key influences (ranked from highest to lowest)
is displayed. If the discovery's insight quality is considered to be poor or low, a warning message is displayed.
You can choose to return to the data view to select another dimension or measure on which to run a
discovery, or you can choose to continue to display the results for the current discovery.
4. From the displayed list of influencers select one or two entries to display visualizations containing regression
or classification analysis results.
If you select only one influencer, a visualization is updated and interesting points on the relationship between
the selected influence and analyzed measure or dimension are displayed. If two influencers are selected, the
first selected influencer is presented in the top visualizations, while the bottom two relate to the combined
selections.

Results
Once you have finished analyzing the results for your discovery you can copy and paste any of the discovery's
visualizations to the current or a new canvas page.

Note
Any visualization copied and pasted from a discovery to a new or existing page will be in read-only mode. It
cannot be edited or modified.

122

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.3

Canvas

The Canvas is a flexible space where you can explore and present your data. From the Add menu, you can add
tiles to canvas pages in your story. Tiles are charts, visualizations, text, images, pictograms, and so on. They can
be resized and moved around the canvas to help you better tell your story.
Table 22:
Tile

Use

Charts

You can create a new chart from


a model, choose a chart saved to
the story, or add a chart from the
gallery to the story.

Pinned

You can add a pinned visualiza

Visualizations

tion to the story.

Table

You can add an organized pre


sentation of data from a selected
model displayed in a tabular view.

Geo Map

You can add a geographical map


overlaid with your business data
to the story to perform geospatial
analysis.

Images

You can select an image that is


available or upload a new image
from your computer.
To add .jpg, .jpeg, .png,
or .gif files, choose
Local Image

Pictograms

Add

You can add shapes, icons, and


symbols from the theme catego
ries or upload a new pictogram
from your computer.

Text

You can add a block of text to


your story to write your com
ments or other relevant informa
tion.

RSS Reader

You can add an RSS Reader to


your story to present relevant ar
ticles from an RSS feed alongside
your data and visualizations.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

123

Tile

Use

Input Control

You can add filter values with se


lection check boxes or radio but
tons to your story.

Value Driver Tree You can add a value driver tree to


(Beta)

a story to help perform forecast


ing, budgeting, and decisionmaking tasks.

Tasks
Analyzing Geographical Data [page 162]
Uploading Custom Pictograms [page 168]
Adding Dynamic Text to a Story [page 168]
Adding an RSS Reader [page 169]
Creating Linked Dimensions [page 199]
Editing Linked Dimensions [page 200]
Story and Page Filters [page 201]
Choosing the Right Chart Type [page 125]
Examining a Chart or Data [page 206]
Designer Panel [page 206]
Formatting a Page [page 207]
Formatting a Tile [page 207]
Creating and Formatting a Group [page 210]
Linking to another Page, Story, or External URL [page 171]
Scaling Charts [page 172]
Creating a Linked Analysis [page 173]
Previewing a Story [page 215]
Exporting to PDF [page 215]

Related Information
Charts [page 125]
Tables [page 175]
Value Driver Trees [page 174]

124

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.3.1 Charts
You use the Builder tab in the Designer panel to create charts in a canvas page.
The data in your chart is based on the model you selected when creating the chart. From the Builder tab, you can
select a chart type and then pick the measures and dimensions to show in your chart. Once you have defined the
structure of your chart, you can add reference lines or filters to it.
You can also customize a color palette: on the Builder tab, select the down-arrow in the color-picker, and then
select Add Palette. In the Create New Palette dialog, choose a color selector and then define a custom color for it.
You can maintain a maximum of nine custom-color selectors. You can reuse custom-color palettes across
multiple charts in a story.

Tasks
Choosing the Right Chart Type [page 125]
Chart Filters [page 147]

6.3.1.1

Choosing the Right Chart Type

Find the best chart type for your analysis.

Prerequisite: Add a blank chart to the Canvas


To add a chart to your story, do the following:
1. When starting your story, select Add Canvas.
2. When prompted to Add an object to the canvas, select Chart.
3. Select an existing Datasource and then click OK.
You can now select a chart type from the Chart Structure section of the Builder tab.

Choosing the correct chart type


Some chart types require a specific number of measures or dimensions and will either not work or not provide
good results if you use the wrong parameters. For example, a table chart requires at least one measure in the
values area, and a bubble chart requires at least one measure in each of three parameters.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

125

Table 23: Charts for different types of analysis


Type of analysis
Comparison
Compares differences between values or
shows a simple comparison of categori
cal divisions of measures.
View the parameters for Comparison
charts [page 127]

Suggested chart types

Bar/Column

Combination Column
& Line

Usage example

Use a Bar/Column chart to compare the differen


ces in sales revenue between countries.

Use a Stacked Bar/Column chart to represent at

Combination Stacked

least three series of data, each series represented

Column & Line

by a color stacked in a single bar (for example,

Stacked Bar/Column

sales for 2013, 2014, and 2015).

Waterfall

Use a Waterfall chart to understand how an initial


value is affected by a series of intermediate in
crease or decrease values.
The initial and the final values are represented by
columns attached to the baseline, while the inter
mediate values are denoted by floating columns.
The columns are color-coded to show Increase,
Decrease, and Total values.

Trend
Shows a trend in the data values (espe
cially for dimensions that are time-

Area

Line

sales for a limited number of regions (Canada,

Trend Time Series

Germany, China, Italy).

based, such as Year) or the progression

Use an Area chart to show percentage of total

Use a Line chart to view sales revenue trends of a


product throughout a range of years.

of your data and possible patterns.


View the parameters for Trend charts
[page 127]
Distribution
Shows distributions between several
groups or sets of data.
View the parameters for Distribution

Box Plot

Heat Map

Radar

amounts according to geographical region, and


then, for each country, plot a box that shows the
range and distribution of the regional sales

Tree Map

charts [page 127]

Use a Box Plot chart to summarize annual sales

amounts within that country.

Use a Radar chart to view sales for each depart


ment throughout a calendar year.

Correlation
Shows the relationship between values
or compares multiple measure values.

Bubble

Use a Bubble chart to show the number of prod

Cluster Bubble

ucts sold in a certain region; the larger the bubble,

Scatterplot

the greater the number of products sold in that re

For example, you can view the correla


tion of two measures and understand

gion.

Use a Scatterplot chart to consider a larger scope


of data for the purpose of determining trends.

the impact of the first measure on the


second measure.
View the parameters for Correlation
charts [page 129]

126

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Type of analysis

Suggested chart types

KPI
Shows previously defined KPIs in a

Bullet

Numeric Point

Donut Chart

Usage example
Use a Bullet chart to view your organization's reve
nue performance for the quarter.

chart.
View the parameters for KPI charts
[page 130]
More options, including percentage
View the parameters for More charts
[page 131]

Pie and Donut charts show the percentage of

Marimekko

parts in a whole or values as ratios to a whole.

Pie Chart

The legend shows the percentage and the total

Table

values.

Marimekko charts use varying heights and varying


column widths to depict data.

The Tablechart type can use only a small number


of data points. If you need to use a large number
of data points, create a table on a story page in
stead. For more information on tables, see Tables
[page 175].

Comparison chart parameters


The following table shows the minimum (1+) or maximum (1) required measures and dimensions for the specific
chart types, as well as which parameters are optional (0+) or not applicable (NA).
Table 24: Bar/Column or Waterfall charts
Measures or Dimen

Parameter

Bar/Column

Stacked Bar/Column

Waterfall

Measures

Measures

1+

1+

1+

Dimensions

Dimensions

0+

1+

0+

Color

0+

1+

0+

Trellis

0+

0+

NA

sions

Table 25: Combination chart parameters

If you do not include the second axis, you will not see the Line information.
Measures or Dimensions

Parameter

Combination Column & Line

Combination Stacked Col


umn & Line

Measures

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Column Y-Axis

1+

1+

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

127

Measures or Dimensions

Parameter

Combination Column & Line

Combination Stacked Col


umn & Line

Dimensions

Line Y-Axis

0+

0+

Dimensions

1+

1+

Color

0+

0+

Trellis

0+

0+

Return to the Charts overview [page 125].

Trend chart parameters


The following table shows the minimum (1+) or maximum (1) required measures and dimensions for the specific
chart types, as well as which parameters are optional (0+) or not applicable (NA).
Table 26: Area or Line charts
Measures or Dimensions

Parameter

Area

Line

Measures

Measures

1+

NA

Left Y-Axis

NA

1+

Right Y-Axis

NA

0+

Dimensions

0+

1+

Color

0+

0+

Trellis

0+

0+

Dimensions

Table 27: Trend Time Series


Measures or Dimensions

Parameter

Trend Time Series

Measures

Measures

1+

Dimensions

Time

1+

Color

0+

Return to the Charts overview [page 125].

128

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Distribution chart parameters


The following table shows the minimum (1+) or maximum (1) required measures and dimensions for the specific
chart types, as well as which parameters are optional (0+) or not applicable (NA).
Table 28: Box Plot or Radar charts
Measures or Dimensions

Parameter

Box Plot

Radar

Measures

Measures

1+

1+

Dimensions

Aggregation Level

1+

NA

Dimensions

0+

1+

Color

0+

1+

Trellis

0+

0+

Table 29: Heat Map charts


Measures or Dimensions

Parameter

Heat Map

Measures

Color

1+

Dimensions

X-Axis

1+

Y-Axis

0+

Trellis

0+

Measures or Dimensions

Parameter

Tree Map

Measures

Size

Dimensions

Label

Trellis

0+

Table 30: Tree Map charts

Return to the Charts overview [page 125].

Correlation chart parameters


The following table shows the minimum (1+) or maximum (1) required measures and dimensions for the specific
chart types, as well as which parameters are optional (0+) or not applicable (NA).

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

129

Table 31: Bubble and Scatter charts


Measures or Dimensions

Parameter

Bubble

Scatterplot

Measures

X-Axis

Y-Axis

Size

NA

Dimensions

0+

1+

Color

0+

0+

Trellis

0+

0+

Dimensions

Table 32: Cluster Bubble charts


Measures or Dimensions

Parameter

Cluster Bubble

Measures

Measures

Dimensions

Dimensions

Color

Trellis

0+

Return to the Charts overview [page 125].

KPI chart parameters


The following table shows the minimum (1+) or maximum (1) required measures and dimensions for the specific
chart types, as well as which parameters are optional (0+) or not applicable (NA).
Table 33: KPI charts
Measures or Dimensions

Parameter

Bullet

Numeric Point

Measures

Measures

1+

1+

Dimensions

Dimensions

1+

NA

Color

0+

NA

Trellis

NA

0+

Return to the Charts overview [page 125].

130

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

More chart parameters


The following table shows the minimum (1+) or maximum (1) required measures and dimensions for the specific
chart types, as well as which parameters are optional (0+) or not applicable (NA).
Table 34: Donut or Pie charts
Measures or Dimensions

Parameter

Donut

Pie

Measures

Measures

Dimensions

Color

1+

1+

Trellis

0+

0+

Table 35: Marimekko charts


Measures or Dimensions

Parameter

Marimekko

Measures

Measures

1+

Dimensions

Dimensions

Color

0+

Trellis

0+

Measures or Dimensions

Parameter

Table

Measures

Measures

1+

Dimensions

Rows

0+

Columns

0+

Color

0+

Table 36: Table charts

Return to the Charts overview [page 125].

Related Information
Select Measures and Dimensions [page 132]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

131

6.3.1.2

Select Measures and Dimensions

After you select a chart type, select the measures and dimensions to display in each area of your chart. The
measures and dimensions that you select are based on the data in the model you selected when creating the
chart.
You can add multiple measures and multiple dimensions for your chart. When measures or dimensions are part of
a hierarchy, you can expand the dimension and select its children. You can also apply filters to your measures and
dimensions. The chart is updated as you make your choices in the Builder tab.

Measure Input Control


Use the measure input control to change the measure represented on a chart at view time; you won't need to
make changes to the chart or use the chart builder.
1. Select your chart type.
2. From the measure parameter, choose Select Measure, and then choose Click to Create a Measure Input
Control.
3. In the dialog, select the measures to add to the input control.
Choosing All Members will add all the members to the input control. Choosing a top-level node in any member
hierarchy will add all the members for that node and below to the input control.
4. (Optional) Provide a name for your input control.
5. When finished, select OK.
Your measure input control is added to the canvas. You can select any measure from the control, and your chart
will be updated automatically.

Note
If your chart type does not allow negative values and you choose a measure that has negative values, you will
see a warning instead of an updated chart.

Related Information
Choosing the Right Chart Type [page 125]

132

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.3.1.3

Displaying Dimension Information in a Chart

In a chart, show the Description, ID, or ID and Description of a dimension.

Context
When you change how the dimension information is displayed, the corresponding axis label, legend, or tooltip is
updated. The updated display will persist even if you change the chart type.
If you remove the dimension from the chart, the information display will revert to its default setting.

Procedure
1. Select a chart.
2. In the Designer panel, open the Builder tab.
3. Move your cursor to the desired dimension label and then click

(Display As).

4. Select one of the options:


Description
ID
ID and Description

Results
The labels in the chart and the tooltip information are updated.

6.3.1.4

Calculation Editor

The Calculation Editor allows you to create calculations for use in a chart.
Several calculation types are supported: calculated measures, restricted measures, differences, and
aggregations.
Calculations can use input controls. Input controls provide variable input for a calculation, allowing viewers to
influence the result of a calculation without modifying the underlying data or formula. For example, viewers can
choose to see the impact of a 1%, 2%, or 3% tax-rate increase. Input controls can be formatted after they are
added to the canvas.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

133

Tasks
Creating Calculated Measures [page 134]
Creating Restricted Measures [page 136]
Calculating the Difference [page 139]
Creating an Aggregation [page 141]
Editing a Calculation [page 143]
Formatting a Calculation [page 144]

6.3.1.4.1

Creating Calculated Measures

You can use the Calculation Editor to create calculated measures.

Prerequisites
A chart must be selected.

Context
Calculated measures allow you to perform mathematical and Boolean operations on your data. For example, you
can use a calculated measure to chart the effect a sales increase of 20% would have on profits.

Procedure
1. Open the Calculation Editor. There are two ways to access the editor:
In the Builder tab, choose

Select measure or Add another measure

Calculations

Click to Create a

New Calculation .
In the Builder tab beside Structure, select
Create a New Calculation.

(Add Data), and in the list under Calculations, select Click to

Note
The option to create a new calculation may not appear if calculations are not possible for the chart type or
model.
The Calculation Editor appears.
2. Enter a name for the calculation.

134

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

3. Enter a formula in the Edit Formula area.


You can add preset functions, conditions, and operators, by selecting options in the Formula Functions list.
Existing input controls appear in the Available Objects list, and can be added to a formula. The formula editor
supports auto-complete and the following shortcuts:
[ Returns all measures.
# Returns all calculations.
@ Returns all input controls.
4. (Optional) Create an input control.
a. Under INPUT CONTROLS, select Create New.
b. Enter a name for the input control.
c. Select Existing Dimension or Static List.
Table 37:
Option

Description

Existing Dimension

Select a model, select a dimension, and then select Click


to Add Values.
Select values from the list of available members. If you
select Exclude selected members, all members except
the ones selected will be applied to the restricted meas
ure. You can use

(Search) to find specific values.

When you expand the list beside the search icon, you can
choose to view the member Description, ID and
Description, or ID.
(Optional) In the Token Control section, select Allow
viewers to modify filters, then choose whether viewers
can make single selections or multiple selections in the in
put control.
Static List

Select Click to Add Values. The Select Values for Custom


LOV dialog appears.
Add values to the Custom Members area, select Update
Selected Members, and then select Set.

d. Select OK.
The input control you created appears under Available Objects.
e. Select the input control to add it to a formula.
5. Select Format to check if your formula is valid.
6. Select OK.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

135

Results
A measure is created based on the formula you entered. If the formula uses an input control, it will appear on the
canvas.
On the canvas, input controls are indicated by the
(Formula) icon. If you hover over the icon, all calculations
associated with the input control are displayed. By default, the input control is displayed in token mode where
input values can be selected from a drop-down list. The input control can be expanded into widget mode, where
radio buttons appear beside each value.

Related Information
Calculation Editor [page 133]
Creating Restricted Measures [page 136]
Select Measures and Dimensions [page 132]

6.3.1.4.2

Creating Restricted Measures

You can use the Calculation Editor to create restricted measures.

Prerequisites
A chart must be selected.

Note
Restricted measures cannot be created from constant values, or details calculations.

Context
Restricted measures allow you to use only selected values in a measure. Restricted measures can be useful for
comparing one value to a set of others in the same chart. For example, you can create a measure that contains all
expenses for the country of Australia, and compare expenses from Australia side by side with expenses for all
other countries.

136

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Procedure
1. Open the Calculation Editor. There are two ways to access the editor:
In the Builder tab, choose

Select measure or Add another measure

Calculations

Click to Create a

New Calculation .
In the Builder tab beside Structure, select
Create a New Calculation.

(Add Data), and in the list under Calculations, select Click to

Note
The option to create a new calculation may not appear if calculations are not possible for the chart type or
model.
The Calculation Editor appears.
2. Select Restricted Measure from the list.
3. Enter a name for the restricted measure.
4. (Optional) Select Constant Selection.
When Constant Selection is disabled, the restricted measure value is influenced by chart, page, and story
filters, as well as categorical axis values. This is the default setting.
When Constant Selection is enabled, the restricted measure value is determined by the values you specify in
the Calculation Editor and will remain constant. Enabling constant selection is useful for comparing a single
value with several different values. For example, you could create a restricted measure for sales in 2012, and
then compare sales in 2012 with sales for all other years in the same chart.

Note
Prompts are respected even when constant selection is enabled.
5. In the Measure section, select a measure from the list.
6. In the Dimension section, select one or more dimensions to apply the aggregation to.
Use

(Add) to add additional dimensions.

7. Beside each dimension, under Dimension Values or Input Controls, select Click to Select Values, and then
choose an option from the list:
Option

Description

Select by
Member

Select values from the list of available members. If you select Exclude selected members, all members
except the ones selected will be applied to the restricted measure. You can use

(Search) to find spe

cific values. When you expand the list beside the search icon, you can choose to view the member
Description, ID and Description, or ID.
The members you choose appear in the Selected Members list.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

137

Option

Description

Select by
Range

Enter a start value and end value for the range. Select Add a New Range to add additional ranges to the
restricted measure.

Note
This option appears only if dimension values are numerical or date based. If the dimension is date
based, you can also select quarter, month, or year from the slider that appears.

Create a New
Calculation
Input Control

Enter a name for the input control, and then select Click to Add Values.
Select values from the list of available members. If you select Exclude selected members, all members
except the ones selected will be applied to the restricted measure. You can use

(Search) to find spe

cific values. When you expand the list beside the search icon, you can choose to view the member
Description, ID and Description, or ID.
(Optional) In the Token Control section, select Allow viewers to modify filters, and then choose whether
viewers can make single selections or multiple selections in the input control.

8. Select OK.

Results
A measure is created that includes only the members you selected. Any input controls you created appear on the
canvas and are listed in the Calculation Editor under Input Controls. Input controls can also be used in calculated
measures.
On the canvas, input controls are indicated by the
(Formula) icon. If you hover over the icon, all calculations
associated with the input control are displayed. By default, the input control is displayed in token mode where
input values can be selected from a drop-down list. The input control can be expanded into widget mode, where
radio buttons appear beside each value.

Related Information
Calculation Editor [page 133]
Creating Calculated Measures [page 134]
Select Measures and Dimensions [page 132]

138

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.3.1.4.3

Calculating the Difference

You can determine the difference between measures in two time periods.

Prerequisites
A chart must be selected. The chart data source must include a time dimension.

Context
The Difference From aggregation shows the difference between a starting date and a target date that is calculated
from a specified number of time periods before or after the starting date. For example, you can compare the sales
on February 2015, with the sales 6 months previously.

Procedure
1. Open the Calculation Editor. There are two ways to access the editor:
In the Builder tab, choose

Select measure or Add another measure

Calculations

Click to Create a

New Calculation .
In the Builder tab beside Structure, select
Create a New Calculation.

(Add Data), and in the list under Calculations, select Click to

Note
The option to create a new calculation may not appear if calculations are not possible for the chart type or
model.
The Calculation Editor appears.
2. Select Difference From from the list.
3. Enter a name for the calculation.
4. In the Measure section, select a measure from the list.
5. In the Current Value or Input Control section, select Select Time Value, and then choose an option from the
list:
Option

Description

Select by
Member

Select values from the list of available members. If you select Exclude selected members, all members
except the ones selected will be applied to the restricted measure. You can use

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

(Search) to find spe

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

139

Option

Description
cific values. When you expand the list beside the search icon, you can choose to view the member
Description, ID and Description, or ID.
The members you choose appear in the Selected Members list.

Create a New
Calculation
Input Control

Enter a name for the input control, and then select Click to Add Values.
Select values from the list of available members. If you select Exclude selected members, all members
except the ones selected will be applied to the restricted measure. You can use

(Search) to find spe

cific values. When you expand the list beside the search icon, you can choose to view the member
Description, ID and Description, or ID.
(Optional) In the Token Control section, select Allow viewers to modify filters, then choose whether view
ers can make single selections or multiple selections in the input control.

This value is used as the starting date to calculate the difference from.
6. In the Difference From section, choose PREVIOUS or NEXT.
If PREVIOUS is selected, the difference between the starting date and a previous time period is calculated. If
NEXT is selected, the difference between the starting date and a future time period is calculated.
7. In the Nth Period section, enter a time period.
The time period must be a discrete value. This is the number of time periods before or after the starting date
that you want to compare the value to. The period is the smallest time granularity of the current date,
included in your data source. For example, the period may be a year, a quarter, or a month.

Note
Month is the smallest time period supported.
8. Optional: Select Calculate as Percentage.
a. In the Divide By section, choose Base Value or Nth Period Value.
The Base Value is the value of the measure at the starting date. The Nth Period Value is the value of the
measure at your target date.

Related Information
Calculation Editor [page 133]
Select Measures and Dimensions [page 132]

140

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.3.1.4.4

Creating an Aggregation

You can use the Calculation Editor to create aggregations.

Prerequisites
A chart must be selected. The data source must contain key figures.

Note
Only local SAP HANA models support aggregations. Remote connections are not supported.
An existing aggregation cannot be used to create another aggregation.

Context
Calculations can also be created from aggregations such as sum, count, or average. When you create an
aggregation you can also choose when, and what conditions are required for the aggregation to be applied. For
example, you can create an aggregation to count the number of sales per store, when the store carries a certain
product.

Procedure
1. Open the Calculation Editor. There are two ways to access the editor:
In the Builder tab, choose

Select measure or Add another measure

Calculations

Click to Create a

New Calculation .
In the Builder tab beside Structure, select
Create a New Calculation.

(Add Data), and in the list under Calculations, select Click to

Note
The option to create a new calculation may not appear if calculations are not possible for the chart type or
model.
The Calculation Editor appears.
2. Select Aggregation from the list.
3. Enter a name for the aggregation.
4. Select an aggregation type.
The following aggregation types are supported:

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

141

Sum: The sum of all selected dimensions.


Count: The number of selected dimensions. Dimensions with empty values are not counted.
Count Dimensions: The number of selected dimensions. Dimensions with empty values are counted.
Average: The average of the selected dimension values.
Min: The smallest value included in the selected dimensions.
Max: The largest value included in the selected dimensions.
5. In the Measure section, select a measure from the list.

Note
Measures do not have to be selected for Count Dimensions.
6. In the Aggregation Dimension section, select one or more dimensions to apply the aggregation to.
Use

(Add) to add additional dimensions.

7. (Optional) Select Use conditional aggregation.


Conditional aggregation allows you to specify when the aggregation is applied and what conditions are
required for the aggregation to be applied.

Note
Conditional aggregation is not applicable to Count Dimensions.
a. In the Aggregate when section, choose Dimensions have Measure values for Conditions, or Dimensions do
not have Measure values for Conditions.
b. In the Conditions section, under Dimension, select one or more dimensions to apply conditions to.
Use

(Add) to add additional dimensions.

c. Beside each dimension, under Dimension Values or Input Controls, select Click to Select Values, and then
choose an option from the list:
Table 38:
Option

Description

Select by Member

Select values from the list of available members. If you


select Exclude selected members, all members except
the ones selected will be applied to the restricted meas
ure. You can use

(Search) to find specific values.

When you expand the list beside the search icon, you can
choose to view the member Description, ID and
Description, or ID.
The members you choose appear in the Selected
Members list.

142

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Option

Description

Create a New Calculation Input Control

Enter a name for the input control, and then select Click
to Add Values.
Select values from the list of available members. If you
select Exclude selected members, all members except
the ones selected will be used in the condition for the ag
gregation. You can use

(Search) to find specific val

ues. When you expand the list beside the search icon, you
can choose to view the member Description, ID and
Description, or ID.
(Optional) In the Token Control section, select Allow
viewers to modify filters, and then choose whether view
ers can make single selections or multiple selections in
the input control.

8. Select OK.

Related Information
Calculation Editor [page 133]
Select Measures and Dimensions [page 132]

6.3.1.4.5

Editing a Calculation

You can edit calculated measures and restricted measures.

Prerequisites
A calculation must exist.

Procedure

1. In the Builder tab, hover over a calculation and select

(Edit calculation).

The Calculation Editor appears.


2. Make changes to the formulas used by a calculated measure or the dimensions used by a restricted measure

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

143

3. Select OK.

Results
The chart is updated to reflect the edited results.

Related Information
Calculation Editor [page 133]
Select Measures and Dimensions [page 132]

6.3.1.4.6

Formatting a Calculation

You can format the results of a calculation.

Prerequisites
A calculation must be added to the selected chart.

Procedure

1. In the Builder tab, hover over a calculation and select

(Edit formatting options).

The Formatting Options dialog appears.


2. Modify the unit, decimals, or scale used by the calculation.
3. Select OK.

Related Information
Calculation Editor [page 133]
Select Measures and Dimensions [page 132]

144

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.3.1.5

Sorting Measures and Dimensions

You can sort measures and dimensions in charts in ascending or descending order.

Procedure
1. Create a sort in one of these ways:
On a canvas page, select a chart, and then select the

(Sort Options) icon.

On the Examine panel at the bottom of a grid page, select the


In the Explorer, select the chart's

icon, and select Sort.

icon, and select Sort.

2. Select the measure or dimension you want to sort, and the sort direction.
3. To sort on a measure that isn't included in the chart, select Advanced Sorting, and then choose a measure
from the list.

6.3.1.5.1

Break Grouping

When you have multiple dimensions on the categories axis, use Break Grouping to ignore the grouping order and
change how the dimensions and measures are sorted.
To enable or disable Break Grouping, select a chart, and then select

(Sort Options)

Break Grouping .

Example
You have a Profit and Loss model with the following measure and dimensions:
Type

Name

Dimension

Product

Dimension

Region

Measure

Income Statement

Sort on Product (A-Z), with the Break Grouping option disabled


Region

Product

Income Statement (millions)

New York State

Basics

0.63

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

145

Region

Product

Income Statement (millions)

New York State

Juices

16.97

New York State

Softdrinks

16.14

Ohio

Basics

0.06

Ohio

Juices

2.22

Ohio

Softdrinks

1.69

Pennsylvania

Basics

0.25

Pennsylvania

Juices

5.94

Pennsylvania

Softdrinks

7.24

Sort on Product (A-Z), with the Break Grouping option enabled


Region

Product

Income Statement (millions)

New York State

Basics

0.63

Ohio

Basics

0.06

Pennsylvania

Basics

0.25

New York State

Juices

16.97

Ohio

Juices

2.22

Pennsylvania

Juices

5.94

New York State

Softdrinks

16.14

Ohio

Softdrinks

1.69

Pennsylvania

Softdrinks

7.24

6.3.1.6

Trellis Charts

A trellis chart is a set of small charts shown in a grid for comparison. Each small chart represents one item in a
section. For example, if you create a bar chart that compares revenue by region, and then add the <Country>
dimension to the trellis, multiple small charts appear. Each small chart displays the revenue by region for one
country.

146

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

To create a trellis chart, add a dimension to the Trellis area in the Builder tab.

6.3.1.7

Chart Filters

You can exclude non-relevant data points or filter data points to focus a chart on a specific set of data. You can
filter by selecting members directly on the chart, or by choosing members from a list. Chart filters apply only to
the data displayed in that chart. To apply a filter to all charts in a story, use a Story Filter.

Procedure
1. To filter by selecting members directly on the chart, select the data points to exclude or filter.
You can maximize the chart to help you select points.

Tip
You can drag a box around a group of data points to select the group.
2. In the tooltip that appears, select Filter Selected Data Points or Exclude Selected Data Points.
3. To filter by choosing members from a list, open the Builder tab in the Designer panel.
4. In the Filters area, select Add Filters, select the dimension you'd like to filter, and then choose members.
The members you choose appear in the Selected Members list on the right.
You can use the Search function to find the members you want. You can also select the wrench icon beside
Selected Members and select Add Wildcard Members to add members whose names match a text string you
enter.

Note
Wildcard filters don't work on hierarchical dimensions (for example, planning models, and analytic
models with a parent-child hierarchy dimension). The Add Wildcard Members option is available only if
the dimension is not hierarchical.
Wildcard filters are applicable only to string-based dimensions. The Add Wildcard Members option is
not available for non-string dimensions (for example, numeric or date dimensions).
If you're filtering certain types of dimensions, for example a date dimension, you can also filter by range: after
selecting the date dimension, select the Filter by Range option. You can also filter a date dimension directly
from the Categories area on the Builder tab, or by typing the name of the dimension in the Filters area and
choosing the entry with the (Range) suffix.
5. Choose whether you want viewers of the chart to be allowed to specify the effective filter values from a list of
filter values that you define. You can choose to allow a single filter value or multiple filter values.
If you allow viewers to specify filter values, they can either toggle on and off each filter value (if you chose the
Multiple Selections option), or select a single filter value (if you chose the Single Selection option).
6. Select OK to create the filter.
The filter appears at the top of the chart, and in the Filters area in the Builder tab.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

147

Related Information
Applying a Story or Page Filter [page 202]
Changing Chart Filter Values [page 148]

6.3.1.7.1

Changing Chart Filter Values

When viewing a chart that contains a filter, you may be able to change the filter values.

Context
A chart's creator can specify whether viewers of the chart will be allowed to change the filter values.

Procedure
1. With a chart displayed, select an existing chart filter from the filter bar at the top of the chart.
2. If the chart's creator has allowed multiple filter value selection, you can toggle on and off the filter values.
If the chart's creator has allowed only single filter value selection, you can choose which filter value you want
to apply to the chart.

Related Information
Chart Filters [page 147]

6.3.1.8

Drilling through Hierarchical Data

If hierarchical dimensions are included in a chart, you can drill up or down through dimensions to explore the data
at different levels.

Context
If the chart contains more than one hierarchical dimension, you can select which dimension to drill into.

148

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Procedure
1. Select an area in the chart or a label on the axis.
For example, you can select one or more bars in a bar chart.
The selected area in the chart is highlighted.
2. In the menu that appears, select

(Drill Down on ...) or

(Drill Up on ...).

If the area you selected contains more than one hierarchical dimension, you can choose which dimension to
drill into.

6.3.1.9

Drilling through Waterfall Charts

If hierarchical values are included in a waterfall chart, you can expand or collapse the chart to explore the data at
different levels.

Procedure
1. Select an area in the chart or a label on the axis.
The selected area in the chart is highlighted.
2. In the menu that appears, select

(Expand Account) or

(Collapse Account).

6.3.1.10 Filtering Data by Rank


Filtering data by rank focuses a chart on a specified number of data points with the highest or lowest values.

Procedure
Create a rank in one of these ways:
On a canvas page, select a chart, then select the Choose Top N Options icon.
On the Examine panel at the bottom of a grid page, select the
In the Explorer, select the chart's

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

icon, and select Top N.

icon, and select Top N.

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

149

6.3.1.11 Adding Variance


Add variance to your chart to show the difference between versions of a measure; for example, to show the
difference between forecast and actual sales figures.

Procedure
1. Add variance in one of these ways:
On a canvas page, open the Designer tab, and select Builder from the drop-down list. In the Variance area,
select Add Variance.
On the Examine panel at the bottom of a grid page, select the

icon, and select

Variance

Add

Variance .
In the Explorer, select the chart's

icon, and select

Variance

Add Variance .

2. Choose whether you want to display the variance numerically or as a percentage, or both.
3. Choose the measure and versions you want to calculate the variance on.
4. By default, a positive variance is shown in green, and a negative variance is shown in red. If you want to
reverse the color scheme, select Invert Colors.
5. You can adjust the settings of your variance calculation, or delete it:
On a canvas page, open the Designer tab, and select Builder from the drop-down list. In the Variance area,
point to the variance calculation and select the pencil icon to change the settings.
On the Examine panel at the bottom of a grid page, select the

icon, and select

Variance

Edit

Variance .

6.3.1.12 Reference Lines


You can define reference lines to show important values on your chart; for example, the average and maximum
prices of your company's products.
Two types of reference lines are available: fixed-value and dynamic-value. Fixed-value reference lines are created
with a specific reference value, and don't change when you change the data in your chart; for example if you filter
your data. Dynamic-value reference lines are updated when filters, ranking, and sorting are applied to the chart.
When you add a reference line, you can choose to fill the background area above and below the line with color.
Reference lines are maintained when you change the chart type.

150

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.3.1.12.1 Adding a Reference Line


Procedure
1. Add a reference line in one of these ways:
On a canvas page, open the Designer tab, and select Builder from the drop-down list. In the Reference Line
area, select Add Reference Line.
On the Examine panel at the bottom of a grid page, select the
In the Explorer, select the chart's

icon, and select Reference Lines.

icon, and select Reference Lines.

2. Choose whether you want a fixed or dynamic reference line.


For a fixed reference line, enter a value and a label for the line.
For a dynamic reference line, select the parameters you want to base the reference line on, and enter a
label for the line.
3. If you want to color the background areas above and below (or to the left and right of) the reference line,
choose colors in the Above and Below color-pickers.
If two reference lines try to set the same background area to different colors, the line created first takes
precedence.
4. If you have applied a Top N filter to the chart, and are adding a dynamic reference line, you can choose
whether you want to include the Top N options as a filter for the reference line.
For example, if you're adding a dynamic reference line with average aggregation, and you have a Top 5
ranking applied, you can choose whether the reference line averages all values or only the Top 5 values.

Results
Select OK to add the reference line to the chart. You can hover over the reference line to see details about the line.

6.3.1.13 Hiding Chart Elements


You can hide some chart elements; for example, the title or legend.

Procedure
Open the Show/Hide list in one of these ways:
On a canvas page, select a chart, then select

(More Actions) and select Show/Hide.

On the Examine panel at the bottom of a grid page, select the

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

icon, and select Show/Hide.

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

151

In the Explorer, select the chart's

icon, and select Show/Hide.

6.3.1.14 Rotating a Chart


You can rotate some chart types; for example, bar and column charts.

Procedure
Change the chart orientation in one of these ways:
On a canvas page, open the Designer tab, select Formatting from the drop-down list, and change the Chart
Orientation setting.
On the Examine panel at the bottom of a grid page, select the
In the Explorer, select the chart's

icon, and select Change Orientation.

icon, and select Change Orientation.

6.3.1.15 Zooming in on a Chart


You can temporarily zoom in to (magnify) a region of a chart.

Procedure
1. Drag the pointer to draw a rectangle around a region of a chart.
2. In the pop-up menu that appears, select
3. To zoom back out, select

(Zoom In).

(Zoom Out) below the chart's title.

6.3.1.16 Creating Blended Charts


You can create charts with data from multiple models.

Prerequisites
Linked dimensions must be created.

152

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Procedure
1. Create a chart that uses a model with linked dimensions.

Note
To view a list of all linked dimensions, select the

(Link Dimensions) icon.

2. In the Builder tab, select measures and or dimensions from the primary model. You must select at least one
linked dimension.
The primary model is selected by default in the Data Source list. The primary model is the model used to
create the chart.
Linked dimensions will have a

(Link) icon.

3. Under Data Source, select a secondary model from the list.


Only linked models appear.
4. (Optional) Select a new JOIN TYPE from the list. There are three options:
All primary data Allows all data in the primary model, and corresponding data in a secondary model to
appear in the chart.
All data Allows all data in the primary and secondary model to appear in the chart.
Intersecting data only Allows only linked data to appear in the chart.
5. Select additional measures or dimensions.
Measures and dimensions that belong to the primary model are indicated by a blue dot.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for all models you want to use in the chart.

Results
The chart will display data from both the primary and secondary models. If there are multiple matches in a
secondary model, a number will appear on the chart indicating the number of multiples. Select Expand dimension
value to view all values in the chart. Multiple matches can only occur if you add dimension from the secondary
model that are not linked to the first model.

Related Information
Creating Linked Dimensions [page 199]
Creating a Linked Analysis [page 173]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

153

6.3.1.17 Manually Setting the Axis Range


You can manually change the axis range of a chart.

Context
You can change the axis range on the following chart types:
Bar/Column
Combination Column & Line
Stacked Bar/Column
Area
Line
Boxplot
Bubble
Scatterplot
Waterfall

Procedure
1. Choose your chart.
2. Choose one of the following:
On the Data View page, choose
On a story page, choose

(More Actions)

(More Actions)

Edit Axis

Edit Axis

3. Enter your minimum and maximum values.


4. Choose Apply.

Results
The chart now shows results within the specified axis range.

6.3.1.18 Axis Breaks


Axis breaks can be used for easier viewing of outliers in a chart.
Axis breaks can be added to the following chart types:

154

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Bar/Column
Waterfall
There are some considerations to remember when working with axis breaks:
Axis break may not be available when the axis range is manually set.
If you have set an axis break and then edit the axis range, the axis break may be removed.
Selection is retained for drill-states.
You can have only one axis break in a chart.

6.3.1.18.1 Adding an Axis Break


Context
Axis breaks can be added to the following chart types:
Bar/Column
Waterfall

Procedure
1. In your chart, select a measure.
2. Select

(Apply axis break).

Results
An axis break is added to the chart. To remove it, select a measure and then click

(Disable axis break).

6.3.1.19 Displaying the Difference Between Two Data Points


You can select two data points in a chart to quickly see the difference between their values. For example, you can
compare a year-over-year percentage increase or decrease, or see the delta between two versions.

Context
This feature applies to Bar/Column or Combination Column & Line charts.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

155

An arrow shows which column is the second column chosen, and the value is displayed both numerically and as a
percentage. For vertical charts, the delta graphic and the value are displayed to the right of the selected columns.
For horizontal charts, the delta graphic is displayed below the selected bars, and the value is displayed on the
second selected bar.
Table 39: Delta between two data points
Height of second column or bar

Positive or negative delta

Taller

Positive

Shorter

Negative

Procedure
1. In your chart, select one bar or column.
2. Move the cursor to another bar or column and select it.

Results
A line is drawn between the two columns and the difference is displayed.

Tip
If the action menu is hiding the result, move the cursor to a blank spot on the axis and click. The action menu
will be hidden.

6.3.1.20 Synchronized Colors for a Dimension across Multiple


Charts
When the color palette for one chart in a story is changed, all the other charts that have the same color dimension
will also be updated. This applies to charts that have a single dimension for Color.
Color synchronization options:
Synchronize colors across charts [page 156]
Unsynchronize colors [page 157]
Assign colors [page 157]

Synchronize colors across charts


After you change the color palette for one chart, you can update the color for the rest of the charts in the story.

156

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

1. Select one of the charts.


2. In the Designer panel, open the Builder tab.
3. Find your Color dimension and then choose

(Sync Colors).

The icon will change to blue when the charts are synchronized.

Unsynchronize colors
When you synchronize charts with the same color dimension, all the charts in that story will use the same color
palette.
If you want to use different color palettes for some charts, you can either change the color dimension or do the
following:
1. Select one of the charts.
2. In the Designer panel, open the Builder tab.
3. Find your Color dimension, choose

(Synchronize Color), and then choose Unsync Colors.

The charts are no longer synchronized and the icon is now black. The color dimensions can be updated with
different palettes.

Tip
If you have chosen a different initial color palette for each chart, you can switch between charts and
synchronize to different palettes. For example, if you have a bubble chart with a rainbow palette and a
scatterplot chart with a shades of blue palette, you could do the following:
1. Select the bubble chart and choose
(Sync Colors).
Both charts will now have a rainbow color dimension.
2. Choose

(Sync Colors), and then choose Unsync Colors.

3. Select the scatterplot chart and choose


(Sync Colors).
Both charts will now have a shades of blue color dimension.

Assign colors for individual values


You can choose a new color palette, or you can change the color for one or more members in the color
dimension.
1. Select the appropriate chart.
2. In the Designer panel, open the Builder tab.
3. Find your Color dimension, choose

(Sync Colors), and then choose Assign Colors or Edit Assigned Colors.

4. Find the desired dimension member and choose a new color for it.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

157

5. When you have finished making changes, choose Add.


The dimension member color will be changed for all the charts that use that dimension in the Color parameter.

6.3.1.21 Include Extra Measures and Dimensions in Tooltips


You can add information to the tooltip for measures and dimensions that are not in your chart.

Context
You may want to limit the number of measures and dimensions used to create your chart, but still be able to see
the details of a datapoint from all the measures and dimensions. Select additional measures and dimensions from
Tooltip Measures and Tooltip Dimensions.

Procedure
1. Select your chart.
2. In the Designer panel, open the Builder tab.
3. Scroll down until you find Tooltip Measures.
4. Select Select Measure and choose your measures.
5. Under Tooltip Dimensions, select Select Dimension and choose your dimensions.

Results
When you move the cursor over a datapoint, the tooltip will show information for all the selected measures and
dimensions.

6.3.2 Conditional Formatting


Use custom formatting options to highlight information such as low sales in an area.
Conditional formatting covers several options, including thresholds in models and stories, and assigned colors in
stories.

158

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Tasks
Creating Story-Defined Thresholds [page 159]
Using Thresholds in Charts [page 160]
Assigning Colors to Dimension Members [page 161]

Related Information
Synchronized Colors for a Dimension across Multiple Charts [page 156]
Defining Thresholds in Models [page 33]

6.3.2.1

Creating Story-Defined Thresholds

Set the thresholds or ranges and display the information in the chart.

Prerequisites
To create a threshold, you must be on a story page. Select

Designer

Conditional Formatting .

Context
Use thresholds to provide visual cues for your information, so that you can quickly see what areas are doing well,
and what areas may need improvements.
There are three default ranges with the following labels and colors:
OK: green
Warning: orange
Critical: red
You can use as many or as few ranges as you like, and you can change the label names and colors.
When you enter the value for your range, you will see the value appear on the line at the bottom of the panel. The
value will include a letter to designate whether it is thousands, millions, and so on.
You do not need to set both an upper and a lower bound if you have only one range. When you add more ranges,
you can leave either the upper or lower bound empty.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

159

Procedure
1. If necessary, expand Story Defined.
2. Select Click to Add a Threshold.
The Create New Threshold panel appears, displaying a model, a measure, and one range option.
3. Choose your model.
4. Choose a measure.
5. In Ranges, set a lower bound and an upper bound for your range.
As you type your values for the upper and lower bounds, you will see a warning appear if the value does not fall
within the range. For example, a lower bound cannot be larger than the upper bound.
6. To add another range, select

(Add a new range).

7. When you have finished adding ranges, click Add.

Related Information
Conditional Formatting [page 158]

6.3.2.2

Using Thresholds in Charts

Add a threshold to your charts.

Prerequisites
Create a threshold value. For more information, see Creating Story-Defined Thresholds [page 159].

Procedure
1. In your story, select a chart.
2. In the Builder panel, under Color, select Select Dimension Or Threshold.
3. In the Thresholds section, select the desired threshold.

160

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Results
The threshold will be applied to the chart. When you move the cursor over a value, the tooltip will display the range
and threshold name.

Related Information
Conditional Formatting [page 158]

6.3.2.3

Assigning Colors to Dimension Members

Use conditional formatting to assign specific colors to Dimension members.

Prerequisites
To assign colors to dimension members, you must be on a story page. Select

Designer

Conditional

Formatting .
You can also assign colors from the Builder panel. For more information, see Synchronized Colors for a Dimension
across Multiple Charts [page 156].

Context
When a color is assigned to a specific dimension member, that color will override any changes to the color palette
for a chart. Members that do not have an assigned color will change color when the color palette is updated.

Procedure
1. If necessary, expand Story Defined.
2. Select Click to Assign Colors.
The Assigned Colors panel appears, displaying a model, a dimension, and the dimension members.
3. Choose your model.
4. Choose a dimension.
5. In Dimension Members, select the color option and change the color.
If you do not want to assign a color to a member, clear the check box. That member will now use the color
palette from the chart builder.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

161

6. When you have finished assigning colors, click Add.

6.3.3 Analyzing Geographical Data


Using SAP BusinessObjects Cloud and SAP HANA Spatial technology, you can overlay business data on geo maps
with detailed geographic information such as topography, satellite imagery, and streets and highways.
Geo maps can have multiple layers of different types of data that allow you to visualize measures and dimensions
from a model, or mark important locations, areas, and routes on the map.
Using a combination of these layers, as well as tools for filtering spatial data, you can perform a variety of
geographical analyses. For example:
Giving a quick visual overview of the performance of sales regions against KPIs that you set.
Finding retail store locations that have a type of public attraction or service nearby, such as pharmacies that
are close to hospitals.
Overlaying a map with custom defined regions, such as sales territories or electoral districts.
Display data distributions as either choropleth or heat maps.

Geographical hierarchies
You can customize the navigation path by skipping levels and setting your own label for each layer in a geo map.
Geographical hierarchies defined by general administration boundaries are not universal. The table below lists the
default labels for hierarchies and provides proximate equivalents.
Default label

Proximate equivalents

Country

Country

Region

State or Province

Sub-Region 1

District, County, or Department

Sub-Region 2

City, Town, Commune, or Municipality

Thresholds for measures


Two types of thresholds can be displayed in a geo map:
Thresholds defined in a model for a given measure. These thresholds are specified in the Modeler.
Thresholds defined for a story.

Note
In a geo map, thresholds defined in a story will override those defined for a model.

162

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.3.3.1

Creating a Geo Map

Like other chart types, you can add a geo map to a story canvas.

Prerequisites
To add data from a model to a Bubble, Choropleth, or Heat Map layer, the model must contain at least one
location dimension.

Context
When specifying measures in the Bubble, Choropleth, or Heat Map layers the following options are available:
Measures currently defined in the model, including calculated measures.
You can access the Calculation Editor to create a new calculated measure. For more information see Creating
Calculated Measures [page 134].
To toggle between specific measures in the geo map, you can also add measure input controls to the geo
map. For information on creating measure input controls see Select Measures and Dimensions [page 132].
A model is not required to add a point of interest or feature layer to a geo map.

Procedure

1. Select

(Add)

Geo Map .

The geo map is added to the canvas and the Designer panel displays the Builder tab.
2. From the Basemap list, select a visual style for the map hosted by Esri ArcGIS.
For example, the Streets basemap can help you clearly visualize city neighborhoods, while the Light Gray
basemap provides a simple, uncluttered look.
3. Select

(Add Layer) to define layers to the map.

Five layer types are available:

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

163

Table 40:
Layer type
Bubble layer:
Visualize measures and dimensions from your model on the
map.

Steps
1.

To pick the model that the layer will be based on, under
Data Source select

(edit).

2. From the Location Dimension list, select the dimension


that you want to visualize.
3. Use the Select Measure list under Bubble Color to asso
ciate a bubble color with a measure.
4. Choose the number of Ranges for the palette. This sets
the number of KPI values.
5. Specify values to set the KPI ranges for each color in
the palette.
Use the switch beside the Ranges list to show KPI val
ues as percentages or as absolute values. To reverse
the palette order use the

(Switch) icon.

6. If necessary, adjust the Opacity of the bubbles to en


sure that the basemap or other layers are visible.
7. Use the Select Measure list under Bubble Size to asso
ciate the bubble size with a measure.

Note
To support the rendering of large numbers of loca
tions, the bubble layer is set by default to display
clusters rather than all the individual points. Use the
switch beside Location Clustering to disable or ena
ble clustering . Use the Maximum Display Points
value to specify when to start clustering data points.
You can also adjust the Opacity of the clusters in
your map, or select a specific color for your clusters
from the Palette list.
8. To manage thresholds in the geo map, in the Designer
panel, select

icon to the right of the measure. Go to

Show Threshold
Go to

None

Show Threshold

Threshold

Story

to remove all thresholds.


Model

or

Show

to specify which type of threshold

you want to display. Select Edit Ranges or View all


Thresholds to modify the thresholds.

Note
If you choose not to display thresholds in geo map, the
Bubble Color palette specified for the layer will override

164

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Layer type

Steps
the one specified in the threshold. Any palette changes
will be reflected in the map legend.

Point of interest layer:

1.

terest data that you want to visualize.

Using your point of interest data, mark locations or areas on


the map, such as sales regions for your organization, or the
location of special events that are important to your analy
sis.

From the Location Dimension list, select the Point of In


Point of interest data is added in the Modeler page.

2. Select a color from the Palette list.


3. For geographical locations, select a marker and use the
Scale slider to set the size of the markers on your geo
map.

Note
These options aren't available for point of interest
data that displays shapes or lines.

Note
To change the current marker icon, select the arrow
next to Type. Select More to view all the available
options. You can also create a custom marker;
choose Add (the plus sign) under Custom Markers,
select Enter SVG Path to directly enter the icon's
SVG Path, or select Upload SVG File to load the file
containing the icon.
4. If necessary, adjust the Opacity of the layer.
Heat Map layer:
Visualize your measures in terms of data density on the
map.

1.

To pick the model that the layer will be based on, under
Data Source select

(edit).

2. From the Location Dimension list, select the dimension


that you want to visualize.
3. Select a measure from the Select Measure list to deter
mine values used to color the data points on the map.
4. Select a color from the Palette list.
5. If necessary, adjust the Blur Radius value.
This setting determines the size of each point and how
it overlaps with other points. A higher percentage value
results in a larger blur radius.
6. If necessary, adjust the Opacity of the layer.
7. Choose the number of Ranges for the palette.
This sets the number of KPI values. Specify values to
set the KPI ranges for each color in the palette. Use the
switch beside the Ranges list to display KPI values as
percentages or as absolute values.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

165

Layer type
Choropleth layer:

Steps
1.

Visualize your dimensions and measures by shading geo


graphical hierarchies on your map.

To pick the model that the layer will be based on, under
Data Source select

(edit).

2. From the Location Dimension list, select the dimension


that you want to visualize.
3. Select a measure from the Select Measure list to deter
mine the values to color on your map.
4. Select a color from the Palette list.
Use the swap icon to reverse the palette order.
5. If necessary, adjust the Opacity of the layer.
6. Choose the number of Ranges for the palette.
7. Specify values to set the KPI ranges for each color in
the palette.
Use the switch beside the Ranges list to show KPI val
ues as percentages or as absolute values.
Use the

(Hierarchy) icon in the layer panel to navi

gate geographical hierarchies displayed on the map. In


the Edit Layer Hierarchy dialog, you can customize the
navigation path by skipping levels and setting your own
label for each layer.
To drill a layer above or below current geographic
shape, select either the

(Drill Up) or the

(Drill

down) icons. Drilling on a region will filter out any data


from other regions. You can also remove parts of the
drill path by removing them from the Location Filter to
ken.
Feature layer:
Mark locations or areas on the map using a public Esri Arc
GIS web service.

1.

In the Service URL field, type the URL of a publicly


available Esri ArcGIS feature layer. The points or
shapes from the feature layer are added to the map.

2. If necessary, adjust the Opacity of the layer.

Note
Once you add a model to your geo map, it serves as the default model for any subsequent layers you
create. You can always change the data source for any given Bubble, Choropleth, or Heat Map layer by
selecting the corresponding
(edit) icon under Data Source. If you choose the No Model option as your
data source for a given layer, no data points will display for that layer.
4. Select the Hide Layer icon next to a layer to toggle the layer visibility.
5. To customize the data that displays for a given data point in the bubble layer, select the
Layout..

166

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

icon to right of

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Select Tooltip Information to specify information displayed as you hover over a given data point in the geo
map. Use the provided t Tooltip Information field to choose from a selection of measures, dimensions, or
to create a calculated measure or measure input controls.
Select Tooltip Chart to populate a corresponding table of information for a point in the geo map. Make
your selections from the provided list of Measures and Dimensions, and click OK.
6. By default, the geo map legend shows information about the measures in each bubble layer, and the
dimension for each point of interest layer. To configure a legend, select
bubble layer. You can set each measure or dimension to Show or Hide.

Settings

Maintain legend

for a

7. If necessary, filter the map data.


Polygon filter: Select the polygon filter tool on the left menu of the geo map, or place the cursor over the
icon and select the circle or square filter tool. Then, draw a shape on the map around the data points that
interest you.
Select and drag points to change the filter shape.
In the geo map builder, you can select the
shape.

(cancel) icon to remove the filter, or reduce the Opacity of the

Map filter: Find data points within or beyond a certain distance of a point of interest. Select the + icon for
Add Filter in the geo map builder. In the Create Map Filter dialog, select Distance from Filter type. Select a
geographical hierarchy for Show and either Within or Not Within from the Operator list. Type a distance
and select a unit of measure. Finally, specify a point of interest as the Reference Location.
Map filter: Display data points that intersect or not intersect with a point of interest. Select the + icon for
Add Filter in the geo map builder. In the Create Map Filter dialog, select Intersection from Filter type.
Select location dimensions for Show and either Intersecting or Not Intersecting from the Operator list.
Finally, specify a point of interest as the Reference Location.
Map filter: When using a choropleth layer, choose a shape in the map and select the
(Filter) icon to
remove data points outside the selected area. You can also remove parts of the drill path by removing
them from the Location Filter token.
Story filters: Any filters that you apply to the page or story will also filter data in the geo map. You can also
apply story filters from the geo map: in the Formatting tab of the Designer pane, turn on the Apply Filters
to Story setting in the Geo Map Properties section.
8. Use the tools at the left side of the map to adjust the pan and zoom.
Select the Home icon to automatically adjust the view based on current data points.

Related Information
Conditional Formatting [page 158]
Creating Story-Defined Thresholds [page 159]
Defining Thresholds in Models [page 33]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

167

6.3.4 Uploading Custom Pictograms


Before you can add your own vector graphics to stories, you must upload the graphics.

Procedure
1. Select Pictograms from the top navigation panel.
2. Select the

(Upload Pictograms) icon.

3. Choose the vector graphics file to add, and select Open.


The file must be an SVG file with valid XML encoding.

6.3.5 Adding Dynamic Text to a Story


Context
You can add dynamic text to a text box from the formatting panel. Dynamic text automatically updates the text
based on the values from the source input control or filter.

Procedure
1. Select a text box in your story.
2. From the Dynamic Text section in the formatting panel, select Insert Token.
Dynamic text can be added from the following sources:
Input controls in the current page
Calculation Input controls
Measure Input controls
Story filters
3. Specify the number of values to show. For example, you can enter the number 10 to show the first 10 values in
the specified input control.
The number of members from the input control not shown in the dynamic text box is specified in parenthesis.
For example, if the input control has 15 members and you chose to display only the first 10, the text will
indicate that there are 5 more members in the input control.

168

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Results
The dynamic text has been added to the story. The text will be updated based on the values from the source input
control.

6.3.6 Adding an RSS Reader


Add an RSS Reader to your story to present relevant articles from an RSS feed alongside your data and
visualizations.

Procedure

1. Choose

RSS Reader

from the toolbar on the Story page.

A blank RSS Reader is added to your canvas.


2. With the RSS Reader selected, go to the Designer panel and select the Builder tab.
3. Add a URL to an RSS feed in the Manage RSS Feeds section.
Table 41: Example
Title

URL

SAP Community Network

http://scn.sap.com/community/feeds/
allcontent

Note
Only RSS 2.0 feeds are supported.

Results
The RSS Reader on the canvas displays the latest results from the published RSS feed and can be refreshed by
choosing

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

169

Next Steps
You can customize your RSS Reader by setting options in the Properties section of the Builder tab:
Table 42:
Option

Description

Batch Load Number of Articles

Specify the number of articles to display per page. The previ


ous and next buttons allow you to change the page.

Show Time Stamp

Show or hide the time the article was published.

Show Title

Show or hide the article title.

Truncate Long Articles

Select to display only a short preview of the article. Choose


More to expand and show the entire article.

Allow Hyperlinking on Article Title

If selected, clicking the article title will launch a separate


browser window to display the contents.

You can also change the fonts and colors of how articles are displayed in the Formatting tab.

170

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.3.7 Linking to another Page, Story, or External URL


You can add a hyperlink to another story or page, or to an external URL.

Procedure
1. On a canvas page, select the image, chart, pictogram, or text to link from.
2. Open the Designer panel, and select Formatting from the drop-down list.
3. In the Hyperlink section, choose the link destination.
External URL: Type the URL of an external web page. If you want to pass data in the chart to the web page,
select one or more dimensions from the dimension picker that appears, to insert the dimensions into the
URL.
Page: Choose a page within the current story.
Story: Choose a page from a different story.
4. If you want the destination page or URL to open in a new browser window, select the Open in New Window
check box.
Note: If the link destination is another page in the same story, the application will switch to the destination
page within the same browser window when the hyperlink is followed.
5. To pass selected dimensions as a filter to the destination page when the hyperlink is followed, select the Apply
selected dimension as a filter check box.
6. To follow the hyperlink, do one of the following:
Note: If you have story editing privileges, first switch to Present mode.
Select the image, pictogram, or text that contains the hyperlink. The destination page or URL opens.
If the hyperlink is in a chart, select data in the chart; for example, select one or more bars in a bar chart.
Then select the hyperlink that appears.
If the hyperlink's destination is an external URL, select just one data point (for example, one bar in a bar
chart), before selecting the hyperlink. The dimensions represented by that data point are passed to the
destination web page.
If the hyperlink's destination is another story page, the destination page opens. If the link was defined with
the Apply selected dimension as a filter option selected, the selected dimensions are applied as a
temporary story filter. To return to the hyperlink's source page and remove the temporary story filter,
select the filter and then select Go Back to Previous Page.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

171

6.3.8 Scaling Charts


If multiple charts in a story contain the same measure, the measure values may be scaled differently in different
charts, which can make comparisons difficult. You can scale the charts so that measures have the same scale
across multiple charts.

Context
Note
Chart scaling is applied to all of the pages in a story, but the scaling may be different for the same measure
on different pages, because the scaling factor is calculated separately for each page.
You can exclude charts from the scaling, for example if a chart contains data that is much larger than the
data in other charts, making the other charts look small.

Procedure
1. Open the story that contains the charts you want to scale, and select the Designer panel.
2. From the drop-down list, select Chart Scaling.
3. Select the measures that you want to scale.
The affected charts in the story are rescaled automatically.

Note
Once a measure is included in an axis scaling rule, that measure can't be included in another axis scaling
rule.
4. After scaling charts, you might want to set the bar widths in the scaled charts to a consistent size. To do so,
hover over the axis scaling rule you just created under Chart Scaling on the Designer panel, and select
Fix Bar Width .
Type the number of pixels you'd like to set the bar width to. To revert back to the default widths, delete the
number you typed.
When conflicting bar widths are defined, the width rule of the first measure on the axis is applied to the overall
chart.
When an axis scaling rule is deleted, any associated bar width setting is also deleted, and the bar widths revert
to the default sizes.
5. To exclude a chart from the scaling, select the chart, then select Formatting from the drop-down list, and set
Break Scale to On.
6. To change which measures are scaled, hover over a measure in the Scaled Measures list, and select
Scaled Measure).

172

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

(Edit

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

7. To remove scaling for a measure, hover over the measure in the Scaled Measures list, and select
Scaled Measure).

(Remove

6.3.9 Creating a Linked Analysis


Create a linked analysis to drill through hierarchical data or create filters that simultaneously update multiple
charts in your story.

Context
With linked analysis, when you create filters or drill through hierarchical data in one chart, the same filters are
applied to other charts that you include in the analysis. For a filter to update other charts, the charts in the
analysis must be based on the same model or the source models must contain linked dimensions.

Procedure
1. Select a chart in your story.
2. From the drop-down menu in the Designer panel, select Linked Analysis.
3. Select a chart interaction option:
This chart (default option): Filtering and drilling through hierarchical data on this chart will only update
this chart.
Linked chart set: Filtering and drilling through hierarchical data on this chart will update all the charts in
the set based on the same model or with linked dimensions to this chart's model. Use the filter on
datapoint selection option to filter other charts on a selected datapoint.
Entire Story: Filtering and drilling through hierarchical data on this chart will update all the charts in the
story based on the same model or with linked dimensions to this chart's model.
4. Define your linked chart set by excluding charts.
By default, all the charts in your story are included in the linked chart set. To exclude a chart, select the chart
and deselect the option Include this chart in set.
The excluded charts will be moved from the Linked chart set area to the Excluded charts area.

Results
Your linked analysis is created. Filtering and drilling through hierarchical data on this chart will simultaneously
update other charts depending on the chart interactions option you selected.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

173

Note
If the charts in your linked analysis are based on models with linked dimensions, the ID of the linked
dimensions must match. Otherwise, filtering in one chart will not update the linked charts.
If the charts in your linked analysis are based on models with linked dimensions, and you drill through the
data in one chart, filters are applied on all linked charts, but the level of the data displayed is not changed.
Currently, Tables and Waterfall (expanding or collapsing the data in a waterfall chart will not update the
level of data displayed on linked charts) charts don't support linked analysis.

Related Information
Chart Filters [page 147]
Drilling through Hierarchical Data [page 148]
Creating Linked Dimensions [page 199]

6.3.10 Value Driver Trees


Add a value driver tree to a canvas page in a story to help perform forecasting, budgeting, and decision making
tasks.
You add value driver trees to a canvas by selecting

Value Driver Tree (beta)

in the canvas page.

You can use a value driver tree to simulate different scenarios by selecting Simulation in the Designer panel,
choosing a version to display in the value driver tree, and selecting Run Calculation.
If you have also added a table that shows that version in the story, you can update values in the table and select
Run Calculation again to update the value driver tree.
To navigate the tree, click and drag within the tile and using the mouse wheel to zoom. A map of the value driver
tree is displayed in the lower left corner by default, and you can drag the selected area in the map to change the
view of the value driver tree. You can also drag the border of the map to reposition it on the tile.

Related Information
Value Driver Trees (Beta Feature) [page 109]

174

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.4

Tables

Tables can be used to view and analyze data. Tables are added to either canvas or grid pages in stories.
For tables that are based on models, the set of features and options available depends on the model type
(Planning, Analytics, or a model based on a remote HANA system). Only the features and options that are
supported by the model type are visible. For example, Layout is only available for stories based on planning-type
models.

Page Types: Canvas or Grid?


Canvas and grid pages support different features for tables:
Models: On canvas pages, tables are integrated with an underlying Model.
On a grid page, tables may be related to a model but it is also possible to create ad hoc tables where you can
type or paste data manually.
Positioning: On a canvas page, tables can be moved around just like other tiles.
On a grid page, you can change the position of the table by adding rows and columns above or to the left of
the table.
Input Task: To create an Input Task from a table you must create the table on a canvas page.

Designing Tables
When you add a table to a Story, a data grid is created with the basic dimensions and categories of the model
aligned along the axes of the grid. You can change this basic layout using the Designer tools.
Use the Builder to select the measures and dimensions to include in the rows and columns of your table, and use
the Formatting tools to enhance the presentation.
Use the Examine panel to create charts and visualizations based on selected areas of the data in your table.

Tasks
Creating a Table [page 176]
Modifying a Table [page 177]
Formatting a Grid [page 179]
Working with Tables [page 180]
Cumulative Filters (Year-to-Date) [page 182]
Aggregation [page 183]
Copying and Pasting Cell Values [page 183]
Cell References [page 185]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

175

The Formula Bar [page 185]


About Input Tasks [page 186]
Creating an Input Task [page 187]
Working with an Assigned Input Task [page 188]
Approver: Working with Returned Input Tasks [page 189]
About Version Management [page 190]
Creating Versions [page 191]
Publishing Versions [page 192]
Sharing Private Versions [page 193]
Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) [page 193]
Creating KPIs [page 194]
Charting KPIs [page 195]
Editing KPIs [page 195]
Setting the Cutover Date [page 197]

Related Information
Stories [page 115]

6.4.1 Creating a Table


You can add a table to a story canvas or grid page.

Prerequisites
You can create a table based on any existing model. Models based on remote live data depend on connections
which an administrator creates using the Connections feature.

Procedure
1. Add a table to the story.
On a canvas, select

(Add)

On a grid page, select

(Add).

Table .

2. Select one of the available options:


With Existing Model selected pick the model that the table will be based on.

176

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

On a grid page you can choose Create from Template to create a planning model based on a template.
On a canvas page you can select No Model to create an empty grid tile where you can manually enter
data.
A table is generated from the data in the selected model or on the basis of the accounts you set up in the
template.
3. Use the Builder tab to select the dimensions to include in the rows and columns.

6.4.2 Modifying a Table


You can change the default design of a table in the Builder tab.
The following sections are displayed in the Builder tab.

Data Source
The data source is displayed in this area.

Table Structure
All dimensions used to create the table are displayed in this area. You can select
columns. You can also add additional dimensions to rows and columns.

(Swap Axis) to swap rows and

When you hover over a dimension and select ..., you can do the following:

(Filter) Add or modify filters.

(Attributes) Select which attributes to display in the table.

(Unbooked Data) Show or hide unbooked data. When unbooked data is hidden, only cells in the grid that
contain data are visible.
(Show Totals) Show the sum of the dimension values.

Note
Only numerical dimensions are supported. Hierarchical dimensions are not supported.

Filters
All filters that have been applied to the table are listed in the Filters section of the tab. If the underlying model is
using categories and periods in the Time dimension, these are visible in the filters list and cannot be removed.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

177

Filters that have been manually applied can be removed by choosing the (Cancel) icon next to the filter and
more filters can be added here by selecting the Add Filters text at the bottom of the list.
Filters are normally applied as restrictive filters (so that only the selected members are visible) but they can also
be applied exclusively by selecting the Exclude selected members checkbox when you select the members; in this
case, all members are visible except the selected items. At a more detailed level, you can exclude individual items
in a filter selection by setting the
(Set to invisible) switch for any member that has been selected. In the
Selected filters dialog, selected members are shown in two separate groups: Selected members and Invisible
members.
Note that currently some functionality is restricted when an exclusive filter is applied; for example, it is not
possible to enter values in empty (unbooked) cells. If you attempt to use a feature that is currently not compatible
with an exclude filter (this includes Spreading, Allocation, and Distribution), a warning message is displayed.
Remove the exclude filter to enable the feature.

Filters for the Time Dimension


A number of options are available for applying filters on the Time dimension:
Filter by member This option is essentially the same as the standard filter with checkboxes to select or
exclude individual members of the hierarchy.
Filter by range Using this option, you can define time periods based on years, quarters, or months (depending
on the time granularity defined in the underlying model) and apply the date range as a filter, so that only
details in the selected time period are visible. It is also possible to define multiple range time filters and apply
these together. You could use this for example, to compare the first two months of the year over a three year
period by defining three separate ranges for months JanFeb for each of the three years. When these ranges
are applied as a single filter, everything else except the selected periods is filtered out.

Free and Fix


Building and formatting are two separate activities and separate working modes are available by selecting either
Free or Fix on the Builder tab:
Select Free to work in dimension mode and make changes to the structure of the table.
Select Fix to work in formatting mode. This freezes the dimensions and allows you to apply formatting to the
table.

Related Information
Story and Page Filters [page 201]

178

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.4.3 Formatting a Grid


You can format the grid around a table.

Context

Note
Formatting can only be applied to cells in the grid around an automatically generated table, and not directly to
the table.

Procedure
1. Select a table.
2. In the Builder tab, select Fix.
3. Select the Formatting tab.
4. Select an empty cell outside the table.
The following formatting options are available:
Table 43:
Formatting Option
Font

Formatting

Cell

Styles

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Description

Size

Color

Type

Face

Alignment

Plain Text

Number - Decimal places can be modified

Percentage - Decimal places can be modified

Currency - Decimal places and symbol can be modified

Inherit - Applies the previous cell format

Merge cells

Fill color

Add row

Add column

By default, Normal is applied to all cells. To create a new style, select


(Add Style), enter a
name for the style, then choose font and background options. When the style is saved, the style
can be applied to cells in the current grid, or other grids in the story.

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

179

6.4.4 Working with Tables


Once you have created a table there are several features available on the grid toolbar for working with the data in
the table.
The grid toolbar is dynamic and is only visible when the table is active. It includes two standard options for
managing the table: firstly (Remove) to delete the active table from the page and also
(Pin to home) if you
wish to pin the active table to your home screen. Other features are described in more detail below.

Edit Planning Model


For tables based on planning-type models you can edit the underlying model from within the story and save the
changes to update the model. Choose
(Edit Planning Model) on the toolbar to open the Edit Model dialog. The
dialog shows an overview of the dimensions and members contained in the model and offers a number of options
to make changes.
You can add or remove members from dimensions. To do this, firstly, click on an item in the list of members in a
dimension. Two new options are displayed: an option to delete the member from the dimension and also a new
prompt text 'Type here'. You can remove the selected member or you can overwrite the prompt with the name of
a new account member that you wish to add to the model. In either case the change is made permanent in the
model when you close the dialog with OK.
You can make changes to the Time dimension of the model by changing the granularity of the time periods or by
changing the start and end dates of the plan. You can also change the frequency of the planning categories and
the forecasting settings for the model. Note, however, that these changes may not be compatible with the existing
data in the model and in this case a confirmation prompt is displayed to warn that the model data will be cleared
and ownership of the model will be transferred to the current user.

Top N

(Top N) filter to a column in the table to select a specified number of the lowest or highest
You can apply a
ranked members. This icon is only active when a suitable column of data is selected, click the icon to open the
Create Top N dialog. Select the Mode (either top or bottom) and enter a number for the Value, that is, the number
of items you want to select and sort in this filter. Select the Account (the column) that you want to apply the filter
to and close the dialog with Create to apply the filter to the grid.
When a Top N filter is applied text is displayed in the corner of the grid indicating which column is filtered. A
(Clear) icon is also available in the corner of the grid to remove the filter.
When a filter is applied, the visible content of the grid will depend on the underlying structure of the data. At its
simplest, all rows of data which have not been selected will be hidden. If the data in the grid is hierarchical or
aggregated other dependent rows will also be visible.

180

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Locking Cells
To prevent individual cells of the grid being updated you can apply cell locking to one or more selected cells.
To do this, select the cells you want to lock and choose the
(Lock Cell) icon on the toolbar. Locked cells are
shaded gray as a visual indicator that they are locked and the toolbar icon changes to a closed lock. Click the lock
icon again to unlock the cell.
Note that the Read-only feature on the main Stories toolbar prevents a cell value from being overwritten but cell
locking prevents updates to a cell value which would be caused by aggregation. You can therefore use this feature
to redistribute values among sibling nodes of a hierarchy.

Example
The parent node in the hierarchy Employee Expense has three child nodes: Salaries, Bonus, Training. If you lock
the Employee Expense node and increase the value of the Salaries cell, the value of the Bonus and Training
cells is automatically reduced to balance out the increase in salaries and maintain the same total Employee
Expense value.

Drill
Data is typically organized and displayed in a collapsible hierarchy. To avoid having to drill through the individual
(Drill) to manage the number of levels which are currently visible.
branches of the hierarchy manually, use
Choose Drill to open the Set Drillstate dialog.
If the table currently includes more than one dimension you can select the dimension you wish to open up by
choosing it from the drop-down Dimension list. Set the Drill Level value to determine how many levels of the
hierarchy are opened. You can enter zero to collapse all levels of the hierarchy or any other appropriate number
depending on the depth of the hierarchy.

Formulas
You can also work with predefined formulas in a table. You enter formulas in the heading area of the table in the
icon to activate the
next available column on the right. Position the cursor in the cell and toggle the /
formula bar. As you start to type in the formula bar you will be prompted with a drop-down list of possible values.
When you complete your formula a new column with the calculated values is appended to the existing data
columns.
You must take care to add appropriate dimensions to the table to support the formula you entered.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

181

Related Information
The Formula Bar [page 185]

6.4.4.1

Cumulative Filters (Year-to-Date)

You can add additional columns (or rows) to a table to show accumulated values for Year-to-Date (YTD), Quarterto-Date (QTD), and Month-to-Date (MTD).
This feature depends on the use of the Time dimension and the Measures dimension. Measures is permanently
available as a filter in the Builder panel for all tables based on models. A working scenario is shown in the following
illustration.
Start by adding the Time dimension to the table, in the illustration this has been added as a row and the hierarchy
has been opened to show the months so that the time periods are displayed as a column on the left.
Then add the Measures dimension to the table. Once this has been added you can then select the Measures filters
you require. A new column is added to the table for each selected filter.
Note that if the Measures dimension has not been added to the table then only a single measure filter can be
selected which applies to the table as a whole.
The red highlights in the illustration show a comparison of how the accumulation works for both YTD and QTD.
The period values are accumulated in each column month-by-month until the period total is equal to the summary
total.

182

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.4.4.2

Aggregation

Normally, values in a table are aggregated along the hierarchy but sometimes exceptions are necessary.
Aggregation of values in a hierarchy is determined by the Aggregation type setting, which is applied to each
account member in Modeler. Typically, values are summed up into higher-level totals.

No Aggregation
In some situations, it is not possible to simply aggregate values; this would be true, for example, when working
with different currencies, or if values are expressed in different units that are not compatible with each other. In
these cases, a parent cell may be displayed as empty, or a common value may be shown in the cell but it is not a
simple aggregation (refer to Aggregation type NONE for more details).
In order to make these cells recognizable, the cell is shown with a diagonal line drawn through it, and a help
message is available to explain the data. Select the notification symbol next to the cell to see the explanation.

Aggregation for Analytic-type Models


Note that for Analytic-type models, it is also possible to book values to high-level nodes of a hierarchy (this is not
possible for planning-type models). In this case, the node shows the sum of the booked value plus the sum of the
child values.

Example
A value of 30 has been booked to the parent node Sales Expense. The value shown in the table cell is 50; this
figure includes the aggregation of two child accounts.
Sales Expenses 50
Travel Expenses 10
Other Expenses 10

6.4.5 Copying and Pasting Cell Values


In tables and grids, you can copy and paste aggregated values, the underlying distribution of their leaf members,
and formulas; you can also create references between cells.
Data can be copied within or across a grid and a table, and you can also copy data from an external source such as
an Excel spreadsheet.
In a table, you can paste data into cells that can receive data input. You cannot paste into cells that are calculated
by formulas.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

183

Copying data in a table


When copying data within a table, there are two types of paste operations: copying and pasting the source
distribution, or keeping the target distribution.
When you copy a source value, the values of each of its leaf members in the point of view is copied as well. By
default, all of these values are pasted if possible.
For example, you might copy a Q1 member and paste it to Q2 for the same version. On the month level, the value
for January will be copied to April, the value for February will be copied to May, and the value for March will be
copied to June.
Source distribution can be copied and pasted when the following conditions are met:
You are pasting to a single cell only.
The source and target cell belong to the same version.
You are copying across two time periods at the same level, for example, December and January, or you are
copying across two different leaf members, for example, from one sales manager to another.
The Category dimension is added to the Rows or Columns.
The source cell that you copied is visible.
When these conditions are not met, you are prompted to paste the aggregated value instead. In this case, the
behavior is the same as typing the value into the cell. The distribution of the copied value among the leaf members
is determined by the existing proportions between those members, or by automatic spreading if you pasted to an
unbooked cell. Only the aggregated value of the source cells leaf members has been copied.
If you want to specify which paste operation to use, you can select
Paste Special (CTRL+SHIFT+V) .
You can then choose to Copy Source Distribution or Keep Target Distribution, and set the selected option as the
default for future Paste Special operations.

Copying and pasting multiple values


A rectangular group of selected cell values can also be copied and pasted to multiple cells in a table. In this case,
cell values are pasted without their source distribution.
The destination cells can be booked values, unbooked values, or a mix of both. They can belong to different
accounts, as long as the accounts use the same aggregation type.
If you paste to multiple levels of the same dimension, values are pasted only to the child members in the target
cells, and the cells for parent members are calculated by aggregation. For example, if you paste to an area that
contains values for Q1, January, February, and March, then only January, February, and March are updated with
the copied values. The new value for Q1 is calculated by aggregating the month values.
When there are multiple dimensions in the table, some combinations of dimension members will be invalid as
target areas. Consider a table that has a Product Group dimension and a Geography dimension added to the rows:

184

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Table 44:
A

Geography

America

Product Group

Cell Phones

Laptops

Cell Phones

Laptops

Units Sold

Account

Canada

A valid target area, for example, is Cell Phones and Laptops for both Canada and America (cells C3-F3). This is
known as a Cartesian product of the two dimensions.
However, you cannot paste to a group of three of these cells, such as Cell Phones and Laptops for America as well
as Cell Phones for Canada (C3-E3). For that area, you can copy and paste values individually.

6.4.6 Cell References


When you copy a cell in a table and paste it to a cell in a grid that does not belong to a table, a cell reference is
created.
Cell references link the two cells so that they always have the same value; any changes to one cell will also update
the other.
To view cell references, select

Show/Hide . The cells in the table that have references are highlighted.

To break the link between cells, select the reference cell in the grid and select

Remove Reference .

When a grid cell references a cell that is no longer visible in the table, it displays a # character.

6.4.7 The Formula Bar


Use formulas to calculate values for members of the account dimension. Choose the account and then choose the
icon in the formula bar (
applied to the cell.

or

) to toggle between displaying the text value in a cell and any formula

Note
This same functionality is also available in Modeler.
To add a formula, select a cell and then place the cursor in the formula bar. Start typing the formula text. The
system suggests matches from the grid, which you can select to complete the formula. You can use references to
other accounts for your calculation.
The following arithmetic functions are also available:

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

185

Formula

Description

Abs()

Returns the absolute value of a number (the number without its sign).

Average()

Returns the average (arithmetic mean) of the arguments. Example: =average(b8,c8,d8)

Ceil()

Always rounds a number up to the nearest integer or to the nearest multiple of significance

Floor()

Always rounds a number down to the nearest integer or to the nearest multiple of significance

Max()

Returns the biggest number in a set of values.

Min()

Returns the smallest number in a set of values.

Rnd()

Rounds a number up or down to the nearest whole number.

Round()

Rounds a number to a specified number of digits. Example: =round(b2,3) - rounded to three decimal
places.

Sum()

Adds all named arguments.

6.4.8 About Input Tasks


From your table, you can create an Input task that requests colleagues to provide data.
To create an input task, you must have a table that has the following criteria:
Created on a canvas page, not a grid page.
Uses a Planning model.
Has an Organization dimension.
Has one active private version.
When your model has multiple currencies, you also need to consider the following criteria for your task:
The private version that you create uses the same currency as your source version.
The person that creates the task sees the data in the initial currency.
The assignees see data in the currency of the organization they are responsible for.
The assignee can only be assigned input tasks where the currency matches the source version; separate
tasks need to be created for separate currencies.

Related Information
Creating an Input Task [page 187]
Working with an Assigned Input Task [page 188]
Approver: Working with Returned Input Tasks [page 189]

186

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.4.8.1

Creating an Input Task

Create an input task to gather data from colleagues.

Prerequisites
You need a table with at least one active private version before you can create an input task. Also, if your model
has multiple currencies, you can use only one currency when creating the input task.

Procedure

1. From the table options, choose

(Create Input Task).

The Create Input Task dialog opens.


2. In the dialog, enter a name for the task.
3. (Optional) Enter a description.
4. To set a due date, choose

calendar.

5. To assign the task, choose

(Select Assignee).

The Select Assignees from Organization dialog lists the available organizational areas, along with the persons
responsible for them.
6. In the selection dialog, select the areas for which you want to gather data and then choose Set.
The information task will be assigned to the users listed as responsible for the areas you select.

Note
The person who creates the Input Task cannot also be included as an assignee.
7. Choose Create to make the assignments and return to the task dialog.
8. (Optional) Create a reminder for the task:
a. Choose

(Add Reminder).

b. In the Set Reminder dialog, specify how many days before the due date the reminder is to be sent.
c. Indicate whether to include the assignee's manager in the reminder.
d. Specify whether to send an email reminder in addition to a notification in the application.
e. Choose Set.
9. Choose Create.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

187

Results
The input form opens. You are set as the Approver for the task, and you can expand Assignees & Status to view
the status of the task.

Related Information
About Input Tasks [page 186]
Working with an Assigned Input Task [page 188]
Approver: Working with Returned Input Tasks [page 189]

6.4.8.2

Working with an Assigned Input Task

When a task is assigned to you, you must accept it before you can work on it or mark it as completed.

Context
You received a notification about an input task that has been assigned to you. You have the option to work on the
task or to decline it. Either way, if the Approver is not satisfied, they can send the task back to you for more work.
If you decline a task, the Approver can choose to exempt you from that task. When that happens, you will no
longer have access to the task details.

Procedure
1. To access the task panel, do one of the following:
Open Notifications and choose the task.
Choose Main Events and select the task in your Events calendar.
The panel for the input task appears on the right of the Events window. You can open the input form via
the link in the Links section, but at this point you cannot enter any data.
The input task story is displayed. Until you accept the task, you may not be able to see all the data in the task.
2. Either accept or decline the task:
Option

Description

Choose Accept Task

You can now see all the task data.


1.

188

Edit the data in the table or make other changes.

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Option

Description
2. After you have completed working with the task, choose Done.
A message is sent to the Approver.

Choose Decline Task

A message is sent to the Approver.


The Approver can reopen the task and send it back to you.

Results
Once a task has been completed, you can view the final details.

Related Information
Approver: Working with Returned Input Tasks [page 189]

6.4.8.3

Approver: Working with Returned Input Tasks

As the creator of the input task (Approver) you mark an input task as completed or provide other feedback based
on how the task is returned to you.
The input tasks are worked on by the people they have been assigned to (Assignee) or are declined. In both
situations, the task comes back to you, the Approver, and you complete the task in one of the following ways.

Assignee accepts input task


After an Assignee completes an input task, you receive a notification to that effect:
1. To access the input task, open Notifications and choose the notification.
2. To view the input from an assignee:
1. Expand Assignees & Status and locate the assignee.
2. When you are satisfied with the results, choose Approve.
The status for the assignee changes to Completed.
If you decide that the feedback is inaccurate or incomplete, you can Reject it. The system will send the input task
back to the Assignee.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

189

Assignee declines input task


An Assignee can choose to Decline the Input Task. When that happens, the Approver has the option to Exempt
that assignee's input, or to Reopen the task and send it back to the Assignee for a response.
When the Approver exempts the Assignee, the status changes to Declined, and the Assignee no longer has
permission to view the input task details.

Completing an input task


Once you have dealt with the input from all assignees, either by approving or exempting, choose Complete Input
Task to finalize the task.

6.4.9 About Version Management


The Version Management feature allows you to create and copy different versions of data and control who sees
them.
Version management (
) allows you to use the existing categories in a table to create new private versions. It
also allows you to change the category when you create a new public version.
The following are the available categories:
Actual
Budget
Planning
Forecast
Rolling Forecast
A version is a set of data implied by one or more assumptions within a category. A category can contain multiple
versions, based on different assumptions. For example, category Budget can contain an Optimistic version and a
Baseline version, and so on. Using Version Management, you can create versions within the given categories.

Note
The Actual category can contain only one public version, named Actuals. The category can have multiple
private versions.
To control who can access a version, you make them private, public, or shared:
Public versions are stored in the cube (the raw model data in the database). Access to this data is controlled
by cube and data privileges, but other than that, the data is visible to all users.
Private versions are only visible to the creator or owner of the model. You use these versions to change or
simulate plan values without making this visible to anyone else. When you publish a private version, it gets
promoted to a public version and the private version is dropped. You can decide to share such a version with
peers.

190

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Public and private versions are combined in one data view on a model. You can filter on a subset of these versions
for display.

Related Information
Creating Versions [page 191]
Publishing Versions [page 192]

6.4.9.1

Creating Versions

To create a new version, copy an existing version to a private version. You can then make any required changes to
the private version and publish it to make it public.

Context

Copying is available from the

(Version Management) options in Stories.

Procedure
1. Select a table.
2. From

(Version Management), locate the version that you want to copy and choose

(Copy).

3. In the Copy to a Private Version dialog, enter a name for the version and choose OK.
The new version is added to the table. You can now adjust the version as required.

Related Information
About Version Management [page 190]
Publishing Versions [page 192]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

191

6.4.9.2

Publishing Versions

You can use publishing to make private versions public, or to make edits to a public version.

Context

Publishing is available from the

(Version Management) options in Stories.

Procedure
1. Select a table.
2. From

(Version Management), locate the version that you want to publish and choose

(Publish).

You can either publish a private version, or publish changes that you have made to a public version.
3. In the Publish Version dialog, you have two choices:
Publish as New Version creates a new public version.
Select a category, for example Forecast, enter a name for the new version, and then choose OK.
Update an Existing Version publishes your work as an update to a public version.
If you are publishing changes to a public version, you can only choose the same version that you edited.
Choose the version, and then select OK.
If you chose to publish a new version, the version is now available under its specified category in the Version
Management menu. If you chose to update a version, the version is updated. If you published a private
version, it is no longer available in the Version Management menu.

Related Information
About Version Management [page 190]
Creating Versions [page 191]

192

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.4.9.3

Sharing Private Versions

You can share a private version of a table with other users. You can choose to make the version read-only, or allow
others to edit it.

Procedure
1. Select the table that has the private version you want to share.
2. From
(Version Management), find the private version, choose
choose either Read Only or Read and Write.

(Share Private Version), and then

3. In the dialog that appears, choose the users and then choose OK.

Results
The private version is shared and a notification is sent. The users can now modify the data.

6.4.10 Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)


A Key Performance Indicator (KPI) is a type of success metric.
When you create a KPI, you define thresholds to indicate the status of the value. For example, you can set a range
to indicate OK, warning, or critical status. The KPIs you create are evaluated regularly. For each cell whose status
worsens, you receive an alert in the Notifications center.
You can define KPIs by selecting values in a table. Members of the Accounts dimension such as Net Revenue in a
Profit and Loss model may be used for a KPI.

Related Information
Creating a Table [page 176]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

193

6.4.10.1 Creating KPIs


You can create KPIs from measures you select in a table.

Prerequisites
The story must contain a table.

Procedure
1. In the table, select one or more cells.
2. Select

(Create KPI).

The Edit KPI dialog appears.


3. Create KPI intervals.
a. Choose a level: OK, Warning, or Critical.
b. Enter threshold values.
You can enter upper and lower threshold values or just one threshold value.
c. Choose an operator: less than (<), or less than or equal to ().
d. (Optional) Enter a KPI name.
4. Select Apply Changes.

Results
The KPI is created. In the table, a green checkmark indicates a value is a KPI in OK status. A yellow diamond
indicates Warning status. A red triangle indicates Critical status. You can view or edit all KPIs in the KPI tab on the
Designer panel.

Related Information
Creating a Table [page 176]
Charting KPIs [page 195]
Editing KPIs [page 195]

194

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.4.10.2 Charting KPIs


You can view KPIs in a chart and add the chart to your story.

Prerequisites
The story must contain a table with KPIs.

Procedure
1. Select cells in the table. One or more cells must contain the KPIs you want to chart.
2. Open the Examine panel.
An automatically generated chart will appear.
3. Select a chart type that supports KPIs from the list of charts.
When you hover over a KPI value in the chart, the current status of the KPI is indicated.
4. (Optional) Add the chart to your story.
a. Select

(Copy).

b. Copy the chart to an existing page, or a new canvas page.

Note
When you copy a chart, the KPIs used to create the chart can no longer be modified.

Related Information
Creating a Table [page 176]

6.4.10.3 Editing KPIs


You can edit KPIs in the KPI List tab.

Prerequisites
The story must contain a table with KPIs.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

195

Procedure
1. On the Designer panel, select the KPI List tab.
A list of all defined KPIs appear.
2. Select

(Edit KPI).

The Edit KPI dialog appears.


3. Edit the KPI name, threshold values, or operators. To remove KPI thresholds, select

(Delete).

4. Select Apply Changes.

6.4.11 Predictive Time-Series Forecasting


You can run predictive time-series forecasts on your data within a story grid.
A predictive time-series forecast runs an algorithm on historical data to predict future values for a specific
measure in a planning model. The forecasted values can be later used in the planning process. The prediction is
only applied to the specific selected measure, however booked data will be overwritten if you choose to run a
forecast over a cell containing historical data. Other data in the version will not be impacted.
While running a predictive time-series forecast, you can determine the time range for the prediction and the past
time periods to use as historical data.
You currently cannot run predictive forecasts on the following:
Calculated measures
Public versions
Formulas
Blended datasets

6.4.11.1 Running a Predictive Time-Series Forecast


Using data from a planning model, you can run a time-series forecast on a single cell in a story grid.

Prerequisites
You will need planning rights and a planning license to run a predictive time-series forecast.

Context
Make sure you are working with a private version of the data when running a predictive time-series forecast.

196

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Procedure
1. Open or create a new story, and add the planning model to a story grid.
In the Builder panel, add a time dimension if none is currently included as a Column.
2. Select a single cell that can be edited, is within the grid, and belongs to a private version from the Dataview
and select the

(Forecast) icon.

The Set Predictive Forecast dialog is displayed.


3. Under Forecast, specify the period you want to forecast.
The Forecast by value indicates the time granularity available for the predictive forecast. This value is
consistent with the lowest granularity available in the model. Select Show more options to see more settings
for the forecast. Use Past Period From specifies the starting point for the predictive forecast calculation.
Reference Period indicates the date of the last booked data for the context you are forecasting.
4. When you are ready to run the predictive forecast, select Preview.
The time-series forecast is displayed in the Preview Predictive Forecast dialog. The preview contains the past
actual values together with predicted values displayed as a graph and a table row. Upper and lower limits for
the confidence interval are also provided for the graph. The table row contains the predicted values that will
be added to the story grid.
5. To populate the story grid with the forecasted values, select OK
A message indicates that the forecasted values were added to the grid.

6.4.12 Setting the Cutover Date


Set the cutover date for a Forecast or Rolling Forecast layout to distinguish between actual and forecast data in
your table.

Prerequisites
The table in your story should have a Forecast or Rolling Forecast version. If it does not have one, you can use
Version Management to create one. For more information, see About Version Management [page 190].
In the Designer panel, choose the Layout tab and then select Forecast or Rolling Forecast.

Procedure
1. From your table, select

(New) and then select Set Cutover Date.

2. In the Set Cutover Date dialog, choose one of the following options:
Specific Date: Enter a date in the format MMM D(D), YYYY for example, Apr 25, 2015 or May 4, 2016
or select a date from the calendar.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

197

Current Date: This is the default choice.


Last Booked Actuals: This means the latest date of data entered for the Actuals versions.
Generally, you cannot enter a cutover date later than the current date. However, if you have selected the Last
Booked Actuals option and the data in your model is for a later date than the current date, an exception is
made and the cutover date is set for future.
3. Choose Set.

Results
The table now shows a line that changes color or pattern at the cutover date.

6.5

Story Pages

You can add multiple pages to your story to help you explore and present your data.
A story page can be a blank canvas or a grid. Use a blank canvas to lay out tables and charts, or use a grid to work
with numbers and formulas on a sheet.
On the page tab bar, you can select a page's drop-down menu to delete, rename, move, or hide that page.
To move a page, you can drag and drop the tab to the desired location, or from the drop-down menu, select Move
left or Move right to move the page one level in either direction.
Hiding a page makes it visible only to users that have edit rights and not visible in present mode. To hide a page,
from the page's drop-down menu, select Set as hidden. You can tell if a page has been set as hidden because its
name is struck-through. To make a hidden page visible, from the page's drop-down menu, select Set as visible.

198

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.6

Creating Linked Dimensions

You can create links between dimensions in multiple models.

Context
You can use linked dimensions to create blended charts that display data from multiple models.
Linked dimensions also allow you to create filters that simultaneously update all charts that include linked data.
Filters on linked dimensions can be used at the story, page, and linked analysis level.

Note
The ID of a dimension must match the ID of the dimension it is linked to.
Chart filters do not affect linked dimensions, because they are only applied to a single chart.
Some dimension links may not result in filters being applied to all charts due to limitations in translating
filters applied to one model to meaningful filters on a second model.

Procedure
1. Open the Link Dimensions dialog. There are two ways to access the dialog:
Select

(Link Dimensions) from the menu bar.

Note
All linked dimensions used in the story will be listed. To create a new link select Start a new model link.
Select a chart. In the Builder tab, expand the Data Source list. Select

(Link Dimensions).

The Link Dimensions dialog appears.


2. Select a model from the list of models included in your story, or select Add Model to search through the
models you have access to.
3. Choose one or more dimensions.

Note
When you hover over a dimension, you can preview the dimension values.
4. Choose a second model and select one or more dimensions.

Note
The ID of a dimension must match the ID of the dimension it is linked to, or when a filter is created, no
information may be returned.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

199

5. Select Set.

Results
Linked dimensions appear in the dialog.

Related Information
Editing Linked Dimensions [page 200]
Creating Blended Charts [page 152]
Creating a Linked Analysis [page 173]
Applying a Story or Page Filter [page 202]

6.7

Editing Linked Dimensions

You can edit linked dimensions.

Procedure

1. Select

(Link Dimensions) from the menu bar.

The Link Dimensions dialog appears. All linked dimensions added to the story are listed.
2. Choose a linked dimension and select

(Edit Link) beside the link.

3. Change the models or dimensions used, and then select Set.

Results
All charts that include the linked dimension will update simultaneously. In the Builder tab, linked dimensions are
indicated by the

200

(Link) icon.

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Related Information
Creating Linked Dimensions [page 199]
Creating Blended Charts [page 152]
Creating a Linked Analysis [page 173]
Applying a Story or Page Filter [page 202]

6.8

Story and Page Filters

Use story and page filters to narrow the scope of your analysis.
The Story Filter allows you to apply filters for all charts in a Story that are based on the same model. The Page
Filter is the same as a Story Filter, but applies to just one page in a story.
You can also apply a filter to a single chart. See the related links.

Note
Page and story filters are enabled only after you've added at least one chart to your story.

Effects of multiple filters


Changes you make to a story or page filter affect related filters in the same story or page.
For example, when you change a page filter value, any related page filters on the same page are updated
automatically. If you have both Country and Region filters on a page, and you change the Country filter value from
All to Sweden, the Region filter updates to show only regions within Sweden. All other region names are hidden.
You can select Show Inactive Values to display those hidden values.
Story filter changes affect other story filters in the same story and page filters on any pages in the story.

Note
Some filters are not affected by other filter changes:
Range filters
Hyperlink filters
Multi-dimension filters (filters that apply to a combination of dimensions)

Related Information
Chart Filters [page 147]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

201

Applying a Story or Page Filter [page 202]


Linking to another Page, Story, or External URL [page 171]

6.8.1 Applying a Story or Page Filter


Prerequisites
Page and story filters are enabled only after you've added at least one chart to your story.

Procedure
1. Apply a filter in one of these ways:
For a story filter, select
select

(Story Filter) on the top navigation panel. In the resultant navigation panel,

(Add Story Filter).

For a page filter, select

Input Control

on the top navigation panel.

2. Select the dimension you want to filter from the list. To create a filter based on a dimension from another
dataset, select the name of the current dataset to see the list of available datasets and then select the name
of the dataset you want.

Note
Certain dimensions, for example date dimensions, can be filtered either by choosing members from a list
or by selecting a range. To filter by choosing members, choose the option Filter by Member. To filter
dimensions by selecting a range, choose the option Filter by Range.
3. To change the display information for the filter, select
one of the Show Description options:

to expand the Available Members menu and select

Description
ID
ID and Description
When you change how the dimension information is displayed, the corresponding tooltip is updated.
4. To display dimension members that don't contain any data, turn the Unbooked option On.
If the Unbooked option is Off only those members that contain data will be displayed. For example, if you are
filtering a currency dimension and only the Euro and US dollar members contain data, the rest of the currency
members will not be displayed.
5. In the Available Members area of the Set filters dialog, select the checkbox beside the members you want to
filter.
You can use the Search function to find the members you want, select All Members to automatically select all
members in the dimension, or select the Exclude selected members checkbox to exclude the members you
select.

202

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Note
When you select a member node in a hierarchy, all of its children are automatically selected.
6. Ensure that the members in the Selected Members area are correct.
7. To filter certain dimensions by selecting a range, choose the option Filter by Range instead of Filter by
Member.
Configure the filter range as follows:
If you want viewers of your story to specify a single value within a range instead of a range of values,
expand the Multiple Selections list, and select Single Value Slider.
Select end points for your range, either by dragging the sliders on the range bar, or by selecting end
points from the drop-down lists. Select Add a New Range if you want to define additional ranges. Note
that the single value slider is not available if you define more than one range.
For a single value slider, the end points you select represent the maximum and minimum values that
viewers of your story will be able to select, using the page filter or input control.
Otherwise, the end points you select represent the initial ranges that viewers of your story will see in
the page filter or input control. Users can redefine the ranges using the page filter or input control.

Note
By default, only the range between the end points you initially define is selectable in the page filter or
input control. If you select Display entire range slider, viewers will be able to select areas outside of the
initial ranges you define.
If you want your range to extend to the start or end of the data set, even if the start or end values change
when the data is refreshed, choose Start or End instead of discrete values.
For date dimensions, also define the granularity (for example, year or month).
8. Choose whether you want viewers of the story to be allowed to specify the effective filter values from a list of
filter values that you define. You can choose to allow a single filter value, multiple filter values, or hierarchical
multiple filter values.
If you allow viewers to specify filter values, they can either toggle on and off each filter value (if you chose the
Multiple Selection option or the Multiple Selection Hierarchy option), or select a single filter value (if you chose
the Single Selection option). The Multiple Selection Hierarchy option allows users to select children nodes of
specific dimension members.
9. Select OK to create the filter.
10. If you created a page filter, you can resize it to convert it to an input control.
An input control displays the filter values with check boxes or radio buttons, to let users experiment with
different filter settings.

Related Information
Chart Filters [page 147]
Changing Story and Page Filter Values [page 205]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

203

6.8.2 Converting a Story Filter to a Page Filter


Convert a story filter to a page filter if you want the filter to apply only to the charts on one story page.

Context
After creating a story filter, the filter appears in the filter bar below the toolbar. You can convert a story filter to a
page filter on a canvas page.

Procedure
1. With a canvas page open, select a story filter from the filter bar.
2. Select Add Control to Page.
The new filter appears as an object on the canvas page. You can resize the filter object by selecting it and
dragging its sizing handles. If you enlarge the filter object, it becomes an input control that you can use to
select filter values.
For example, if the filter is set to allow viewers to change the filter values, and to allow multiple filter values,
you can enlarge the filter object on the page so that the filter values appear in a list, with check boxes. Then
you can change filter values by selecting and deselecting the check boxes.

6.8.3 Converting a Page Filter to a Story Filter


You can convert a page filter to a story filter if you want the filter to apply to all pages in the story.

Procedure
Select the page filter twice, and select Add Control to Filter Bar.

204

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.8.4 Changing Story and Page Filter Values


When viewing a story that contains a filter, you may be able to change the filter values.

Context
A story's creator can specify whether viewers of the story will be allowed to change the filter values. If viewers are
not allowed to change filter values, the following steps do not apply.

Procedure
1. With a story open, select an existing story filter from the filter bar below the toolbar, or select a page filter on a
canvas page.
The filter values are shown.
Note: If the page filter has been enlarged to become an input control, the filter values are shown in the input
control.
2. Change filter values as follows:
Member filters (filters defined by selecting members from a list):
If the story's creator has allowed multiple filter value selection, you can toggle on and off the filter values.
If the story's creator has allowed only single filter value selection, you can choose which filter value you
want to apply. You can also search for member names by selecting

(Search) above the list of values.

Range filters (filters defined by selecting ranges of values):


If the story's creator has allowed multiple filter value selection, you can toggle on and off the filter ranges
using the check boxes or by selecting or deselecting ranges on the range bar. If the story's creator has
allowed only single filter value selection, you can choose which filter range you want to apply (if multiple
ranges are defined). If you have edit permission, or if the filter has been converted to an input control, you
can also redefine the ranges.

Note
From the Show/Hide menu, you can show or hide the following elements from an input control, story filter,
or page filter:
Select all option
Icon
Title

Related Information
Applying a Story or Page Filter [page 202]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

205

6.9

Examining a Chart or Data

You can examine the data behind a chart, or view a chart based on selected data.
While designing your story, you can open the Examine panel to explore your data and charts:
Select a chart. The data that makes up the chart is shown in the Examine panel. If you filter the chart by
selecting data points or dragging a rectangle around data points, only the selected data is shown in the
Examine panel.
Select a table, or select cells within the table. A visualization based on the selected data in the table is shown
in the Examine panel. You can also change the visualization type, or select the
such as sorting and ranking.

icon to apply operations

Enable
(Synchronize Visualization Automatically) to update the chart as you select cells (you can disable this
option by selecting the icon again).
If the Synchronize Visualization Automatically option is disabled, select
the chart manually.

(Synchronize Visualization) to update

If you want to save charts and tables from the Examine panel, first copy them to story pages.

6.10 Designer Panel


The Designer panel allows you to access the builder panel to create charts, format pages and tiles, scale charts,
and create a link analysis.
The following table provides more information on the things you can do from the Designer Panel.
Table 45:
Task

More information

Create a chart

Charts [page 125]

Format a story

Formatting a Page [page 207]

Scale charts

Scaling Charts [page 172]

206

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

6.11 Formatting a Page


You can format the general appearance of a page in a story.

Procedure
1. Open the page of the story to format and select the Designer panel on the top navigation panel.
2. From the drop-down list, select Formatting.
3. Select page formatting options as needed.
Table 46:
Formatting Option

Description

Background Color

Select a background color for the page.

Show Grid

Select ON to display grid lines on the page, or OFF to hide grid lines.

Fix Page Size

Select On to enter the page width in pixels.

Related Information
Formatting a Tile [page 207]
Creating and Formatting a Group [page 210]

6.12 Formatting a Tile


You can format the appearance of a tile in a story.

Procedure
1. Select a tile on a page.
2. From the drop-down list, select Formatting.
The Formatting panel displays options available for the selected tile type. Some options may not be available
to all users.
3. Select tile formatting options as needed.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

207

Table 47:
Tile Type
Chart

Formatting Options

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Arrange: Change the order of the chart on the canvas.


Available options:

(Send Backward)

(Send to Back)

(Bring Forward)

(Bring to Front)

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Chart Properties:
Available options when the chart is selected:

Select whether this chart follows any applied chart scaling rules.

Select the label font and size.

Select whether to display all chart labels, or to detect when labels will overlap, and dis
play only some labels.

Rotate the chart if desired.

Available options when a bar chart or waterfall chart data-point is selected:

Select the fill color for the element.

Available options when the chart legend is selected:

Select how to align the legend in relation to the chart.

Select the fill color for lines or other chart elements.

Fonts:
Available options when the chart is selected:

Select whether the Text Selection change applies to just the axis label, data label, or leg
end, or to all the text labels.

Pinned Visualization

Table

208

Select the Font, Size, and Color.

Select the STYLE.

Hyperlink: Link to another story, page, or external URL from this tile.

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Chart Properties: Select the label font and size.

Hyperlink: Link to another story, page, or external URL from this tile.

Font: Select the font size, color, and type, and text justification.

Formatting: Select how you want to display numbers in the table.

Cell: Merge or split cells, apply fill color to individual cells, and add new rows or columns.

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Tile Type
Geo Map

Image

Pictogram

Text

Clock

RSS Reader

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Formatting Options

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Geo Map Properties: Select whether to apply filters.

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Image Properties: Select how to handle image scaling.

Contain: The entire image is contained in the frame, maintaining the image's aspect ra
tio.

Cover: The image is scaled to cover or fill the entire frame, maintaining the image's as
pect ratio. Some parts of the image may be cropped.

Stretched: The entire image is stretched to fit in the entire frame.

Pan: The image is scaled to fill the horizontal dimension of the frame. The bottom of the
image may be cropped.

Hyperlink: Link to another story, page, or external URL from this tile.

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Pictogram Properties: Select the fill color and line color for the pictogram.

Hyperlink: Link to another story, page, or external URL from this tile.

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Text Properties:

Select the font style, size, and color.

Select the paragraph justification.

Add bulleted or numbered lists to text.

Hyperlink: Link to another story, page, or external URL from this tile.

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Clock Properties:

Display a company logo.

Select the time and date display format.

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Rss Properties:

Select the colors for the title and text.

Select the font size, type, and style.

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

209

Tile Type
Input Control

Value Driver Tree

Formatting Options

Color: Select colors for the input control's Header and Content text, and Background.

Font Style: Select fonts for the input control's Header and Content text.

Selection: Select colors for the input control's selection list (the check boxes or radio but
tons).

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Arrange: Change the order of the value driver tree on the canvas.
Available options:

(Send Backward)

(Send to Back)

(Bring Forward)

(Bring to Front)

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Header: Select a node in the value driver tree to show this option, and choose a color from
the Node color list to change its header color.

Related Information
Formatting a Page [page 207]
Creating and Formatting a Group [page 210]

6.13 Creating and Formatting a Group


You can create and format a group in a story.

Context
Creating groups allows you flexibility when creating a page layout.
When a group is selected, it can be treated as a single tile. For example, you could create a group from two charts
and your company logo, and then move the group to a different location on the canvas. Formatting can be applied
to the group. You can also move the group to the front or the back of the canvas.

210

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Note
Groups can overlap other tiles or groups on the canvas.
Formatting can still be applied to individual tiles within a group. The alignment, size, and position of a tile within a
group can also be modified.

Note
Groups do not affect filters.

Procedure
1. CTRL + Click multiple tiles, or marquee select multiple tiles, and then select

(Group).

2. From the drop-down list, select Formatting.


3. Apply formatting options to the group.
Table 48:
Formatting Option

Description

Background Color

Select a background color for the group.

Order Items

Move the group from the front to the back of the canvas.
Available options:

(Send Backward)

(Send to Back)

(Bring Forward)

(Bring to Front)

4. Select a tile in the group and apply actions as needed.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

211

Table 49:
Actions

Description

Order Items

Change the position of a tile from the front to the back of the group.
Available options:

Alignment

(Send Backward)

(Send to Back)

(Bring Forward)

(Bring to Front)

Change the alignment of a tile inside the group.


Available options:

(Duplicate)

(Align Left)

(Align Center)

(Align Right)

(Align Top)

(Align Middle)

(Align Bottom)

Create a duplicate of the selected tile.

Note
The duplicate appears on top of the original tile. The size and position of the new tile should be
changed in order to see both tiles.

(Expand)
Size and Position

Expand the tile to fill the group container.


Add coordinates to change the position and size of a tile in the group container.

W: Width of the tile in pixels.

H: Height of the tile in pixels.

X: Horizontal position of the tile in pixels.

Y: Vertical position of the tile in pixels.

: Angle for rotation.

5. Apply additional formatting options, specific to the tile type, as needed.

212

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Table 50:
Tile Type
Chart

Formatting Options

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Chart Properties:
Available options when the chart is selected:

Select whether this chart follows any applied chart scaling rules.

Select the label font and size.

Select whether to display all chart labels, or to detect when labels will overlap, and dis
play only some labels.

Rotate the chart if desired.

Available options when a bar chart or waterfall chart data-point is selected:

Select the fill color for the element.

Available options when the chart legend is selected:

Select how to align the legend in relation to the chart.

Select the fill color for lines or other chart elements.

Fonts:
Available options when the chart is selected:

Select whether the Text Selection change applies to just the axis label, data label, or leg
end, or to all the text labels.

Pinned Visualization

Table

Geo Map

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Select the Font, Size, and Color.

Select the STYLE.

Hyperlink: Link to another story, page, or external URL from this tile.

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Chart Properties: Select the label font and size.

Hyperlink: Link to another story, page, or external URL from this tile.

Font: Select the font size, color, and type, and text justification.

Formatting: Select how you want to display numbers in the table.

Cell: Merge or split cells, apply fill color to individual cells, and add new rows or columns.

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Geo Map Properties: Select whether to apply filters.

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

213

Tile Type
Image

Pictogram

Text

Clock

RSS Reader

Input Control

214

Formatting Options

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Image Properties: Select how to handle image scaling.

Contain: The entire image is contained in the frame, maintaining the image's aspect ra
tio.

Cover: The image is scaled to cover or fill the entire frame, maintaining the image's as
pect ratio. Some parts of the image may be cropped.

Stretched: The entire image is stretched to fit in the entire frame.

Pan: The image is scaled to fill the horizontal dimension of the frame. The bottom of the
image may be cropped.

Hyperlink: Link to another story, page, or external URL from this tile.

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Pictogram Properties: Select the fill color and line color for the pictogram.

Hyperlink: Link to another story, page, or external URL from this tile.

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Text Properties:

Select the font style, size, and color.

Select the paragraph justification.

Add bulleted or numbered lists to text.

Hyperlink: Link to another story, page, or external URL from this tile.

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Clock Properties:

Display a company logo.

Select the time and date display format.

Background Color: Select a background color for this tile.

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

Rss Properties:

Select the colors for the title and text.

Select the font size, type, and style.

Color: Select colors for the input control's Header and Content text, and Background.

Font Style: Select fonts for the input control's Header and Content text.

Selection: Select colors for the input control's selection list (the check boxes or radio but
tons).

Widget: Select data exploration and navigation targets for this tile. They are added to the
(More Actions) menu when your story is used in the Digital Boardroom.

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Results

A group is created and formatting is applied. To remove a group, select the group and select

(Ungroup).

Related Information
Formatting a Page [page 207]
Formatting a Tile [page 207]

6.14 Previewing a Story


View your story in Present mode to see how it will appear to viewers.
At any time while designing your story, you can switch to the Present view to see how your story will appear when
it's presented, or when users with view-only privileges view your story.
Select the Present button to turn on the Present view mode. The story is displayed full-screen, without toolbars.
To switch out of Present view, hover at the top of the page selector bar and select the Present button again.

6.15 Exporting to PDF


You can export a story to a PDF file.

Procedure
1. With a story open, select Save As File from the toolbar.
2. Choose PDF from the File Type list.
3. Choose which pages you'd like to export.
You can also include an appendix containing the story's filter settings.
4. If your story contains any grid pages, choose whether you'd like to split the grid into pages.
5. Select OK, and then specify a file name and location.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

215

Results
Note
The sizes of the pages in the PDF file are determined by the visible content on the story pages in the
application. If you want to print the PDF file to paper, you may need to use scaling options in your PDF
viewing software.
The PDF file shows exactly what appears on your story pages at the moment when you export them.
Therefore, if any charts in your story are scrollable, only the visible parts of those charts are included in the
PDF file.

6.16 Collaboration for Stories


You can collaborate on a story by creating a discussion for the story.
Create a discussion for a story by selecting Share New Discussion on the navigation panel. The title and
description for the discussion are automatically generated using the name of the story. Select your participants
and choose Create to create the discussion.
Select the Pin to Home screen icon on the navigation panel to pin your story to your Home screen.
When a story is pinned to your Home screen, only the first visualization is shown on the story tile. Select Tile
Settings, then Go to <Story Name> to edit the story.

Note
You can pin stories to your Home screen, but you cannot share your Home screen with others.

216

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Stories

Digital Boardroom

The Digital Boardroom is a place to design a real-time, interactive boardroom presentation by combining your
stories with agenda items.

Tasks
Preparing Stories for the Digital Boardroom [page 219]
Creating and Editing an Agenda [page 220]

Related Information
About the Digital Boardroom [page 217]

7.1

About the Digital Boardroom

Use the Digital Boardroom to transform your executive meetings. Replace static presentations and stale
information with interactive discussions based on real data allowing you to make fact-based decisions to drive
your business.
With the Digital Boardroom you can:
Create a fluid presentation that allows you to easily jump on and off script at any point.
Find answers to your questions by exploring directly on live data to discover relationships and drill into details.
In the Digital Boardroom area, you can perform the following tasks:
Table 51:
Task

More Information

Create a new agenda.


Choose
Launch an agenda in
Boardroom Mode.

(New Agenda) and enter a name for your agenda.

Select an agenda and choose

(Boardroom).

Edit an existing agenda.


Select an agenda and choose

(Edit Agenda).

Select an agenda and choose

(Delete Agenda).

Delete an agenda.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Digital Boardroom

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

217

Task

More Information

Share an agenda with oth


ers to view in the Board
room mode.

Select an agenda and choose

(Share Agenda).

Note
The person you share with also needs permission to view the stories linked to from the
agenda. Share your stories from the Stories area or assign read access permissions on multi
ple stories at once from the Files area.

Add data exploration and


navigation to your stories.

Set Widget options while formatting a story in the Designer panel of the Stories area.

Boardroom Mode
The boardroom mode is optimized for a three-screen display with touch capabilities. A single-screen device can
also be used that allows you to switch between the three views of your presentation.

Note
The Digital Boardoom can be used with both touch and non-touch displays. Check the hardware and software
requirements under System Requirements and Technical Prerequisites [page 287].

The center screen is the starting point and lists all agenda items in your presentation. Agenda items break up your
presentation into parts so different presenters can cover specific topics, each with their own stories and data.

218

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Digital Boardroom

Related Information
Preparing Stories for the Digital Boardroom [page 219]
Creating and Editing an Agenda [page 220]

7.2

Preparing Stories for the Digital Boardroom

Before adding stories to your boardroom agenda, go to the Stories area of the application and optimize their
display and navigation for the Digital Boardroom.

Format Your Story Page


The optimal size for each story page displayed in the Digital Boardroom is 1920 px wide. To set the page size:
1. Open the Designer panel, and select Formatting from the drop-down list.
2. Set Fix Page Size to On and set the width to 1920 px.
3. Select Snap to Nearest Grid.

Enable Data Exploration

While presenting a story tile in the Digital Boardroom, you can launch the Explorer from the
(More Actions)
menu. The Explorer allows you to change measures, dimensions, and chart types to further analyze your data.

To enable the Explorer:


1. Open the Designer panel, and select Formatting from the drop-down list.
2. In the Widget section, select Open in Explorer.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Digital Boardroom

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

219

Add Navigation Links


The Digital Boardroom allows you to display different story pages across three screens. Since your story may
have more than three pages, you can navigate to additional pages or entirely different agenda sub-items from the
(More Actions) menu.

To add navigation links:


1. Open the Designer panel, and select Formatting from the drop-down list.
2. In the Widget section, select Navigate to.
3. In the Navigation Target dialog, select a navigation option:
Select Navigate to Agenda Sub Item to create a link to any agenda sub-item.
Otherwise, deselect this option and assign story pages to the three screens of the boardroom mode to be
presented by your link.
You can select a completely different agenda from the one currently being presented by that story tile. You can
also set the display behavior for single-screen displays.

Related Information
Creating and Editing an Agenda [page 220]
About the Digital Boardroom [page 217]

7.3

Creating and Editing an Agenda

Design your agenda for your boardroom presentation by adding meeting information, agenda items, and linking
stories as pages in a navigation structure.
In the Digital Boardroom area, choose
choose

220

(New Agenda) to create a new agenda or select an existing agenda and

(Edit Agenda).

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Digital Boardroom

Design your Agenda


The parts and flow of your presentation are determined by how you design your agenda. An agenda consists of
one or more agenda items that break up your presentation into different topics. The elements of an agenda you
can edit are as follows:

1. Enter an overall title, date, and location of your presentation.


2. Enter the title and sub-title of your first agenda item.
3. Select the story page that will serve as an overview summary for that first agenda item. This overview loads in
the left overview screen.
4. Enter the presenter's name, job role, and scheduled time for that first agenda item.
5. Add a sub-item to an agenda item to link additional story pages to the three-screen display. Add more subitems by choosing

(New).

6. Add more agenda items by choosing

(New).

Both agenda items and sub-items can be reordered by dragging them to a new position. The background of the
entire presentation can also be changed to a light or dark theme from the Preferences (
Test your presentation as you make edits by saving your changes with
mode with

) dialog.

(Save) and launching the boardroom

(Boardroom).

Add Agenda Sub-items


When adding a new sub-item to an agenda item, the Agenda Sub Item dialog is displayed. Here you can assign
story pages to the three screens of the boardroom mode to present visualizations and data:
Overview Screen The left screen. Link a story page that best summarizes the sub-item, such as a
visualization that provides a summary view of the data.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Digital Boardroom

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

221

Content Screen The center screen. Link a story page to drive the main point of discussion for that sub-item.
Context Screen The right screen. Link a story page that provides context for the data in the content screen,
where details can be drilled into.
Design your agenda in a left-to-right manner for a natural flow through your presentation. You can make changes
to the linked story pages by choosing

(Link).

Related Information
Preparing Stories for the Digital Boardroom [page 219]
About the Digital Boardroom [page 217]

222

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Digital Boardroom

Files

Organize stories, input forms, boardroom agendas, and other content such as uploaded files from the Files area.
Files are displayed as lists in one of the following view categories: Public, Shared, Teams, Private, and Favorites
(items selected as Favorites appear in the Favorites list in addition to the source list). Input Forms are available in
their own view.

Tasks
Uploading a File [page 223]
Sharing a File [page 224]
Assigning Permissions [page 224]
Managing Files [page 225]

8.1

Uploading a File

You can upload files from your own computer to SAP BusinessObjects Cloud.

Prerequisites
To upload a file, you must be in the Public or Private view in the Files area.

Procedure

1. Choose

(Upload File) on the toolbar.

2. Choose Select Source File, browse through your file system to locate the file, and then select Upload File.
A confirmation message is displayed when the file is successfully uploaded; the new file is then visible in the
list.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Files

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

223

8.2

Sharing a File

You can share files with other people or teams.

Procedure

1. Select a file and choose

Share .

2. In the Document Share Settings dialog, specify to share either with all users or for selected users and teams.
Then choose OK.
The shared file is then visible in your Shared list and that of the users you shared with.

Related Information
Assigning Permissions [page 224]

8.3

Assigning Permissions

You can set specific permissions for a file or folder and apply these rights to other people or teams.

Context
Public access to a file is initially read-only access; only the owner can make changes to a file until the access rights
have been changed. You can grant the following permissions to a resource that you have created:
Full Access (includes all other permissions)
Read Access
Update Access
Delete Access
In addition, the following creation permissions are applicable for folders:
New Documents
New Folders

Note
Access rights on a folder can be propagated to sub-folders and files.

224

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Files

Procedure

1. Select a file and choose

Assign Permissions .

2. In the Assign Permissions dialog, set the access rights that you wish to grant for this file either for all users
or for selected users and teams. Then choose Assign.

Next Steps
In the Files area, every user has a private folder. Files in your private folder are not accessible to other users and
must be shared first. To share, select a file and choose

Share .

Note
A file you share with others can't be further shared by those users.

Related Information
Sharing a File [page 224]

8.4

Managing Files

Organize stories, input forms, boardroom agendas, and other content such as uploaded files.
File Management features, available from the toolbar or from the

(Manage) menu, include:

Creating folders to organize files


Moving, copying, deleting, and renaming files
Maintaining a list of favorites

Use Folders to Organize Your Files


You can make folders in either the Public or Private areas by selecting the New Folder icon on the toolbar.
You can assign permissions to folders in the same way as for files. In the case of folders, you can also determine if
the selected users can make new documents in the folder and can make new sub-folders in the folder. A checkbox
is also available to apply the settings to the contents of the folder (Apply to Subfolders and Documents).

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Files

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

225

Move or Copy Files to Folders


You can add files to folders either by copying (toolbar icon) or moving (option on the Manage menu).
The process is the same when copying or moving files: the Copy To/Move To dialog shows all available folders in a
hierarchy. Navigate through the hierarchy, select the target folder, and then select Copy.
The difference between copying and moving is that Copy creates an additional copy of the source file and Move
removes the source file from the original location.
Note that a warning is displayed if a file with the same name already exists in the target location. In this case, you
can choose to overwrite the target file or cancel and rename one of the files, using the Rename option of the
Manage menu.

Favorites
You can add a file directly to the favorites list (or remove it from the list) simply by selecting the star in the
Favorite column. If the star next to a file is selected (black), it will also appear in the Favorites list.
Alternatively, you can do the same thing by selecting a file, using the checkbox and selecting Add To/Remove
From Favorites from the drop-down Manage menu.

Deleting Files
Depending on the access rights that have been defined for a file, the Delete option of the toolbar may be active
when you select one or more files in the file list.
To delete a file or folder, simply select one or more items in the list and click the Delete icon on the toolbar. After
selecting Delete, a warning prompt is displayed requiring you to confirm your action.

Related Information
Uploading a File [page 223]
Sharing a File [page 224]
Assigning Permissions [page 224]

226

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Files

Events

Manage your projects by creating events and assigning tasks that can be monitored in the calendar.
To help manage your project you can:
Create events based on processes and event categories.
Create tasks, assigning them to users and setting due dates.
Discuss events and tasks with your colleagues using the Collaboration panel (
Monitor progress using the Time Panel (

).

).

You can also import and export events to synchronize them with other applications.

Tasks
Creating Events [page 227]
Creating Tasks [page 228]
Importing Events [page 231]
Exporting Events [page 232]

Related Information
Monitoring Events and Tasks [page 229]

9.1

Creating Events

Create events in the planning calendar and select the users who will work on the related activities.

Context
Note
You can define additional color-coded categories and processes for events from the Events Actions menu.
Within each category any number of user-defined processes can be created.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Events

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

227

Procedure
1. Choose the New toolbar button (+ symbol) and select New Event.
2. Select the Category and optionally a Process for the event.
3. Select all Assignees who will be required for the whole event using the Select Users feature.
You can then assign people from this group of users to individual tasks as you create the tasks. By default, the
Owner of the event is the user who creates it. You can change this later to ensure that notifications are
addressed to the right person to the real task owner, not the creator.
4. You can add Links from the event to any existing object (such as a story or a file) in the application.
5. You can set up Reminders for the event (in relation to the specified due date) to trigger notification messages
to all users who are assigned to tasks that are not yet complete.

9.2

Creating Tasks

Create tasks for each event and assign users to the task.

Context
You can add a task directly to an event by choosing the Related Tasks + symbol or by choosing the New toolbar
button (+ symbol) and selecting New Task.

Procedure
1. Assign one or more users to the task.
The people you assign to a task are firstly, the assignees (with responsibility for completing the task) and
secondly, if required, the reviewers and final reviewers.
2. As with Events, you can add Links to existing objects and you can also set up Reminders for the task.

228

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Events

9.3

Monitoring Events and Tasks

You can monitor the progress of events and tasks in the calendar or view a timeline showing all events for a single
process.

Workflow
The workflow functionality is interactive:
1. The task owner assigns a task to the assignee who then receives a notification.
2. The assignee must accept (or decline) the task.
3. When the work is complete the assignee clicks Done. This updates the status of the task and triggers further
notifications, either to the users who are assigned as reviewers or to the event owner, as appropriate.

Monitoring
You can choose to display events and tasks in either of two formats:
Calendar view (tabular).
Linear preview (timeline) for all events and tasks which belong to a single process.
You can identify the task status easily:
Tasks that are in progress are displayed on screen as an empty circle
Completed tasks appear as a filled circle

Using Filters
You can use the Filter feature to reduce the amount of information shown. Filters are available for:
Events
Tasks
Roles (Creator, Assignee, Reviewer, Approver)
Categories and Processes
The filter applies to both the calendar and timeline views.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Events

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

229

Configuring the Timeline


You can configure how much information is displayed on the timeline as follows:
1. Select Timeline to make the timeline visible and then choose Edit Timeline.
2. Set the number of days to show and select the categories you want to see.

9.4

Explore Reminders

You can create reminder notifications to be automatically sent to people who are assigned to tasks. The reminder
is sent either as a message within the application or as an email sent to the user's email address.
Types of reminder:
Event Reminder
Task Reminder
On-the-fly reminder
Reminder messages are sent the specified number of days before the due date and can be sent as either (or both)
on-screen notification messages or emails (the user mail address must be defined in User Management).

9.5

Collaboration for Events and Tasks

There are many options for collaborating on the plan with colleagues: you can discuss the plan within the group of
contributors, chat with colleagues, and upload resources to share with the group.

Discussion
You can use the collaboration features in Events, firstly, by choosing the Discuss With Group button in the event,
or by contributing to an existing discussion by choosing the Collaboration button, which either displays the
Collaboration panel or hides it if it is already visible.

Chat
When the Collaboration panel is open, you can drill down into one of the open discussions and contribute to the
discussion using chat. The history of chat contributions is maintained with the event.

230

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Events

Sharing Attachments
In addition to chat contributions, you can use the options available from the New menu to attach files to the
discussion (files that have either already been uploaded or files that are saved locally).

Manage Collaboration
Within Collaboration, you can also use the options of the Manage Collaboration menu. From this menu, you can
directly communicate (using chat) with individual participants in the discussion; the menu also gives you access
to any related content that has been added to the discussion.

9.6

Importing Events

You can import Business Process Flow events (steps) from the SAP Business Planning and Consolidation
application (BPC).

Prerequisites
To do this, you need to have access rights to the source BPC system, and you will be required to log in to this
application at the beginning of the import process.

Procedure
1. Choose the Import BPF button on the toolbar, select the BPC system, and log in to the application.
2. Select the Environment, Model, and BPF information you require and choose Import to begin the import
process.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Events

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

231

9.7

Exporting Events

Follow these steps to export events.

Context
You can export events in calendar exchange format (iCalendar).

Procedure
Select the event and click the Export button on the toolbar.

Results
This downloads the event and saves it as a file in your local Downloads directory. It is saved in iCalendar (*.ics)
format which can then be sent by mail, for example, to other colleagues and reused in other calendar applications.

232

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Events

10 Security

You can find information about SAP BusinessObjects Cloud user administration, roles, and security in this section.
As a system administrator for SAP BusinessObjects Cloud, you create users and assign them to predefined or
newly created roles. You can also carry out maintenance tasks related to users and roles as well as monitor
activities and data.

Tasks:
Users [page 233]
Creating Roles [page 238]
Approving Requests [page 242]
Data Changes [page 244]
Activities [page 246]

Related Information
Standard Application Roles [page 239]
Permissions at the Activity Level [page 241]

10.1 Users
You can find information about creating and working with users in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud in this section.
As a system administrator for SAP BusinessObjects Cloud, you create and delete user records. You can also
import user data from another system, using a CSV file. Likewise, you can export your SAP BusinessObjects
Cloud user data to a CSV file.

Tasks:
Creating Users [page 234]
Deleting Users [page 235]
Importing Users [page 235]
Exporting Users [page 236]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

233

10.1.1 Creating Users


The system administrator must create all users for the team and assign them roles required to work with SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud.

Context
Note
You can assign the predefined SAP BusinessObjects Cloud application roles to your users. If these roles do not
fit your business case, you can create new roles for your company. It is not necessary to create new roles
before creating your business users. You can also assign roles to users on the Roles page of SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud.

Procedure
1. On the User page of the user management area, choose
table.

(New) to add a new row to the user management

2. Enter a unique User ID.


Only the following characters are permitted: uppercase letters, digits, underscores, hash marks, and
ampersands. Spaces are not allowed in the user ID. The maximum length is 127 characters.
3. Enter the user name details.
If you do not enter a user name, the User ID is used as the name.
4. Enter an Email address so that the user can receive notifications by email.
5. Select the Manager who will approve requests this user makes for changes to access rights.
6. After entering all the details, choose

(Save) from the toolbar.

The Set Password dialog opens automatically because you must enter an initial password for the new user.
7. Enter a new password for the user, and confirm your entry.
Passwords must have at least eight characters and contain at least one of each of the following character
types: upper-case letters, lower-case letters, and digits.
8. Choose

(Set Password).

If you added an email address, the system will automatically send a Welcome! email with the login address,
user name, and initial password to the new user.

Note
If you do not assign a role in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud, the minimum required permissions are assigned
to the user. The user is able to log in and to request another role that grants all required permissions. Selfservice requests for a change of role are sent by email to the user's manager who will approve and
implement the request.

234

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

Related Information
Deleting Users [page 235]
Importing Users [page 235]
Exporting Users [page 236]
Creating Roles [page 238]
Approving Requests [page 242]

10.1.2 Deleting Users


Administrators can delete user IDs that are no longer required.

Procedure
1. In the Users management table, select the user ID you want to delete by clicking the user number in the
leftmost column of the table.
This selects the complete row.
2. Choose

(Delete) from the toolbar.

A confirmation prompt is displayed as a reminder that any remaining private content of the user will be
deleted by this action. Administrators should be sure that necessary private data has been saved or exported
before removing the user ID.
3. Select OK to continue and remove the user from the system.
Private content within the permitted storage limit of each user is only removed at the time when the user is
deleted. Administrators do have permissions, however, to delete public files.

10.1.3 Importing Users


If you want to synchronize user data from other systems, you can import user data in a CSV file.

Prerequisites
The user data you want to import is stored in a CSV file.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

235

Procedure

1. On the Users page of the user management area, choose

(Import Users).

2. In the Import Users dialog, choose Select Source File to upload your CSV file.
3. Choose Define Mapping to assign the fields of your user data from the CSV file to the fields in user
management.
4. In the Map Source to Target dialog, select the appropriate entries for the Header, Line Separator, Delimiter,
and Text Qualifier.
5. Check the preview of the mapped data. If the mapping is correct, choose Define Mapping.
6. In the Import Users dialog, choose Import to upload your CSV file according to the defined mapping.

Results
The system imports all user data from the CSV file into the user management table.

10.1.4 Exporting Users


If you want to synchronize SAP BusinessObjects Cloud user data with other systems, you can export the data to a
CSV file.

Procedure

On the Users page of the user management area, choose

(Export).

Results
The system exports all user data into a CSV file that is automatically downloaded to your browser's default
download folder.

236

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

10.1.5 Mapping SAML Attributes to Users


You can map existing SAML user or group attributes to SAP BusinessObjects Cloud user profiles.

Context
The following SAML attributes can be mapped to SAP BusinessObjects Cloud:
First Name
Last Name
Display Name
Job Title
Mobile
Phone
E-Mail
Functional Area
Office Location
Language
Date Formatting
Number Formatting

Note
The option to map SAML attributes appears only if you use SAML authentication to log onto SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud.

Procedure

1. On the User page of the user management area, select

(Map SAML User Properties).

The Map SAML Attributes dialog appears.


2. Select a SAML Attribute.
The list of SAML attributes is populated with up to three available mappings. Expand the drop-down list
beside the selected attribute to change it.
If you are connecting to a remote SAP HANA system, you can click X properties found and all SAML attributes
detected will be added to the list automatically.
3. Select

(New Mapping Definition) to add additional SAML Attributes if necessary.

4. Select a Target Property for each SAML attribute.


5. Select Save.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

237

10.2 Creating Roles


You can assign the delivered SAP BusinessObjects Cloud standard application roles to your users. If they do not
fit your business case, you can use them as a template for creating individual roles that meet your business
needs.

Context

Note
You can assign roles to users on the User page and on the Roles page of the user management area. Whether
you create users first or roles first does not matter.

Procedure

1. On the Roles page of the user management area, choose


table.

(New) to add a new row to the roles management

2. In the Create New Role dialog, enter a unique name for the role and choose OK.

Note
Blanks are not allowed in the role name.
The role is created and a new page is displayed.
Next, you define the permissions for your new role for every activity either for all objects of a business
object type or individually for every existing business object. For example, to define a user who is allowed to
read all data change logs, set the indicator in the Read column of the Data Change Log row. The permission is
automatically passed on to all existing logs.
3. To define that the user should be allowed to read only a specific data change logs, choose the arrow to expand
the log node, and then set the indicator in the Read column of the specific log row.
Permission to read only the selected log is granted.
4. If you want to define permissions based on a standard role, choose
(Select Template) and select a role.
The permissions of the selected role are copied to your new role. You can easily add and remove permissions
until they are sufficient for your business needs.
5. If you have already created users that should be assigned the new role, choose
more users in the Assign Role to User dialog, and choose OK.
6. Choose

238

(Assign Role), select one or

(Settings) to define the following options in the Settings dialog:

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

Option

Description

Enable SelfService

If you activate this option, any business user can request this role for himself in the Request Roles dia
log.

Use as Default
Role

If you activate this option, the role is automatically selected in the Request Roles dialog.

Full Data Access

If you activate this option, any user who is assigned this role can see all the data of any model regard
less of how the data access for the model is defined.

Recommendation
Grant full data access carefully and only to selected users.

7. Decide which type of user should approve the role request:


Manager: The user assigned as a manager to the user requesting the role must approve the request.

Note
The manager is assigned to a user on the User page in the user management area.
Other Users: A specific user that you select from the dialog must approve the request.

Related Information
Standard Application Roles [page 239]
Permissions at the Activity Level [page 241]
Creating Users [page 234]
Approving Requests [page 242]

10.3 Standard Application Roles


SAP BusinessObjects Cloud is delivered with several standard application roles.
You can assign the standard application roles directly to end users or, if you have different business needs, you
can use them as a template for defining new roles.
Table 52: Standard Roles
Role

Description

Admin

Planning Administrator: Full Privileges


Includes all task authorizations available in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud. Usually assigned to the
system administrator to set up users and roles and to perform system transports.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

239

Role

Description

Modeler

Planning Modeler: Modeling Privileges


Includes all authorizations that are required to manage models and dimensions. Usually assigned to
the user who creates and changes models and dimensions.

Planner Reporter

Planner Reporter: Planning and Reporting Privileges


Includes all authorizations that are required to perform planning activities, such as revenue plan
ning. Usually assigned to the user who does the planning and budgeting.

Viewer

Planning Viewer: Read Privileges


Includes read-only privileges. Usually assigned to the user who is allowed only to read the data.

BI Admin

Business Intelligence Administrator: Full Privileges


Includes all task authorizations excluding those related to planning. Usually assigned to the BI sys
tem administrator to set up users and roles.

BI Content Creator

Business Intelligence Content Creator: Create and Update Privileges


Includes all authorizations that are required to manage models and dimensions not related to plan
ning. Usually assigned to the user who creates and changes non-planning models and dimensions.

BI Content Viewer

Business Intelligence Viewer: Read Privileges


Includes read-only privileges for non-planning data. Usually assigned to the user who is allowed only
to read the data.

HCP Content Creator

HANA Cloud Platform Creator: Create and Update Privileges


Includes all authorizations that are required to manage models and dimensions not related to plan
ning. Usually assigned to the user who creates and changes non-planning models and dimensions.

Note
The HCP roles allow access only to SAP HANA Cloud Platform (HCP) as a data source.

HCP Content Viewer

HANA Cloud Platform Viewer: Read Privileges


Includes read-only privileges for non-planning data. Usually assigned to the user who is allowed only
to read the data.

Note
The HCP roles allow access only to SAP HANA Cloud Platform (HCP) as a data source.

Predictive Analyst

Predictive Analyst: Automated Discoveries Privileges


Includes all authorizations that are required to manage models and dimensions not related to plan
ning. Usually assigned to the user who creates and changes non-planning models and dimensions.
Also allows user access to guided machine discovery workflows.

240

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

Related Information
Creating Roles [page 238]
Creating Users [page 234]

10.4 Permissions at the Activity Level


You can control activities on specific business objects.
When creating roles in user management, the administrator defines the permissions by activity levels for every
business object. Once you have created or imported users, the activity permissions are indirectly granted to a
user through role assignment.
Table 53:
Object

Activity

Description

Dimension

Create/Read/Update/Delete

Create, read, update, and delete a dimension

Maintain

Update members in a dimension

Create/Read/Update/Delete

Create, read, update, and delete a dimension

Maintain

Update members during a currency conversion

Create/Read/Update/Delete

Create, read, update and delete a model

Maintain

Import transaction data into a model

Create/Read/Update/Delete

Create, read, update and delete a model

Execute

Calculate KPI

Share

Share a KPI with other users

Role

Create/Read/Update/Delete

Create, read, update and delete a role

User

Create/Read/Update/Delete

Create, read, update and delete a user

Activity Log

Read/Delete

Read and delete activity log data

Data Change Log

Read/Delete

Read and delete data change log data for the specified models

Lifecycle

Maintain

Manage the content lifecycle (import, export, transport)

Event Category

Read/Update

Read/change an event category

External Connection

Read

Connect to an external system

Update

Manage the connection to an external system

Currency Conversion

Model

KPI

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

241

Related Information
Creating Users [page 234]
Creating Roles [page 238]
Activities [page 246]
Standard Application Roles [page 239]

10.5 Approving Requests


To reduce the cost of system administration, every user can easily request missing roles in SAP BusinessObjects
Cloud. Another user with appropriate authorization then approves the requested role assignment.

Prerequisites
A business user has sent a request for additional roles.
A system administrator or user with permission to approve the request has received it.

Note
This approver is defined in the settings of a role and can be:
The business users's manager who is assigned in the user management area.
Any user with permission to change user data as defined in the role management area.

Procedure
As an Approver, do the following:
1. Once you are notified that a role assignment has been requested, from the main menu choose

Users

Requests .
2. Do one of the following:
To approve a request, select the User ID and choose Approve. When you confirm the informational
message that displays, the requested roles are immediately assigned to the user.
To reject a request, select the User ID and choose Reject. In the dialog that displays, you can enter a
reason explaining why you rejected the request.

242

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

Related Information
Creating Roles [page 238]
User Profiles [page 8]

10.6 Creating or Changing User Passwords


In the user management area, an administrator can create an initial password for a user, or change a password if a
user has forgotten it.

Context
There are two ways to change a password: an administrator can change a password for a user in the Users list, or
a user can change a password in their User Profile. The following task shows how an administrator can create or
change a password.

Note
If a user is connecting with an SAML Identity Provider (IdP), or SAP Cloud ID, the password change
functionality will not be available in the users list. Users connecting via SAML must use the User Profile dialog to
change their passwords.

Procedure
1. On the Users page, select one or more rows in the users list.
2. Select

(Set Password).

Note
If one or more selected users uses an SAML IdP, or SAP Cloud ID, the Set Password icon will be disabled.
3. Enter a password and confirm your entry.
The password must have at least eight characters and contain at least one of the following character types:
uppercase, lowercase, or numbers.
4. Choose Set Password.
If a valid email address exists for the user, the system automatically sends an email containing the user name
and new password to the user.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

243

Related Information
User Profiles [page 8]

10.7 Data Changes


Once you have activated the data auditing settings in the Preferences dialog of a model, SAP BusinessObjects
Cloud logs all changes to the transaction data of that model.

Audit Scope
Data Audit logs all the changes to the transaction data in any model that enables data auditing. The audit data is
logged when data is published from a private version. All changed cells in the published version will be audited.
The audit information for each changed cell includes the following:
Date and time of the change
User who made the change
Original value
New value

Audit Report
You can build multi-dimensional reports to view all data changes on any data region. If the data region contains an
aggregated node, the system will perform aggregation in the report.
To display the report, your user ID must be assigned to a role that grants Read permission on the Data Change
Log.

Related Information
Downloading and Deleting Data Changes [page 245]

244

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

10.8 Downloading and Deleting Data Changes


To reduce the size of the Data Changes log, you can first download part or all of the data change log for a model as
CSV files, and then delete those log entries from the system.

Prerequisites
You must have Read and Delete permissions on the Data Change Log for the appropriate model.

Procedure

1. Select

Users

Data Changes .

2. From the Select Model list, choose a model.


3. Select

(Download options).

4. In the Download Data Changes dialog, type a file name for the download in the Name field.
5. Select a Starting Date and an End Date and select Download.
The rows within the dates that you specified are downloaded as CSV files with up to 75 000 rows each.
6. To delete data change data for the model, select the

(Delete options) icon.

7. In the Delete Data Changes dialog, select a Time period.


8. If you choose Specific range, set a Starting Date and an End Date.
It is recommended to delete the same range that you downloaded.
9. Select Delete.
Any data change rows for the model in the specified time period are deleted from the system.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

245

10.9 Activities
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud logs all activities users perform on business objects, for example, making changes on
a model.

Audited Activities Listed by Object


Table 54:
Audited Object

Audited Activity

Model

Create/Update/Delete

Currency

Create/Update/Delete

Dimension

Create/Update/Delete

KPI

Create /Update/Delete/Share

Role

Create/Update/Delete/Assign

User

Create/Update/Delete/Assign

File/Folder

Create/Update/Delete/Share

Story

Create/Update/Delete

Input Schedule

Create/Update/Delete/Share

Discussion

Create/Update/Delete

User Preference

Change

System Connection

Create/Delete

In addition, SAP BusinessObjects Cloud logs failed attempts to create, delete, and change objects in the following
situations:
Missing authorization
Disallowed or invalid change

Audit Level
You can also configure the level of the audit by the global parameter sap.fpa.services.audit.Level. Find the
appropriate values in the following table:
Table 55:
Audit Level

Description

Logs only successful changes on objects

Logs successful changes on objects and unauthorized at


tempts to change objects

246

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

Audit Level

Description

-1

Logs successful changes on objects and unauthorized or dis


allowed attempts to change objects

-2 (Default)

Logs successful changes on objects and any failed attempts


to change objects

Audit Report
You can build a report to selectively view the audited activities in the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud web client.
To display the report, your user ID must be assigned to a role that grants Read permission on the Activity Log.

Related Information
Downloading and Deleting Activity Data [page 247]

10.10 Downloading and Deleting Activity Data


There is a maximum limit on the number of rows in the Activities page. Users who have the Delete permission for
the Activity Log can manage its size by downloading and deleting log data.

Context
When the size of the activity log approaches the limit, the users who have Delete permission will receive an email
and an alert notification. Further alerts will be sent if the log continues to grow closer to the limit.
When the activity log reaches its limit, final notifications will be sent, and then the oldest rows will be deleted from
the system to keep the log size below the limit.
To reduce the size of the log, you can first download part or all of the log as CSV files, and then delete those log
entries from the system.

Procedure
1. Select

Users

Activities .

You can also open the Activities page directly from the link in the notification email.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

247

2. If you want to filter the activities that you will download, select

(Filter).

3. In the Set Filters dialog, select the filters that you want to apply and choose a value for each filter.
Time Stamp filters will be overridden by your settings in the Download Activities dialog.

Tip
Filtering the activity log can be useful when collecting troubleshooting data, but is usually not necessary for
archiving activity log data.
4. To remove filters, select Reset to Initial Filters in the Set Filters dialog.
5. Select

(Download options).

6. In the Download Activities dialog, type a file name for the download in the Name field.
7. Select a Starting Date and an End Date and select Download.
The rows within the dates and filters that you specified are downloaded as CSV files with up to 75 000 rows
each.
8. To delete activity data, select the

(Delete options) icon.

9. In the Delete Activities dialog, select a Time period.


10. If you choose Specific range, set a Starting Date and an End Date.
It is recommended to delete the same range that you downloaded. Note that filters applied in the Activities
page do not apply to the delete operation.
11. Select Delete.
All activity rows in the specified time period are deleted from the system.

248

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Security

11

Deployment

In Deployment, you can create and manage exports and imports of content.
You can export the following:
Perspectives
Models
Currencies
Roles
KPIs
Value driver trees
File resources folders and files
You can export to a local file or to a delivery unit on a server from which another system can transport.
You can import content into the application from local files or from systems.
When you import or export content in Deployment, you name and save the details of the imports and exports as
units or delivery units. The units are listed in the Import and Export windows, along with details such as their
status, and start and finish times. This allows you to examine and manage your import and export history. For
example, you can open a delivery unit to view what content was imported or exported, such as perspectives. You
can also re-open and re-use a unit, or amend its details and re-export/re-export as required.
You must be assigned a role with Deployment MAINTAIN permissions if you want to perform deployment.

Caution
It is not recommended to use exports to archive content. Content can only be imported in the same version of
the application from which it was exported, or the subsequent version. After your system is upgraded again,
you cannot import the content.

Tasks
Creating an Export [page 250]
Creating an Import [page 251]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Deployment

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

249

11.1

Creating an Export

To create an export unit, you select the items to export, name the export, choose the export target, and execute
the export.

Procedure
1. In the Export window, choose the New (plus sign) icon.
The New window opens. The left-hand pane contains nodes that list the content that can be exported. This
includes dimensions, models, currencies, roles, KPIs, value driver trees, and file resources.

Note
If there are dependencies between contents, its dependent content is automatically selected. You can
deselect the dependent content.
2. In the left-hand pane, select the content you want to export.
To select all the items, choose the Select All checkbox. To search for items, enter a search term in the Search
box and choose the Search (magnifying glass) icon.
The items selected for export appear in the pane on the right.
3. If you want to export the data for the items you selected, select the Data checkbox for the items in the pane on
the right.
Dimensions have master data, models have transaction data, and currencies have currency data.
4. Choose Export.
5. In the Export dialog, specify whether to Export to Local File or Export for transport.
6. Enter a name for the export unit and choose OK.
The name for the window changes from New to the name that you provided for the unit, A progress bar at the
top of the window shows how the export is being processed.

Results
Once complete, the export unit history appears in the list of unit histories in the main Export window. You can
open that unit to make changes to your previous selections and re-export the unit.

250

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Deployment

11.2

Creating an Import

To create an import, you select a file for upload, preview and confirm your choice, finalize the items and options
for import, and then initialize the import.

Procedure
1. In the Import window, choose Upload.
2. In the Upload dialog, select Upload from Local File, choose Select Source File, and browse for the file you want
to upload.
3. Select OK.
4. In the Preview dialog, check that the file is what you want to upload, and then choose Upload.
A New window opens that lists the content of the upload. For example, a KPI upload contains data on the
affected dimensions, model, and story.
5. If required, amend the import by selecting or deselecting the checkboxes for the listed content.
6. Choose the Options icon and select the options for the import.
In the Options dialog, you can select:
Update existing object
Import data only
Drop dependent objects
7. Choose OK to set the options.
8. Choose Import to start the import.
The name for the window changes from New to the name that you provided for the unit, A progress bar at the
top of the window shows how the import is being processed. The import unit history will also appear in the list
of units in the main Import window.

Results
Once complete, the import unit history appears in the list of unit histories in the main Import window. You can
open that unit to make changes to your previous selections and re-import the unit.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Deployment

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

251

12

Connections

You can create connections between SAP BusinessObjects Cloud and remote systems.
In Connections, you can create and maintain connections to remote systems. You can create connections that
allow you to import data into SAP BusinessObjects Cloud or create live data connections to remote SAP HANA
systems. You can also schedule a data import from a remote system.

Figure 1: Connections to Remote Systems

Tasks
Installing the SAP HANA Cloud Connector [page 255]
Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud Connector [page 256]
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 259]
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP BPC System [page 265]
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP BW System [page 266]

252

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

Creating an Import Data Connection to a Universe (UNX) [page 267]


Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP ERP System [page 268]
Creating an Import Data Connection to Salesforce (SFDC) [page 269]
Creating an Import Data Connection to SuccessFactors [page 270]
Creating a Live Data Connection to SAP HANA or SAP HCP via Apache HTTP Server [page 274]
Creating a Live Data Connection to SAP HANA or SAP HCP via SAP Web Dispatcher [page 278]
Scheduling an Import [page 282]

Related Information
Import Data Connection [page 253]
Live Data Connection [page 272]
Data Import [page 57]

12.1

Import Data Connection

You can create connections to remote systems to allow data acquisition by SAP BusinessObjects Cloud.
Setup is required when creating an import data connection to the following system types:
SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (BPC)
SAP Business Warehouse (BW)
SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform
SAP Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
Salesforce.com (SFDC)
SuccessFactors
SQL

Note
You can also import data from your local file system, or Google Drive, but no connection setup is required.
The following workflow describes how to set up most import data connections in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud:
1. Install the SAP HANA Cloud Connector.
2. Install the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent.
3. For SAP BW MS and SAP ERP: Install the SAP Java Cloud Connector (JCO).
4. Configure the SAP HANA Cloud Connector.
5. Configure the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent.
6. Create import data connections in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud.

Note
SuccessFactors and SFDC connections do not require the installation or configuration of the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector or the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

253

Note
SAP BPC for Netweaver connections do not require the installation or configuration of the SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud agent.

Figure 2: Import Data Connections

Tasks
Installing the SAP HANA Cloud Connector [page 255]
Installing SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 259]
Installing the SAP Java Connector (JCO) [page 261]
Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud Connector [page 256]
Configuring SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 262]
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP BW System [page 266]
Creating an Import Data Connection to a Universe (UNX) [page 267]
Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP ERP System [page 268]
Creating an Import Data Connection to Salesforce (SFDC) [page 269]
Creating an Import Data Connection to SuccessFactors [page 270]

254

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

Updating SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 264]

12.1.1 Installing the SAP HANA Cloud Connector


How to install the SAP HANA Cloud Connector to enable data acquisition.

Prerequisites
You must have an account on the target SAP HANA Cloud Platform (HCP) system. You must know the account
name, landscape host, and S-User credentials. This information can be obtained by contacting your SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud administrator, or by opening an Incident
ticket.

Context
In order to create an import data connection to an SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (BPC) system, an
SAP Business Warehouse (BW) system, an SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Universe (UNX), or an
SAP Enterprise Reporting Platform (ERP) system, you must set up and configure the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector.

Procedure
1. Download or locate an existing SAP JVM.
For supported SAP JVM versions, see SAP HANA Cloud Connector Prerequisites. You can download the SAP
JVM here.
2. Extract the SAP JVM on the server where the SAP HCC will be installed, and note the folder location.
For example, unzip the file into C:\SAP JVM\sapjvm_8.
3. Install the SAP HANA Cloud Connector on premise.
You can download the SAP HANA Cloud Connector here. You must specify the SAP JVM folder during the
installation.

Note
Ensure that you select the option to start the SAP HANA Cloud Connector after installation.
4. Perform the initial configuration.
The following information should be used in the Set Up Initial Configuration dialog:
Landscape Host: <Your SAP BusinessObjects Cloud tenant>

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

255

Account Name: <Your SAP HCP account name>


User: <S-USER username>
Password: <S-USER password>
HTTPS Proxy: If you access the internet through a proxy, specify your proxy host and port number,
otherwise leave blank.
5. Confirm that you are connected in the Connection Information area. You may need to select the Connect
button to start the connection.

Next Steps
To connect to SAP BPC MS, SAP BW, SAP UNX, or SAP ERP, you must also install and configure the SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud agent. For more information, see SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 259].
To connect to SAP BPC NW, you must configure the SAP HANA Cloud Connector. For more information, see
Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud Connector [page 256].

Related Information
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 259]
Import Data Connection [page 253]
Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud Connector [page 256]

12.1.2 Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud Connector


How to configure the SAP HANA Cloud Connector to work with SAP BusinessObjects Cloud.

Prerequisites
1. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is installed. For more information, see Installing the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 255].
2. The SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is installed. For more information, see Installing SAP BusinessObjects
Cloud Agent [page 259].

Note
Required for all import data connections except SAP BPC NW.
3. (For SAP BW and SAP ERP connections): The SAP JCO is installed. For more information, seeInstalling the
SAP Java Connector (JCO) [page 261].

256

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

Context
To enable import data connections, you must add mappings to your SAP BusinessObjects Cloud system, and all
remote systems, to the SAP HANA Cloud Connector administration page. For additional setup information, see
Configure access control for HTTP.

Procedure
1. Launch the SAP HANA Cloud Connector administration page and log on: https://<HCC HOST>:8433.

Note
Replace <HCC HOST> with the host name of the system where the SAP HANA Cloud Connector is installed.
2. Select

Access Control

Add .

3. In the Back-end Type list, select Other SAP System.


4. In the Protocol list, select HTTP.

Note
You can choose HTTPS if SSL is configured on the Apache Tomcat instance where SAP BusinessObjects
cloud is deployed.
5. Enter the internal host name and internal port number of the Tomcat server where the SAP BusinessObjects
Cloud Agent is running.

Note
The default Tomcat port is 8080 and the default HTTPS port is 8443.
6. (Optional) Enter a Virtual host name and port to use.
The default virtual host and port are the internal host and port specified in step 5. You can rename the host
and port so that the internal host name and port are not exposed. The virtual host name and port will be used
when configuring the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent.
7. In the Principal Type list, select None.
8. (Optional) Add a description for the system.
9. Select Check availability of internal host, and then select Finish.
The system should appear in the Virtual Host list.
10. Select the system.
11. In the Resources Accessible area, select Add.
12. Set the URL Path to /C4A_AGENT/.
13. Choose Path and all sub-paths, and then select save.
The state next to the virtual host should appear green.
14. Under Mapping Virtual to Internal System, select Add.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

257

15. Enter information for a remote system you want to create a connection to.
For SAP BPC NW:
Virtual and Internal host = <Host name of a BPC NW>
Virtual and Internal port = <Port of a BPC NW>
URL path = /sap/bpc
Access policy = Path and all sub-paths
For SAP BPC MS, SAP ERP, SAP BW or SAP UNX:
Virtual and Internal host = <Host name of Apache Tomcat 7>
Virtual and Internal port= <Port of Apache Tomcat 7>
URL path = /C4A_AGENT/
Access policy = Path and all sub-paths
16. Repeat steps 14, and 15, for every system you want to add.

Example

Next Steps
For all connections except for SAP BPC for Netweaver, you must configure the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent.
For more information, see Configuring SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 262].

Related Information
Installing SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 259]

258

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

12.1.3 SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent


The SAP BusinessObjects Cloud, on-premise access agent (SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent) is a connectivity
component.
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is an on-premise data connectivity component that is used to:
Import data connections from SAP Business Planning and Consolidation, version for Microsoft Platform (BPC
MS).
Import data connections from SAP Business Warehouse (BW).
Import data connections from SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform.
Import data connections from SAP ERP.

Tasks
Installing SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 259]
Configuring SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 262]
Updating SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 264]

Related Information
Connections [page 252]
Import Data Connection [page 253]
Installing the SAP HANA Cloud Connector [page 255]

12.1.3.1 Installing SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent


You must install the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent for some import data connections to work.

Prerequisites
Apache Tomcat 7 or higher is installed. For more information, see Apache Tomcat Setup

Java Standard Edition Runtime Environment (JRE) version 7 or higher must be installed.
The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is installed. For more information, see Installing the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 255].

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

259

Context
In order to create an import data connection to an SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (BPC) for Netweaver
system, an SAP Business Warehouse (BW) system, an SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Universe
(UNX), or an SAP Enterprise Reporting Platform (ERP) system, you must set up and configure the SAP HANA
Cloud Connector.

Note
As SAP BusinessObjects Cloud is updated frequently, the SAP BusinessObejcts Cloud agent may also require
updates. To avoid impacting an existing production application server, it is recommended to set up a separate
application server for SAP BusinessObejcts Cloud agent deployment. You may install Tomcat and deploy the
agent on the same machine the SAP HANA Cloud Connector is installed. For more information, see Updating
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 264].

Procedure
1. Download SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent from the SAP Support Portal.
The agent is available on the Browse Our Download Catalog
download the SAP BOBJ CLOUD AGENT.

page. Select SAP Cloud Solutions and

2. Unzip the downloaded file and rename the WAR file to C4A_AGENT.war.
3. Extract the package and copy the file C4A_AGENT.war to your Tomcat directory.
The agent will automatically deploy when Tomcat is restarted. For more information, see Tomcat Web
Application Deployment .

Note
If you plan to use Tomcat Web Application Manager to deploy the WAR file, you need to update web.xml
under C:\Program Files\Apache Software Foundation\Tomcat 7.0\webapps\manager\WEBINF\ and change <max-file-size> and <max-request-size> to a limit higher than 52428800.
4. Create a user for the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent and assign the Services role to the user.
To create a user, add the following lines to the tomcat-users.xml file in the tomcat conf directory.
<role rolename="Services"/>
<user username="CloudAgent" password="Welcome1" roles="Services"/>

Note
Replace CloudAgent with a user name for the SAPbusinessObjects Cloud agent, and replace Welcome1
with a password for the user.
The user credentials will be needed later for setting up the connection to SAP BusinessObjects Cloud. For
more information about how to create the user and assign the role, see Configuring Manager Application
Access .

260

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

5. Save the tomcat-users.xml file.


6. Restart the Tomcat application server for the settings to take effect.

Note
If you also are creating a connection to SAP BW or SAP ERP, it is recommended to install the SAP JCO
before restarting the Tomcat application server. For more information, see Installing the SAP Java
Connector (JCO) [page 261].
7. (Optional) To test if the installation was successful, open the following URL in your browser: http://
[Host]:[Port]/C4A_AGENT/service/api/epm/bw
The following success message should be displayed:
200

Next Steps
For connections to SAP BW or SAP ERP, you must install the SAP Java Connector. For more information, see
Installing the SAP Java Connector (JCO) [page 261].
For all other connections, you must configure the SAP HANA Cloud Connector. For more information, see
Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud Connector [page 256].

Related Information
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 259]
Updating SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 264]
Import Data Connection [page 253]

12.1.3.2 Installing the SAP Java Connector (JCO)


How to install the SAP JCO to enable SAP Business Warehouse (BW) and SAP Enterprise Reporting Platform
(ERP) connectivity via the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent.

Prerequisites
1. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is installed. For more information, see Installing the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 255].
2. The SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is installed. For more information, see Installing SAP BusinessObjects
Cloud Agent [page 259].

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

261

Note
Required for all import data connections except SAP BPC NW.

Procedure
1. Download SAP Java Connector (SAP JCO), version 3.0.12 or higher.
The SAP JCO is available on the SAP Software Downloads Center
SAP Software Download Center. Search
for Java connector and download the 64 bit Java connector for the appropriate operating system.

Note
You must ensure that the version of the SAP JCO you download is compatible with your on-premise SAP
system.
2. Copy files into one of the following locations:
On a Windows server, put the sapjco3.jar and sapjco3.dll files in the lib folder of Apache Tomcat.
On a Linux server, put the sapjco3.jar and libsapjco3.dll in the lib folder of Apache Tomcat.

Next Steps
You must configure the SAP HANA Cloud Connector. For more information, see Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 256].

12.1.3.3 Configuring SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent


How to configure the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent settings in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud.

Prerequisites
1. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is installed. For more information, see Installing the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 255].
2. The SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is installed. For more information, see Installing SAP BusinessObjects
Cloud Agent [page 259].

Note
Required for all import data connections except SAP BPC NW.

262

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

3. (For SAP BW and SAP ERP connections): The SAP JCO is installed. For more information, seeInstalling the
SAP Java Connector (JCO) [page 261].
4. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is configured. For more information, see Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 256].

Procedure
1. Log on to SAP BusinessObjects Cloud with an administrator account.
2. Go to

System

Administration

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent .

3. Enter the following information:


Host: Virtual host specified during the SAP HANA Cloud Connector configuration. For more information,
see Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud Connector [page 256].
Port: Virtual port specified during the SAP HANA Cloud Connector configuration. For more information,
see Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud Connector [page 256].
Username: Agent user name specified in tomcat-users.xml file. For more information, see Installing
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 259].
Password: Agent password specified in tomcat-users.xml file. For more information, see Installing SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 259].
4. Save the connection.

Next Steps
You must set up connections to your on-premise systems. For the list of systems that require configuration, see
Import Data Connection [page 253].

Related Information
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 259]
Installing SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 259]
Updating SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 264]
Import Data Connection [page 253]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

263

12.1.3.4 Updating SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent


How to update the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent.

Prerequisites
Apache Tomcat 7 or higher is installed. For more information, see Apache Tomcat Setup

Java Standard Edition Runtime Environment (JRE) version 7 or higher must be installed.

Procedure
1. Undeploy the existing SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent running on Apache Tomcat.
2. If Apache Tomcat cannot undeploy the contents successfully, do the following:
a. Stop Tomcat.
b. Delete \Apache Software Foundation\Tomcat 7.0\webapps\C4A_AGENT\ and any subfolders
and files.
c. Restart Tomcat.
3. Download SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent from the SAP Support Portal. Unzip the downloaded file and
rename the WAR file to C4A_AGENT.war.
The agent is available on the Browse Our Download Catalog
download the SAP BOBJ CLOUD AGENT.

page. Select SAP Cloud Solutions and

4. Unzip the downloaded file and rename the WAR file to C4A_AGENT.war.
5. Extract the package and copy the file C4A_AGENT.war to your Tomcat directory.
The agent will automatically deploy when Tomcat is restarted. For more information, see Tomcat Web
Application Deployment .
6. Restart the Tomcat application server for the settings to take effect.

Note
If you also are creating a connection to SAP BW or SAP ERP, it is recommended to install the SAP JCO
before restarting the Tomcat application server. For more information, see Installing the SAP Java
Connector (JCO) [page 261].

Related Information
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 259]
Installing SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 259]
Import Data Connection [page 253]

264

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

12.1.4 Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP BPC


System
You can create a connection that allows you to import data and models from a SAP Business Planning and
Consolidation (BPC) system.

Prerequisites
To connect to SAP BPC for SAP NetWeaver, version 10.0 SP12 or higher, or 10.1 SP2 or higher, you have
completed the following tasks:
1. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is installed. For more information, see Installing the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 255].
2. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is configured. For more information, see Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 256].
To connect to SAP BPC for Microsoft Platform, version 10.0 SP12 or higher, or 10.1 SP2 or higher, you have
completed the following tasks:
1. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is installed. For more information, see Installing the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 255].
2. The SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is installed. For more information, see Installing SAP BusinessObjects
Cloud Agent [page 259].
3. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is configured. For more information, see Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 256].
4. The SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is configured in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud. For more information,
see Configuring SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 262].

Procedure

1. On the Connections screen, choose

Import Data Connection

BPC .

2. In the New BPC Connection dialog, enter the following information:


a. A name and a description for the connection.
b. In the Connection Details section, enter a System Type, Host Name, and a Port.
c. In the Credentials section, enter the User ID and the Password for your BPC system.
3. Choose Create.
The new connection is added to the list of connections on the Connections screen.

Related Information
About Importing from BPC [page 70]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

265

12.1.5 Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP BW


System
How to create a connection that allows you to import models from an SAP Business Warehouse (BW) system.

Prerequisites
You are connecting to an SAP BW system, version 7.4 SP13 or above.
You have completed the following setup tasks:
1. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is installed. For more information, see Installing the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 255].
2. The SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is installed. For more information, see Installing SAP BusinessObjects
Cloud Agent [page 259].
3. The SAP JCO is installed. For more information, seeInstalling the SAP Java Connector (JCO) [page 261].
4. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is configured. For more information, see Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 256].
5. The SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is configured in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud. For more information,
see Configuring SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 262].

Procedure

1. On the Connections screen, choose

Import Data Connection

BW .

2. In the New BW Connection dialog, enter the following information:


a. A name and a description for the connection.
b. In the Connection Details section, enter a System Type, Host Name, and a Port.
c. In the Credentials section, enter the User ID and the Password for your BW system.
3. Choose Create.
The new connection is added to the list of connections on the Connections screen.

Related Information
Importing a Model from a BW System [page 75]

266

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

12.1.6 Creating an Import Data Connection to a Universe (UNX)


You can create a connection that allows you to import an SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform
universe (UNX).

Prerequisites
You are connecting to a supported version of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform. For
information on supported versions, see System Requirements and Technical Prerequisites [page 287].
You have completed the following setup tasks:
1. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is installed. For more information, see Installing the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 255].
2. The SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is installed. For more information, see Installing SAP BusinessObjects
Cloud Agent [page 259].
3. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is configured. For more information, see Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 256].
4. The SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is configured in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud. For more information,
see Configuring SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 262].

Procedure

1. On the Connections screen, choose

Import Data Connection

Universe .

2. Enter the connection details.


For the System name, enter the Central Management Server name and port:
cms_machinename(:cms_port). For example, my_cms.my_company:6400.
Choose the appropriate Authentication Type: Enterprise, LDAP, Windows AD, or SAP.
3. Choose Create.
The new connection is added to the list of connections on the Connections screen.

Related Information
Creating a Model from a Universe [page 79]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

267

12.1.7 Creating an Import Data Connection to an SAP ERP


System
You can create a connection that allows you to import data from an SAP ERP system.

Prerequisites
You use a supported version of SAP ERP Central Component. For information on supported versions, see System
Requirements and Technical Prerequisites [page 287].
You have completed the following setup tasks:
1. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is installed. For more information, see Installing the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 255].
2. The SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is installed. For more information, see Installing SAP BusinessObjects
Cloud Agent [page 259].
3. The SAP JCO is installed. For more information, seeInstalling the SAP Java Connector (JCO) [page 261].
4. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is configured. For more information, see Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 256].
5. The SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is configured in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud. For more information,
see Configuring SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 262].

Procedure

1. On the Connections screen, choose

Import Data Connection

SAP ERP .

2. Enter the connection details and your login credentials.


If you're connecting to a Message Server, the services file on the computer where your SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud agent is deployed may need to be configured. Have your IT department perform the
following steps:
1. Contact your SAP BASIS Administrator for the port number of the Message Server you are connecting to.
If you are the SAP BASIS Administrator, you can find the Message Server name and port number by
logging into the SAP system, and using transaction SMMS. In the Message Server Monitor, the Message
Servers and their port numbers are shown. For example: Message (3601).
2. Edit the services file, located in the following directory:
C:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\services
3. Add this Message Server entry:
sapms<SID> <Port Number>/tcp #SAP System Message Server Port
For example, if the SAP Message Server <SID> is R79, and the port number is 3601, the entry to add to
the services file is:
sapmsR79 3601/tcp #SAP System Message Server Port
If the Message Server entry has already been added, confirm that the port number is correct.
4. Save the file.

268

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

3. Choose Create.
The new connection is added to the list of connections on the Connections screen.

Related Information
Creating a Model from SAP ERP data [page 81]
Importing SAP ERP Data into an Existing Model [page 82]

12.1.8 Creating an Import Data Connection to Salesforce


(SFDC)
You can create a connection that allows you to import data from salesforce.com (SFDC).

Prerequisites
A valid SFDC account is required to import data from SFDC to SAP BusinessObjects Cloud. If you want to use
OAuth for authentication and authorization, a proper setup on SFDC is required to enable the OAuth connection.
For more information, see the OAuth 2.0 on Force
documentation. If you are in a multi-tenant environment, the
OAuth client callback URL should be: https://<FPA_SERVER_HOST>/sap/fpa/services/rest/fpa/dae?
action=getOAuthToken&tenant=<Tenant ID>
Otherwise, the OAuth client callback URL should be: https://<FPA_SERVER_HOST>/sap/fpa/services/
rest/fpa/dae

Procedure

1. On the Connections screen, choose

Import Data Connection

Salesforce Connector .

2. In the Salesforce Connector dialog, do the following:


a. Enter a name for the connection.
b. Select the type of authentication you want to configure.
There are two types of authentication for the Salesforce Connector: Basic Authentication and OAuth2
Authentication.
c. Enter the information required for the type of authentication you chose to configure.
To configure a Basic Authentication, enter the Username and Password for your SFDC account.
To configure an OAuth2 Authentication, enter the OAuth Url, Client ID, and Client Secret.
The OAuth Url defaults to https://login.salesforce.com/services/oauth2/authorize. The
Client ID and Client Secret can be found in your SFDC setup page.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

269

3. Choose OK.
If you chose to configure an OAuth2 Authentication, follow the steps on the screen to finish creating the
connection.
The new connection is added to the list of connections on the Connections screen.

12.1.9 Creating an Import Data Connection to SuccessFactors


You can create a connection that allows you to import models from SuccessFactors.

Prerequisites
A valid SuccessFactors account is required to import data from SuccessFactors to SAP BusinessObjects Cloud. A
proper setup on SuccessFactors is also required to enable the connection. For more information, see the following
topics in the HCM Suite OData API documentation: Registering your OAuth Client Application and API Endpoint
URLs.

Procedure
1. On the Connections screen, choose

Import Data Connection

SuccessFactors .

2. In the New SuccessFactors Connection dialog, do the following:


a. Enter a name for the connection.
b. Enter the service URL published during your SuccessFactors configuration.
The service URL is based on the data center you are connecting to and can be found in the
SuccessFactors documentation.
c. Enter the SuccessFactors User ID of the user you want to import data from.
d. Enter the Client ID used to connect to SuccessFactors.
This is the Oauth client application ID provided by SuccessFactors during registration.
e. Enter the Private Key generated during the SuccessFactors registration process.
After you download the provided certificate, paste the private key in this field.
f. Enter your Company ID used by SuccessFactors.
3. Choose Create.
The new connection is added to the list of connections on the Connections screen.

Related Information
Importing a Model from SuccessFactors [page 77]

270

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

12.1.10 Creating an Import Data Connection to an SQL


Database
You can create a connection that allows you to import data from an SQL database.

Prerequisites
You have completed the following setup tasks:
1. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is installed. For more information, see Installing the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 255].
2. The SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is installed. For more information, see Installing SAP BusinessObjects
Cloud Agent [page 259].
3. The SAP HANA Cloud Connector is configured. For more information, see Configuring the SAP HANA Cloud
Connector [page 256].
4. The SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is configured in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud. For more information,
see Configuring SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent [page 262].
5. You have installed a JDBC driver. If you haven't already installed a JDBC driver, follow these steps:
1. Download and install JDBC drivers for the databases that you want to connect to.
2. Create a .properties file that specifies the paths to JDBC drivers you want to use, and place it in the
same file system where the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent is installed. The properties file can have
any name. Example file:
#MS SQL Server 2008=
#MS SQL Server 2012=
#MS SQL Server 2014=
#MySQL 5=
3. Modify your .properties file by un-commenting the lines of the databases you want to connect to, and
entering the path to the driver as the property value. If the driver requires more than one .jar file, the
paths can be separated by a semicolon.

Note
The names of databases in your properties file must exactly match the names shown in this example.
4. Restart the agent, using either the Java option -DSAP_CLOUD_AGENT_PROPERTIES_PATH or an
environment variable SAP_CLOUD_AGENT_PROPERTIES_PATH to specify the complete path up to and
including the properties file. Example path: C:\<full path to file>\DriverConfig.properties.

Procedure
1. In Modeler, while creating a new SQL Database model or importing data into an existing SQL Database model,
choose Create New Connection.
2. Enter the connection details and your login credentials.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

271

3. Choose Create.
The new connection is added to the list of connections on the Connections screen.

Related Information
Creating a Model from an SQL Database [page 83]
Importing SQL Data into an Existing Model [page 84]

12.2 Live Data Connection


You can create live data connections to on-premise SAP HANA systems, or SAP HANA Cloud Platform (HCP).
In SAP BusinessObjects Cloud, you can create models from data sources in remote systems, build stories based
on those models, and perform online analysis without data replication. This feature allows SAP BusinessObjects
Cloud to be used in scenarios where data cannot be moved into the cloud for security or privacy reasons. Due to
the Same Origin Policy (SOP), the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud web client cannot connect directly to a remote
system. Remote connectivity must be established via an external proxy or the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud
Service.
You can only create live data connections to remote SAP HANA systems or SAP HCP.

272

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

Figure 3: Live Data Connections

Note
The following features are not supported for data sources that use live data connections:
In Models
Planning features
Definition of additional measures with complex formulas (LOOKUP, CAGR, SMA, YoY, and so on)
Opening a model with parameters without default values
Adding measures using the exception aggregation column Aggregation Dimension
In Stories
Usage of cross-tabulation analysis based on remote models
Value help for parameters with value help view
Parent-child hierarchies for remote HANA views in story widgets
Viewing choropleth chart layers
Aggregation calculations
Geospatial features

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

273

Tasks
Creating a Live Data Connection to SAP HANA or SAP HCP via Apache HTTP Server [page 274]
Creating a Live Data Connection to SAP HANA or SAP HCP via SAP Web Dispatcher [page 278]

Related Information
Connections [page 252]
Creating a Model from a Live Data Connection [page 77]

12.2.1 Creating a Live Data Connection to SAP HANA or SAP


HCP via Apache HTTP Server
To connect your SAP HANA Cloud Platform (HCP) system or your on-premise SAP HANA system to SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud, you need to install and configure an HTTP server as a reverse proxy or use an existing
server in your intranet for that purpose.

Prerequisites
You are using SAP HANA SPS10, revision 102.2 or above with SAP HANA Info Access Service (InA), version
4.10.0 or above or an HCP system, running on SAP HANA compliant with the above-mentioned requirements.
You have installed and configured an HTTP server of your choice in the same network as your on-premise
system. This example uses Apache HTTP server.
You have activated the SAP HANA Info Access Service on your system.
You have created an SAP HANA Info Access user with the appropriate authorizations (INA_USER).

Note
For more information on how to set up your SAP HANA Info Access Service and your user, see Installing
the SAP HANA Info Access Toolkit, API and Service.

Procedure
1. Configure pass rules for the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud back end.
a. Open %Apache_Home%\conf\httpd.conf, add the following rules at the end of the file, and then restart
the Apache service to make your changes effective:

274

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

Code Syntax
ProxyPass /sap/ https://[SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Server]:[Port]/sap/
ProxyPassReverse /sap/ https://[SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Server]:
[Port]/sap/

Note
If the remote system only supports HTTPS, you need to access SAP BusinessObjects Cloud via HTTPS
as well and need to maintain an HTTPS dispatcher rule. The default port of HTTPS for the SAP HANA
development environment is 43<instance number>. Otherwise, you can use HTTP.
b. You can test if the rules are set up correctly by opening the following URL. You should seeSAP
BusinessObjects Cloud.
http(s)://[Apache Web Host]:[Apache Web Port]/sap/fpa/ui
2. Configure pass rules for the remote system.
a. Open %Apache_Home%\conf\httpd.conf, add the following rules at the end of the file, and then restart
the Apache service to make your changes effective:

Code Syntax
ProxyPass /[PATH]/ https://[Remote System Host]:[Port]/
ProxyPassReverse /[PATH]/ https://[Remote System Host]:[Port]/
b. You can test if the dispatcher rules for the remote system work properly by opening the following URL. If
you see the JSON response, the rule is set up correctly.
http(s)://[Apache Web Host]:[Apache Web Port]/[PATH]/sap/bc/ina/service/v2/
GetServerInfo
3. If you want to configure route rules for SAML SSO, proceed as follows:
a. Configure the reverse proxy. To do so, open %Apache_Home%\conf\httpd.conf, add the following
rules at the end of the file, and then restart the Apache service to make your changes effective:

Code Syntax
ProxyPass /sap/ https://[SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Server]:[Port]/sap/
ProxyPassReverse /sap/ https://[SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Server]:
[Port]/sap/
<Location /sap/>
ProxyPassReverse /sap/
</Location>

Note
This configuration supports relative path redirection from the SAP HANA XS SAML Logon.
If only one tenant is bound to the specific identity provider, the following rules need be added as well:

Code Syntax
ProxyPass /t/[Tenant ID] https://[SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Server]:
[Port]/t/[Tenant ID]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

275

ProxyPassReverse /t/[Tenant ID] https://[SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Server]:


[Port]/t/[Tenant ID]
b. Configure rules for the remote SAP HANA System:

Code Syntax
ProxyPass /[PATH]/ https://[Remote System Host]:[Port]/
ProxyPassReverse /[PATH]/ https://[Remote System Host]:[Port]/
<Location /[PATH]/>
ProxyPassReverse /
ProxyPassReverseCookiePath /sap/hana/xs/saml /[PATH]/sap/hana/xs/saml
</Location>

Note
This configuration supports a SAML session and relative path redirection from the HANA XS SAML
Logon.
c. Add rules for SAML Identity Providers:
For ADFS as an identity provider, add the following:

Code Syntax
ProxyPass /adfs/ https://[Your ADFS Server]/adfs/
ProxyPassReverse /adfs/ https://[Your ADFS Server]/adfs/
<Location /adfs/>
ProxyHTMLEnable on
ProxyHTMLURLMap https://[SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Server]:[Port]/
sap /sap
ProxyHTMLURLMap https://[Remote Server]:[Port]/[PATH]
</Location>
For SAP Cloud Identity Server as an identity provider, add the following:

Code Syntax
ProxyAddHeaders off
ProxyPassReverseCookieDomain [SAP Cloud Identity Server] [Your Reversed
Proxy Host Name]
ProxyPass /saml2/ https://[SAP Cloud Identity Server]:443/saml2/
ProxyPassReverse /saml2/ https://[SAP Cloud Identity Server]:443/saml2/
<Location /saml2/>
ProxyHTMLEnable on
SetOutputFilter proxy-html
ProxyHTMLCharsetOut *
RequestHeader unset Accept-Encoding
ProxyHTMLURLMap https://[SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Server]:[Port]/
sap /sap
ProxyHTMLURLMap https://[Remote Server]:[Port] /[PATH]
</Location>
ProxyPass /universalui/ https://[SAP Cloud Identity Server]:443/
universalui/
ProxyPassReverse /universalui/ https://[SAP Cloud Identity Server]:443/
universalui/

276

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

4. Add a remote system to SAP BusinessObjects Cloud:


a. Log onto SAP BusinessObjects Cloud and go to
Data Connection

Connection

Connections

Add Connection

Live

SAP HANA .

b. In the Create New Connection dialog, enter a name for your new connection (it cannot be changed later).
c. The connection type is Path.
d. The system type is HANA.
The minimum supported system version is listed on the user interface.
e. In the Path Prefix field, enter the /[PATH] value defined above. (For example, /BWA.)
f. Enter your credentials for the remote system. Or, if you are using Single Sign-On, deselect the Credentials
Are Required checkbox.

Note
After creating a connection to a remote system and before creating a model from a remote system,
you need to log off and log on again.
5. Create a model from remote system:
a. In SAP BusinessObjects Cloud, navigate to Modeler.
b. In Modeler, choose the New Model icon and then Import a Model from SAP HANA or, if you want to import
multiple models, choose the Import Data icon and in the drop-down menu, choose Import Multiple Models
from HANA.
c. In the dialog that appears, select a remote system and a data source.

Note
When creating a model from a remote view, the list of SAP HANA views that you can choose from
displays only technical names. You can search for labels (if there are any) and for technical names
when there is no label.
d. In the New Model section, enter a name (it cannot be changed later) and a description for your new
model.
e. Choose OK to generate your model.
The newly created model appears in the list. Now you can use this model as a data source in stories.

Note
Measure definitions, descriptions, units of measure or currency, aggregation types, and so on modeled in
the underlying SAP HANA view are not shown in Modeler but are picked up from the underlying SAP HANA
view and are, where applicable, utilized in stories.

Related Information
Live Data Connection [page 272]
Creating a Model from a Live Data Connection [page 77]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

277

12.2.2 Creating a Live Data Connection to SAP HANA or SAP


HCP via SAP Web Dispatcher
This document describes how to connect your remote system (for example, SAP HANA Cloud Platform) to SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud by using SAP Web Dispatcher as an external reverse proxy.

Prerequisites
You are using SAP HANA SPS10, revision 102.2 or above with SAP HANA Info Access Service (InA), version
4.10.0 or above or an HCP system, running on SAP HANA compliant with the above-mentioned requirements.
You have activated the SAP HANA Info Access Service on your system.
You have created an SAP HANA Info Access user with the appropriate authorizations (INA_USER).

Note
For more information on how to set up your SAP HANA Info Access Service and your user, see Installing
the SAP HANA Info Access Toolkit, API and Service.

Procedure
1. Install the SAP Web Dispatcher.

Note
For more information how to do that, see the SAP Web Dispatcher Installation Guide
may also see SAP Web Dispatcher Installation .

. In addition, you

2. Configure pass rules for the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud back end.
a. You need to create a default profile in SAP Web Dispatcher. You can do so by either running sapwebdisp
-bootstrap or by creating a text file with the sample content listed below. You can modify the content,
as needed.

Note
In all examples, you need to replace the values in square brackets with your own values.

Source Code
SAPSYSTEM = 66
DIR_EXECUTABLE = .
DIR_INSTANCE = .
rdisp/mshost = binmain
ms/http_port = 8081
wdisp/auto_refresh = 120
wdisp/max_servers = 100
wdisp/HTTPS/dest_logon_group = HTTPS

278

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

wdisp/HTTPS/max_client_ip_entries = 100000
wdisp/HTTPS/sticky_mask = 255.255.255.0
icm/server_port_0 = PROT=HTTP,PORT=[SAP Web Dispatcher Port]
icm/server_port_1 = PROT=HTTPS,PORT=[SAP Web Dispatcher Port]
icm/min_threads = 20
icm/max_threads = 40
icm/max_conn = 500
mpi/total_size_MB = 100
mpi/buffer_size = 65536
b. Add the following rule to the profile to redirect the /sap requests to the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud
system:

Output Code
wdisp/system_0 = SID=C4A, EXTSRV=http://[SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Host]:
[SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Port], SRCSRV=*:[SAP Web Dispatcher Port],
SRCURL=/sap, PROXY=[Web Proxy if Needed]
c. Create a Filter_Rules.txt file in the same directory as your sapwebdisp.exe, if it does not already
exist.
d. Add the following content to the profile:

Sample Code
icm/HTTP/mod_0 = PREFIX=/,FILE=./Filter_Rules.txt
e. Add the following content to Filter_Rules.txt:

Sample Code
if %{SID} = C4A
begin
SetHeader HOST [SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Host]
SetResponseHeader HOST [SAP Web Dispatcher Host]:[Port]
RegIRewriteResponseHeader LOCATION https://[SAP BusinessObjects Cloud
Host]:[Port](.*) https://[SAP Web Dispatcher Host]:[Port]$1
end

Note
These rules are required to rewrite the response from SAP BusinessObjects Cloud correctly.
3. Configure pass rules for remote systems.

Note
In all examples, replace the contents between the square brackets with your real values.
a. Add the following rule for remote requests to the profile:

Sample Code
wdisp/system_1 = SID=REM, EXTSRV=http://[Remote System Host]:[Port],
SRCSRV=*:[SAP Web Dispatcher Port], SRCURL=/[PATH]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

279

b. The setting from the previous step will append the path to the remote URL, so a rule for changing the URL
back is needed. Add the following to the profile:

Sample Code
icm/HTTP/mod_0 = PREFIX=/,FILE=./Filter_Rules.txt
c. Create a Filter_Rules.txt file in the same directory as your sapwebdisp.exe, if it does not already
exist.
d. Add the following content to the file and save it:

Sample Code
if %{SID} = REM
begin
SetHeader clientProtocol HTTP
RegRewriteUrl ^/[PATH](.*) /$1
end

Note
Make sure to add HTTPS as well, if you need it. This rule rewrites the URL for everything before and
after the /[PATH] back to the root "/", where the InA Service resides. If you do not do this, an attempt
will be made to access the remote URL at /[PATH]/sap/.... The IF statement allows this rule to be
applied only to the specified SID.
4. Configure SSL certificates.

Note
This step is required for HTTPS dispatching, especially to systems such as HCP.
a. Download the certificate from the system you want to dispatch to. You can export the certificate from any
browser you have used to access the HTTPS URL.
b. Install the certificate into the SAP Web Dispatcher keystore. Change paths and file names as needed.

Sample Code
sapgenpse maintain_pk -a C:\Users\administrator\Desktop\neoCA.cer p C:
\webdispatcher\sec\SAPSSLC.pse
sapgenpse maintain_pk -a C:\Users\administrator\Desktop\neoCA.cer p C:
\webdispatcher\sec\SAPSSLA.pse
c. Configure the dispatcher to use SSL. Add the following to your profile and change paths as needed:

Sample Code
ssl/ssl_lib=C:\webdispatcher
ssl/client_pse=C:\webdispatcher\sec\SAPSSLC.pse
ssl/server_pse=C:\webdispatcher\sec\SAPSSLS.pse
ssl/client_pse=C:\webdispatcher\sec\SAPSSLA.pse
wdisp/ssl_encrypt=1
wdisp/ssl_auth=0

280

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

Note
For more information, see Importing Certificate Request Responses.
5. If you want to use Single Sign On (SSO) with the SAP Web Dispatcher, you need to perform the following
additional steps:

Note
Replace all values in square brackets with your actual values.
a. Add the line icm/HTTP/mod_0 = PREFIX=/,FILE=./FilterRules.txt to the main preferences file
(usually C:\webdisp\sapwebdisp.pfl).
b. Make sure that at least one secure port exists in the SAP Web Dispatcher main preferences file in the
following format: icm/server_port_1 = PROT=HTTPS,PORT=[Secure Port]
c. Confirm that you have an identity provider supporting SAML 2.0, such as SAP Cloud Identity, set up and
that this provider has been added by SAP to your SAP BusinessObjects Cloud account.
d. Open the FilterRules.txt file from the location specified in the main preferences file of SAP Web
Dispatcher and add a redirect to an SAP BusinessObjects Cloud server in one of the following formats:
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud multi-tenant mode: RegIRedirectUrl /[Path Name]/(.*) https://[SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud Server]:4300/t/[Tenant Name]$1
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud single-tenant mode: RegIRedirectUrl /[Path Name]/(.*) https://[SAP
BusinessObjects Cloud Server]:4300/sap/fpa/ui$1
e. When you open https://[SAP Web Dispatcher Server]:[Secure Port]/[Path Name], you should be
automatically logged in via Single Sign-On and presented with the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud welcome
page.

Results
You can test if you have configured the rules correctly with the following URLs:
When you open http(s)://[SAP Web Dispatcher Host]:[SAP Web Dispatcher Port]/sap/fpa/
ui/, you should see SAP BusinessObjects Cloud.
When you open http(s)://[SAP Web Dispatcher Host]:[SAP Web Dispatcher Port]/
[PATH]/sap/bc/ina/service/v2/GetServerInfo, you should see the JSON response.

Related Information
Live Data Connection [page 272]
Creating a Model from a Live Data Connection [page 77]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

281

12.3 Scheduling an Import


You can schedule an import of your data.

Context
Data sources that support scheduling:
SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (BPC)
SAP Business Warehouse (BW)
SuccessFactors HCM suite
An SFDC user-predefined dataset or entity-based model
An SAP BusinessObjects BI platform universe (UNX) query
SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC)

Procedure
1. On the main menu, choose Connection, and then go to the Import Status tab.
2. Select a scheduled import to open it.
3. For the following connection types, you can select Edit Query to make changes to the query, including
parameter values.
SAP Business Warehouse (BW)
SuccessFactors HCM suite
An SAP BusinessObjects BI platform universe (UNX) query
4. Under Schedule Setting, choose between the following options:
Scheduling Option

Description

None

The import is performed only once, upon confirmation.

Once

The import is performed only once, at a preselected time.

Repeating

The import is executed according to a recurrence pattern.


You can select a start and end date and time as well as a re
currence pattern.

Related Information
Connections [page 252]

282

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

Data Import [page 57]

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Connections

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

283

13

System

The system administrator uses the System features for administration and monitoring purposes and to read
details of system events and errors in the system log.
Access to the System Monitoring and Administration features requires administrator privileges to read and
update System Information.

Tasks:
Monitor [page 284]
Administration [page 286]

13.1

Monitor

The System Monitor provides a number of interactive dashboard-style overviews of the key areas of usage and
performance that a system administrator needs to monitor.
Monitoring information shows the current state of the system and also historical information for a selected time
frame in the last year. The monitor also includes Trace (a system log), containing details of all traceable events
and errors.
These monitoring features are available on four separate tab pages:
Overview
System Usage by Memory
System Usage by User
Trace

Overview
The Overview shows basic system information and a pie chart of memory usage. Additionally, numbers are shown
for the following metrics: Licenses in use, Number of Active Users, Number of Logins. Usage is analyzed on the
basis of user types such as Planning, Analytics, Business Intelligence, and HANA Cloud Platform, and you can
select a user type to highlight the relevant data in the charts.
You can set the time frame of the data being displayed by using the sliding scale features or choose a zoom level
ranging from 1 month to 1 year.

284

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


System

System Usage by Memory


This tab page displays two charts showing memory usage in MB for: Memory Use by Model and Memory Use by
User.
You can get easy-to-read details of the data by pointing with the mouse over the chart details, and you can use the
Sort buttons to re-sequence the data.

System Usage by User


This tab page simply shows, for each user, metrics for Transaction Count and Storage Usage in MB. If storage
space on the server is allocated and managed for individual user accounts, administrators can get a visual check
of the levels per user here.
You can sort and filter columns on this tab page using the drop-down menu in the header of each column.

Trace
The system administrator determines what levels of error messages are included in the log (see System
Configuration Trace Level in System Administration ) and how far back in time the log file goes, but the log
file may extend over many pages. The Search and Filter features are therefore useful tools for working with the log
file. Additionally, to help you identify information you are looking for, most columns of the display are sortable
using a Sort feature in the column headers.
The Search feature operates on the User Name, Component, and Message columns and filters the items listed on
screen to those that include a match with the search string you type.
The Filter feature allows you to enter a date range to select only log entries within a fixed period of time.
The following columns of data are available:
Table 56: Trace Columns
Name

Description

Time-stamp

The date and time value for each message.

Trace Level

Log messages are categorized on the basis of a severity level and the system administrator can set which
levels of message are displayed. Typically only Errors (trace level 4) are visible.

User Name

This column shows the ID of the user account that generated the message.

Component

Where relevant, the technical component name is shown here.

Message

The text of the error message. If the message text is truncated, use the mouse pointer to hover over the
message to read the text in a tooltip.

Stack

Click the link text Stack to display the text of the stack message in a popup window.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


System

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

285

Name

Description

Detail

Additional information for the error may be displayed here.

The log file is limited to a maximum of 350,000 rows of data. The oldest log entries will be deleted to maintain this
limit.
You can also manually delete log entries by selecting the Delete icon. In the Clear System Trace dialog, you can
choose to remove all log entries, or remove entries older than a specified time period.

13.2 Administration
Use the System Administration feature to set general parameters for the application and to set up connectivity
with external systems that interface with SAP BusinessObjects Cloud.
The Administration tabs are as follows:
SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent use this page to enter parameters to connect to the cloud server.
System Configuration use this page to configure miscellaneous settings.
Remote Systems use this page to manage the connections of remote systems.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent Connection


To set up the SAP BusinessObjects Cloud agent, enter the parameter values for Host, Port, User Name, and
Password.

System Configuration
Some features of the application have optional functionality that can be turned on or off here. Other settings
available here are for backend administration purposes.
The Trace Level setting determines which messages from the system log are displayed in the monitoring Trace
feature ( System Monitor ). Error messages are categorized on the basis of severity using the following
levels: Debug (1), Information (2), Warning (3), Error (4), Fatal (5).

Related Information
Connections [page 252]

286

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


System

14 System Requirements and Technical


Prerequisites

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud is a fully web-based offering. You will need an Internet connection and a system that
meets certain requirements. The requirements listed here are for the current release.

Client Software Requirements


Table 57:
Client Software

Version

Additional Information

Desktop browser

Google Chrome

Google releases continuous updates to


their Chrome browser. We make every
effort to fully test and support the latest
versions as they are released. However,
if defects are introduced with OEM-spe
cific browser software, we cannot guar
antee fixes in all cases. If you have a
question about a specific version (for ex
ample whether a specific version is sup
ported), please log a support case.
For additional system requirements, see
your web browser documentation.

Operating system

Microsoft Windows Vista

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud is not de


pendent on any specific operating sys

Microsoft Windows 7

tem. All capabilities are accessible

Microsoft Windows 8+

through a web browser.

Apple Mac OS X Lion (10.7) or higher

For additional system requirements, see


your operating system documentation.

Additional software

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


System Requirements and Technical Prerequisites

Adobe Acrobat Reader 9 or higher

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

287

Client Configuration Requirements


Table 58:
Client Configuration

Setting

Additional Information

Network bandwidth

Recommended connection speed 500


800 kbit/s or faster

In general, SAP BusinessObjects Cloud


requires no more bandwidth than is re
quired to surf the internet. All application
modules are designed for speed and re
sponsiveness with minimal use of large
graphic files.

Screen resolution

XGA 1024x768 (high color) or higher

Minimum recommended cache size

250 MB

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud is a Web 2.0


application. We recommend allowing
browser caching because the application
uses it heavily for static content such as
image files. If you clear your cache, the
browser will not perform as well until the
deleted files are downloaded again to the
browser and cached for use next time.
Newer web pages must be enabled.

HTTP 1.1

Enable

JavaScript

Enable

Cookies

Enable web browser session cookies


(non-persistent) for authentication pur
poses

Pop-up windows

Allow pop-up windows from SAP


BusinessObjects Cloud

Mobile Requirements
Table 59:
Hardware/Software

Whats Supported

Device

iPhone only for devices running iOS 8.4 or higher

288

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


System Requirements and Technical Prerequisites

Data Connectivity Import


Table 60:
Whats Supported

Versions

SAP Business Warehouse

7.4 SP13 or higher

SAP Business Planning and Consolidation Microsoft Plat

10.0 SP12 or higher SP

form
SAP Business Planning and Consolidation NetWeaver

10.1 SP2 or higher SP


10.0 SP12 or higher SP
10.1 SP2 or higher SP

SAP Business Objects Enterprise Universe (UNX)

4.1 SP05 or higher SP


4.2 SP02 build 1985

SAP Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)

6.0 EHP 07 SPS 04

Microsoft Excel (XLSX only)*

2007 or higher

Comma separated files (CSV)*

Unicode File format

Google Drive; Microsoft Excel (XLSX), Comma Separated files

Supported

(CSV) and Google Sheet


Salesforce

Supported

*Maximum file size: 40MB

Data Connectivity Live


Table 61:
Whats Supported

Remote Connection

SAP HANA

SPS10 revision 102.2 or above with SAP HANA Info Access


Service (InA), version 4.10.0 or above

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


System Requirements and Technical Prerequisites

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

289

Reverse Proxy for Live Data Connection


Table 62:
Whats Supported
SAP Web dispatcher 7.48.0
Apache HTTP Server 2.4.x

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Agent


Table 63:
Whats Required
Apache Tomcat 7.0 or higher
JRE 7
SAP Java Connector 3.0.13

SAP Digital Boardroom


Table 64: Touch Screen Support Minimum Requirements
Screen

Samsung screens ranging from 32 to 75 in size (eg. 32


Samsung DM32E,, 48 Samsung DM48E,,,55 Samsung
DM55E)

Samsung Touch Overlay

Required; matching screen size (eg. CYTD32LDAH, CYTD48LDAH, CY-TD55LDAH)

Graphics Card

AMD Fire Pro W4100 + ATI Catalyst Driver

Operating System

Microsoft Windows Vista


Microsoft Windows 7
Microsoft Windows 8+

Software

MagicIWB 3.0 1 license per screen


Latest Chrome Browser

Table 65: Non-Touch Screen Support Minimum Requirements


Screen

290

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Any vendor providing screen hardware that supports


1920x1080p screen resolution

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


System Requirements and Technical Prerequisites

Graphics card

Any vendor graphics card capable of supporting a single pro


jected desktop experience across 3 digital screens

Software

Latest Chrome Browser

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


System Requirements and Technical Prerequisites

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

291

15

Glossary

You'll find all important terms and definitions here.


Term

Definition

accounts

A special dimension that encapsulates the definition of accounts and drivers. The account is
the main focus of a planning-type model.
A member of the Accounts dimension, an account is a measure, such as revenue or
headcount (preferred term: member).

amount

A numeric value for a model intersection.

aggregation

Sum of the data of multiple rows or columns within a table.

attributes

Characteristics of a dimension member, such as ID or owner. Attributes can be displayed in


grids.

Audit

A dimension that represents the various data sources that can be used to manage the main
data and adjustments, if any. The Audit dimension can be used in calculations and in
business rules of a reporting consolidation model to segregate input data.

collaboration

Instant messaging tool that allows colleagues to discuss business content, share
information, and create tasks in real-time chat. Collaboration makes it easy to make
decisions based on the linked business content.

comment

In the collaboration tools, text added by a participant of a discussion. The text is posted in
real time in the discussion thread.

currency
conversion

Converting amounts from the source currency into a target currency using a valid exchange
rate.

Digital
Boardroom

A real-time, interactive boardroom presentation where you can combine your stories with
agenda items.

dimension

A breakdown of information that defines by what a model is analyzed, for example, by


product or geographical region.

discussion

A collection of posts that can be linked to specific business content, for example, a story. In
addition, a discussion thread can comprise notifications, tasks, and links to business
content.

event

A milestone in a process.

event category

Defines the characteristics of an event. An event category is color coded and has a name.

input form

A summary sheet created by a user in order to collect data from colleagues, characterized
by cells for which input is enabled. Creating an input form triggers an input task for selected
users. Users complete the task by opening the input form from the input task and providing
the requested information. Users indicate completion of the input form in the task.

Key Performance
Indicator (KPI)

A type of success measurement. Certain threshold values are defined for measures,
respectively, members of the Accounts dimension such as Net Revenue in a Profit and Loss
model.

292

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Glossary

Term

Definition

KPI scope

The range or extent of values to check for a KPI visualization or threshold. The scope states
the following information for each dimension in the model:
Granularity a hierarchy level.
A filter a subset of dimension members, for example France, 2015.

KPI threshold

One or more static values to which to compare each cell of the scope. For example:
< 10%
< 5 FTE, < 15 FTE
< $100, $100 - $200, >$200
Multiple thresholds can be defined for a KPI, for example, defining OK, Warning, and Critical
levels for the underlying account.

KPI threshold
interval

The range of values between successive KPI thresholds.

lock

The act of freezing individual values for example, during a disaggregation or an entire
data region; a combination of entity, time, and version, for example.

member

The accounting entities which are contained in the account.

model

A representation of a business view of dimensions, measures, and rules used as the basis for
stories. There are two types of model: Planning models, which are focused on a single
account, and Analytic models.

notification

An alert, warning, or error message raised by the application to indicate the current state
of an object.
Information about an action taken on a collaboration process, task, or event.

perspective

See dimension. The term perspective is no longer used in SAP BusinessObjects Cloud.

process

A group of events.

reminder

Notification that will be sent to all assignees who have not completed a task by the due date.
The reminder can be sent to the assignee's manager, as well, and as email.

reviewer

Someone who reviews the task that was set to done by the assigned user.

scenario

A scenario spans across multiple models. It combines certain versions out of certain models.
For example, a Best Case scenario consists of the Optimistic version of Revenue Model,
the Flat version of the Cost of Goods model, and the Increased Productivity version of the
Headcount model.

story

A presentation-style document that uses charts, visualizations, text, images, and pictograms
to describe data.

table

In Stories, a table is a representation of data in a two-dimensional tabular view, which is


typically related to a source model (although basic tables independent of any model are also
possible).

tile

A rectangular UI element that can be placed in a container and used to display content such
as text, images, and visualizations such as charts.

Time

A dimension that contains the time periods for which you store data, for example, week,
year, quarter, or custom time period.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Glossary

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

293

Term

Definition

version

A set of data implied by one or more assumptions within a category. A category can contain
multiple versions based on different assumptions. For example, category Budget can contain
an Optimistic version and a Baseline version.

294

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Glossary

Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

Coding Samples
Any software coding and/or code lines / strings ("Code") included in this documentation are only examples and are not intended to be used in a productive system
environment. The Code is only intended to better explain and visualize the syntax and phrasing rules of certain coding. SAP does not warrant the correctness and
completeness of the Code given herein, and SAP shall not be liable for errors or damages caused by the usage of the Code, unless damages were caused by SAP
intentionally or by SAP's gross negligence.

Accessibility
The information contained in the SAP documentation represents SAP's current view of accessibility criteria as of the date of publication; it is in no way intended to be a
binding guideline on how to ensure accessibility of software products. SAP in particular disclaims any liability in relation to this document. This disclaimer, however, does
not apply in cases of wilful misconduct or gross negligence of SAP. Furthermore, this document does not result in any direct or indirect contractual obligations of SAP.

Gender-Neutral Language
As far as possible, SAP documentation is gender neutral. Depending on the context, the reader is addressed directly with "you", or a gender-neutral noun (such as "sales
person" or "working days") is used. If when referring to members of both sexes, however, the third-person singular cannot be avoided or a gender-neutral noun does not
exist, SAP reserves the right to use the masculine form of the noun and pronoun. This is to ensure that the documentation remains comprehensible.

Internet Hyperlinks
The SAP documentation may contain hyperlinks to the Internet. These hyperlinks are intended to serve as a hint about where to find related information. SAP does not
warrant the availability and correctness of this related information or the ability of this information to serve a particular purpose. SAP shall not be liable for any damages
caused by the use of related information unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct. All links are categorized for transparency
(see: http://help.sap.com/disclaimer).

SAP BusinessObjects Cloud Help


Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

CUSTOMER
2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

295

go.sap.com/registration/
contact.html

2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.


No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE
or an SAP affiliate company. The information contained herein may
be changed without prior notice.
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors
contain proprietary software components of other software
vendors. National product specifications may vary.
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty
of any kind, and SAP or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for
errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only
warranties for SAP or SAP affiliate company products and services
are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements
accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well
as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks
of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other
countries. All other product and service names mentioned are the
trademarks of their respective companies.
Please see http://www.sap.com/corporate-en/legal/copyright/
index.epx for additional trademark information and notices.